5358651-1en Rev.8

GE Healthcare
Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product

Service Manual
Brivo OEC 715/Brivo OEC 785/Brivo OEC 865
5358651-1EN
Rev. 8
2013
General Electric Company
All Rights Reserved
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual
Revision History
Revision
Date (Month & Year)
Description of Change
June 2012
Initial Release
Sep. 2012
Update Information
Oct. 2012
Update Information
Nov. 2012
Update Information
Feb. 2013
Update Information
Mar. 2013
Update Information
June 2013
Update Information
July 2013
Update Information
IMPORTANT SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. PLEASE READ THIS MANUAL BEFORE USING Brivo OEC 715/Brivo OEC
785/Brivo OEC 865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product.
This manual may not be reproduced, in whole or in part, without the written permission of GE Healthcare.
Other product and company names mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
The contents of this document are accurate at the time of publication. However, changes in design and
additional features can, at any time, be incorporated in the hardware and software and may not be reflected in
this version of the document. Contact GE Healthcare Technical Support for clarification, if discrepancies arise.
The text of this manual was originally written, approved and published by the manufacturer in English.
GE HUALUN Medical Systems Co. Ltd., a General Electric company, going to market as GE Healthcare.
GE HUALUN Medical Systems Co. Ltd
No. 1 Yongchang North Road
Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area
Beijing, P.R. China 100176
Tel: 8610-58068888
Fax: 8610-67881850
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), international standards organization, when
applicable.
Brivo OEC 715/Brivo OEC 785/Brivo OEC 865 complies with the regulatory requirements of the
following:
Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices.
CE label affixed to the product testifies compliance to all requirements of the Directive.
The location of the CE 0459 label is described in this manual.
0459
European Representative:
GE Medical Systems S.C.S.
Quality Assurance Manager
283 rue de la Minire
78530 BUC France
Tel: +33 1 30 70 40 40
ii
.
(BG)
,
.
,
.

, a ,
.
(ZH-CN)
(ZH-HK)
(ZH-TW)
UPOZORENJE
(HR)
VSTRAHA
(CS)
ADVARSEL
(DA)
WAARSCHUWING
(NL)
Ovaj servisni prirunik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je duan osigurati prijevod.
Ne pokuavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti proitali i razumjeli ovaj servisni
prirunik.
Zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, moe doi do ozljede davatelja usluge, operatera ili
pacijenta uslijed strujnog udara, mehanikih ili drugih rizika.
Tento provozn nvod existuje pouze v anglickm jazyce.
V ppad, e extern sluba zkaznkm potebuje nvod v jinm jazyce, je

zajitn pekladu do odpovdajcho jazyka kolem zkaznka.
Nesnate se o drbu tohoto zazen, ani byste si peetli tento provozn nvod
a pochopili jeho obsah.
V ppad nedodrovn tto vstrahy me dojt k porann pracovnka

prodejnho servisu, obslunho personlu nebo pacient vlivem elektrickho proudu,
respektive vlivem mechanickch i jinch rizik.
Denne servicemanual findes kun p engelsk.
Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det kundens
ansvar at srge for oversttelse.
Forsg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at lse og forst denne servicemanual.
Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medfre skade p grund af elektrisk
std, mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatren eller patienten.
Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.
Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant verantwoordelijk
voor de vertaling ervan.
Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding
werd geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de
operator of een patint gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok,
mechanische of andere gevaren.
iii

WARNING
(EN)
HOIATUS
(ET)
VAROITUS
(FI)
ATTENTION
(FR)
WARNUNG
(DE)
(EL)
FIGYELMEZTETS
(HU)
iv
This service manual is available in English only.

If a customer's service provider requires a language other than english, it is the customer's
responsibility to provide translation services.
Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been consulted
and is understood.
Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or patient
from electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.
See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles
Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles, vastutab
klient tlketeenuse osutamise eest.
rge ritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt kesoleva teenindusjuhendiga
tutvumist ja sellest aru saamist.
Kesoleva hoiatuse eiramine vib phjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori vi patsiendi
vigastamist elektrilgi, mehaanilise vi muu ohu tagajrjel.
Tm huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.
Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilst vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielist materiaalia,
tarvittavan knnksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
l yrit korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmrtnyt tmn
huolto-ohjeen.
Mikli tt varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilstn, laitteiston
kyttjn tai potilaan vahingoittuminen shkiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun
vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
Ce manuel dinstallation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.
Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une langue autre que l'anglais,
il incombe au client de le faire traduire.
Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les quipements tant que ce manuel dinstallation et de
maintenance n'a pas t consult et compris.
Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraner chez le technicien, l'oprateur ou
le patient des blessures dues des dangers lectriques, mcaniques ou autres.
Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.
Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache bentigt, ist es Aufgabe des
Kunden fr eine entsprechende bersetzung zu sorgen.
Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen
und verstanden zu haben.
Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des
Kundendiensttechnikers, des Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschlge,
mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren kommen.
.

, .

.
,
, ,
.
Ezen karbantartsi kziknyv kizrlag angol nyelven rhet el.
Ha a vev szolgltatja angoltl eltr nyelvre tart ignyt, akkor a vev felelssge a
fordts elkszttetse.
Ne prblja elkezdeni hasznlni a berendezst, amg a karbantartsi kziknyvben
lertakat nem rtelmeztk.
Ezen figyelmeztets figyelmen kvl hagysa a szolgltat, mkdtet vagy a beteg
ramts, mechanikai vagy egyb veszlyhelyzet miatti srlst eredmnyezheti.

AVRUN
(IS)
AVVERTENZA
(IT)
(JA)
essi jnustuhandbk er aeins fanleg ensku.

Ef a jnustuveitandi viskiptamanns arfnast annas tungumls en ensku, er a
skylda viskiptamanns a skaffa tungumlajnustu.
Reyni ekki a afgreia tki nema a essi jnustuhandbk hefur veri skou og
skilin.
Brot sinna essari avrun getur leitt til meisla jnustuveitanda, stjrnanda ea
sjklings fr raflosti, vlrnu ea rum httum.
Il presente manuale di manutenzione disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.
Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente
tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il
presente manuale ed averne compreso il contenuto.
Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare lesioni all'addetto alla
manutenzione, all'operatore o ai pazienti provocate da scosse elettriche, urti
meccanici o altri rischi.
(KO)
.
,
.

.
RDINJUMS
(LV)
SPJIMAS
(LT)
, ,
, .
apkopes rokasgrmata ir pieejama tikai angu valod.
Ja klienta apkopes sniedzjam nepiecieama informcija cit valod, klienta
pienkums ir nodroint tulkojumu.
Neveiciet aprkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrmatas izlasanas un sapraanas.
brdinjuma neievroanas rezultt var rasties elektrisks strvas trieciena,
mehnisku vai citu faktoru izraistu traumu risks apkopes sniedzjam, operatoram vai
pacientam.
is eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik angl kalba.

Jei kliento paslaug tiekjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba ne angl, suteikti vertimo
paslaugas privalo klientas.
Nemginkite atlikti rangos technins prieiros, jei neperskaitte ar nesupratote io
eksploatavimo vadovo.
Jei nepaisysite io spjimo, galimi paslaug tiekjo, operatoriaus ar paciento sualojimai
dl elektros oko, mechanini ar kit pavoj.

ADVARSEL
(NO)
OSTRZEENIE
(PL)
AVISO
(PT-BR)
ATENO
(PT-PT)
ATENIE
(RO)
!
(RU)
UPOZORENJE
(SR)
vi
Denne servicehndboken finnes bare p engelsk.

Hvis kundens serviceleverandr har bruk for et annet sprk, er det kundens ansvar
srge for oversettelse.
Ikke forsk reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehndboken er lest og forsttt.
Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan fre til at serviceleverandren,
operatren eller pasienten skades p grunn av elektrisk stt, mekaniske eller andre
farer.
Niniejszy podrcznik serwisowy dostpny jest jedynie w jzyku angielskim.
Jeli serwisant klienta wymaga jzyka innego ni angielski, zapewnienie usugi
tumaczenia jest obowizkiem klienta.
Nie prbowa serwisowa urzdzenia bez zapoznania si z niniejszym podrcznikiem
serwisowym i zrozumienia go.
Niezastosowanie si do tego ostrzeenia moe doprowadzi do obrae serwisanta,
operatora lub pacjenta w wyniku poraenia prdem elektrycznym, zagroenia
mechanicznego bd innego.
Este manual de assistncia tcnica encontra-se disponvel unicamente em ingls.
Se outro servio de assistncia tcnica solicitar a traduo deste manual, caber ao
cliente fornecer os servios de traduo.
No tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de
assistncia tcnica.
A no observncia deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no tcnico, operador ou
paciente decorrentes de choques eltricos, mecnicos ou outros.
Este manual de assistncia tcnica s se encontra disponvel em ingls.
Se qualquer outro servio de assistncia tcnica solicitar este manual noutro idioma,
da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os servios de traduo.
No tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de
assistncia tcnica.
O no cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurana do tcnico, do
operador ou do paciente devido a choques elctricos, mecnicos ou outros.
Acest manual de service este disponibil doar n limba englez.
Dac un furnizor de servicii pentru clieni necesit o alt limb dect cea englez,
este de datoria clientului s furnizeze o traducere.
Nu ncercai s reparai echipamentul dect ulterior consultrii i nelegerii acestui
manual de service.
Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rnirea depanatorului, operatorului sau
pacientului n urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau de alt natur.

.

, - ,
.
,
,
, .
Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.
Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je duan da obezbedi
prevodilake usluge.
Ne pokuavajte da opravite ureaj ako niste proitali i razumeli ovo servisno uputstvo.
Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja moe dovesti do povreivanja servisera, rukovaoca
ili pacijenta usled strujnog udara ili mehanikih i drugih opasnosti.

UPOZORNENIE
(SK)
ATENCION
(ES)
VARNING
(SV)
OPOZORILO
(SL)
DKKAT
(TR)
Tento nvod na obsluhu je k dispozcii len v anglitine.

Ak zkaznkov poskytovate sluieb vyaduje in jazyk ako anglitinu, poskytnutie
prekladateskch sluieb je zodpovednosou zkaznka.
Nepokajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, km si nepretate nvod na obluhu a
neporozumiete mu.
Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia me spsobi zranenie poskytovatea sluieb,
obsluhujcej osoby alebo pacienta elektrickm prdom, mechanick alebo in
ohrozenie.
Este manual de servicio slo existe en ingls.
Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea el
ingls, el cliente deber encargarse de la traduccin del manual.
No se deber dar servicio tcnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido este
manual de servicio.
La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de
servicios, el operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas elctricas,
mecnicas o de otra naturaleza.
Den hr servicehandboken finns bara tillgnglig p engelska. .
Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat sprk n engelska, ansvarar
kunden fr att tillhandahlla versttningstjnster.
Frsk inte utfra service p utrustningen om du inte har lst och frstr den hr
servicehandboken.
Om du inte tar hnsyn till den hr varningen kan det resultera i skador p
serviceteknikern, operatren eller patienten till fljd av elektriska sttar, mekaniska
faror eller andra faror.
Ta servisni prironik je na voljo samo v anglekem jeziku.
e ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje prironik v drugem jeziku, mora stranka
zagotoviti prevod.
Ne poskuajte servisirati opreme, e tega prironika niste v celoti prebrali in razumeli.
e tega opozorila ne upotevate, se lahko zaradi elektrinega udara, mehanskih ali
drugih nevarnosti pokoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
Bu servis klavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.
Eer mteri teknisyeni bu klavuzu ingilizce dnda bir baka lisandan talep ederse,
bunu tercme ettirmek mteriye der.
Servis klavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara mdahale etmeyiniz.
Bu uyarya uyulmamas, elektrik, mekanik veya dier tehlikelerden dolay teknisyen,
operatr veya hastann yaralanmasna yol aabilir.
vii
Contents
Chapter1.
Introduction and Safety .......................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.
Introduction .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.1.
Objective ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2.
Scope ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.3.
Service Philosophy ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.4.
Qualifications ................................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.5.
Unauthorized Modifications .................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.6.
Manual Organization and Use ............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.
Safety ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.1.
Safety Hazard Alerts ................................................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.2.
Ingress of Fluids .......................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.3.
Electrical Shock............................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.4.
Explosion ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.5.
Thermal hazards ......................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.6.
Equipment Stability .................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.7.
X-Radiation .................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.8.
Motorized Mechanical Movement ...................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.9.
Work on Parts with Lead Materail ...................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.10.
Safety Interlock ............................................................................................................................................ 1-7
1.2.11.
Labels ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.12.
Locations of the Labels .......................................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.13.
Symbols ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-24
1.2.14.
Electromagnetic Compatibility Statement ................................................................................... 1-25
1.2.15.
Lock-Out, Tag-Out .................................................................................................................................... 1-30
Chapter2.
System Overview ....................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.
System Descriptions ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.1.
System overview ......................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2.
Component Locator .................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.1.3.
System block ................................................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.2.
viii
Subsystem ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.1.
Power Distribution and Control ........................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.2.
Mother Board.............................................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.2.3.
Mainframe Control Board ..................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.2.4.
Display Board ............................................................................................................................................. 2-32
2.2.5.
Keyboard Control Board ....................................................................................................................... 2-35
2.2.6.
Updown Board........................................................................................................................................... 2-37
2.2.7.
System Interface Board ........................................................................................................................ 2-42
2.2.8.
Collimator Control Board ...................................................................................................................... 2-47
2.2.9.
kV control and IGBT assembly ........................................................................................................... 2-50
2.2.10.
Filament Driver Board ............................................................................................................................ 2-55
2.2.11.
Monoblock ................................................................................................................................................... 2-58
2.2.12.
X-Ray/key Switche and Emergency Switch ................................................................................. 2-60
2.2.13.
Image Chain................................................................................................................................................ 2-62
2.2.14.
Computer and Peripheral ..................................................................................................................... 2-71
2.2.15.
UPS .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-73
Chapter3.
Installation ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.
Pre-Installation ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.1.
Dimensions and Weights of System .................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2.2.
Site Requirement ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.3.
Power Supply Requirement .................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.4.
Environments ................................................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.5.
Tools and Test Equipment....................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.
Unpacking .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.1.
Shipping Container Inspection ............................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.2.
Unpack C-Arm .............................................................................................................................................. 3-6
3.3.3.
Unpack Workstation ............................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.4.
System Inspection ............................................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.1.
Label Inspection ........................................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.4.2.
External Inspection .................................................................................................................................. 3-14
3.4.3.
Internal Inspection ................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.5.
System Setup......................................................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.5.1.
Power Supply Adaption ......................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.5.2.
UPS Setup ................................................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.5.3.
System Power On ..................................................................................................................................... 3-19
3.5.4.
System Configuration in Admin Interface .................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.5.
DICOM Setup and Check....................................................................................................................... 3-23
ix
3.5.6.
3.6.
DICOM Worksheet .................................................................................................................................... 3-31

Functional Checks ............................................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.6.1.
Workstation Checks ................................................................................................................................ 3-34
3.6.2.
C-Arm Checks ............................................................................................................................................. 3-37
3.6.3.
Auto Technique Tracking ...................................................................................................................... 3-43
3.6.4.
Image Resolution ...................................................................................................................................... 3-44
3.6.5.
Dose Limitation Check ........................................................................................................................... 3-44
3.6.6.
Beam Alignment Check ......................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.6.7.
DAP Accuracy Check ............................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.6.8.
System Status Backup ........................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.6.9.
Fill in the product locator card ........................................................................................................... 3-46
3.7.
Options Installation ............................................................................................................................................. 3-46
3.7.1.
CD/DVD Burner Installation ................................................................................................................. 3-46
3.7.2.
Laser Aimer.................................................................................................................................................. 3-48
3.7.3.
Video distributor ........................................................................................................................................ 3-51
3.7.4.
Printers........................................................................................................................................................... 3-52
3.7.5.
Film cassette holder ................................................................................................................................ 3-54
3.7.6.
Tube Skin Spacer ...................................................................................................................................... 3-54
3.7.7.
Dual pedal footswitch with save button ....................................................................................... 3-55
3.7.8.
Removal Filter and Sensor Installation .......................................................................................... 3-56
3.7.9.
Removable Grid ......................................................................................................................................... 3-57
3.7.10.
Wireless DICOM ......................................................................................................................................... 3-58
3.7.11.
Mono LCD monitor installation .......................................................................................................... 3-64
3.7.12.
Software Option Installation ............................................................................................................... 3-64
3.7.13.
Room Interface (RIF) ................................................................................................................................ 3-64
3.7.14.
Fill in the product locator card for Option .................................................................................... 3-66
3.8.
Installation Check List ........................................................................................................................................ 3-67
Chapter4.
Calibration ..................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.
kV Measurement and Adjustment ................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2.1.
kV Measurement and Accuracy Check ............................................................................................ 4-3
4.2.2.
kV Adjustment .............................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.
4.3.1.
mA Measurement and Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 4-8

mA Measurement and Accuracy Check .......................................................................................... 4-8
4.3.2.
4.4.
mA calibration............................................................................................................................................ 4-11
mAs Measurement and Calibration ........................................................................................................... 4-15
4.4.1.
mAs Measurment and Accuracy Check ........................................................................................ 4-15
4.4.2.
mAs Calibration ......................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.5.
X-Ray Generator Warm .................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.6.
Beam Alignment and Image Calibration ................................................................................................. 4-16
4.6.1.
Camera Centering.................................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.6.2.
BAFT Installation: ...................................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.6.3.
Collimator Centering............................................................................................................................... 4-23
4.6.4.
Collimator Check and Calibration .................................................................................................... 4-25
4.6.5.
I.I. Field Size Check and Calibration ................................................................................................. 4-33
4.6.6.
Limiting Field Size (Collimator Iris Field Size) ............................................................................... 4-35
4.6.7.
ABS Tracking Check and Adjustment ............................................................................................. 4-36
4.6.8.
Limiting Resolution .................................................................................................................................. 4-38
4.6.9.
Shading Correction Check and Calibration ................................................................................. 4-42
4.7.
DAP Accuracy Verification and Calibration ............................................................................................ 4-44
4.7.1.
DAP Calibration Verification: ............................................................................................................... 4-44
4.7.2.
DAP Accuracy Application Verification: ......................................................................................... 4-46
4.7.3.
DAP Calibration: ........................................................................................................................................ 4-49
4.8.
Monitor Brightness and Contrast Adjustment ...................................................................................... 4-50
4.8.1.
Keys assignment and operation LED ............................................................................................. 4-50
4.8.2.
Lock and unlock the OSD menu ........................................................................................................ 4-50
4.8.3.
Key functions in the OSD menu......................................................................................................... 4-50
4.8.4.
Brightness and Contrast Adjustment ............................................................................................. 4-51
4.9.
Power Input Tolerance Check ....................................................................................................................... 4-53
4.9.1.
Input Voltage Check: ............................................................................................................................... 4-53
4.9.2.
Input Voltage Calibration: .................................................................................................................... 4-54
Chapter5.
Software...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.
Service Tool ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.1.
System Information.................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2.
Configure Product ....................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.3.
Calibration ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.4.
Exposure Management ............................................................................................................................ 5-6
xi
5.2.5.
Imaging Processing Config .................................................................................................................. 5-12
5.2.6.
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................... 5-13
5.2.7.
Log Viewer ................................................................................................................................................... 5-15
5.3.
Software Installation and Upgrade............................................................................................................. 5-17
5.3.1.
Install Operating System ....................................................................................................................... 5-17
5.3.2.
Install Application Software................................................................................................................. 5-22
5.4.
Firmware Upgrade .............................................................................................................................................. 5-26
5.4.1.
MCU Firmware Upgrade ....................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.4.2.
CPLD Upgrade ............................................................................................................................................ 5-35
Chapter6.
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.
Error Recovery Steps ............................................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.3.
Event Messages ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.1.
Structure of Message Code ................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.2.
Definition of Code ....................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.3.
Message List.................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.4.
Troubleshooting Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 6-68
6.4.1.
Workstation and Control Panel Boot up Display ....................................................................... 6-68
6.4.2.
Shut down Workstation and Control Panel Display................................................................. 6-68
6.4.3.
Troubleshooting Tree .............................................................................................................................. 6-69
Chapter7.
Replacement .............................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1.
FRU list ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.
Locations of FRU .................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.
Replacement ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-8
xii
7.3.1.
General Screws Fastening torque Reference ............................................................................... 7-8
7.3.2.
Calibration Matrix ..................................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.3.
Calibration Tool Matrix ........................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.4.
System Covers ........................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.3.5.
Brake, Handle and Wheel ..................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.3.6.
Monoblock.................................................................................................................................................... 7-24
7.3.7.
Collimator ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-25
7.3.8.
PWAs ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-26
7.3.9.
Parts in Computer and Peripheral .................................................................................................... 7-33
7.3.10.
Exposure Indicator (5331638) ............................................................................................................. 7-36
7.3.11.
Monitors ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-37
7.3.12.
CCD Camera ............................................................................................................................................... 7-38
7.3.13.
Image Intensifier with power supply .............................................................................................. 7-39
7.3.14.
Image Intensifier Power supply ......................................................................................................... 7-41
7.3.15.
UPS (5075513) ............................................................................................................................................ 7-42
7.3.16.
Misc. Parts .................................................................................................................................................... 7-43
7.3.17.
Interconnect WKS (5085708) .............................................................................................................. 7-52
7.3.18.
Bundle cable: (5085700) ........................................................................................................................ 7-54
7.3.19.
Fuse kit (5075919) .................................................................................................................................... 7-58
7.3.20.
Linear Actuator (5075921) ................................................................................................................... 7-59
7.3.21.
Switches ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-63
7.3.22.
Others ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-65
Chapter8.
Periodic Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.1.
Safety ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.2.
Tools and Test Equipment....................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.
PM Checklist .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3.
Administrative Information................................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.4.
Safety Inspection .................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.1.
Antistatic Drag Wires................................................................................................................................. 8-6
8.4.2.
Electrical Plug and power cord ............................................................................................................. 8-6
8.4.3.
Interconnect cable and Connector .................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.4.
Footswitch cable and pins ...................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.5.
Ground Continuity ....................................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.5.
PC Clean and UPS Performance Check ....................................................................................................... 8-8
8.5.1.
PC clean ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.5.2.
UPS performance check: ......................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.6.
System Function checks .................................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.6.1.
Perform Power On Checks ................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.6.2.
C-Arm Checks ............................................................................................................................................ 8-10
8.6.3.
Workstation Checks ................................................................................................................................ 8-13
8.7.
X-ray Generator Accuracy Tests .................................................................................................................. 8-14
8.7.1.
kVp Accuracy.............................................................................................................................................. 8-14
8.7.2.
mA Accuracy .............................................................................................................................................. 8-14
xiii
8.7.3.
8.8.
mAs Accuracy ............................................................................................................................................ 8-14

Image Quality check .......................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.8.1.
Field Size Check ......................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.8.2.
Auto Technique Tracking ...................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.8.3.
Image Resolution ...................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.8.4.
Shading Correction Check.................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.9.
Dose Check ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.9.1.
Dose Rate Check ....................................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.9.2.
DAP Accuracy Check ............................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.10.
Reporting ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.10.1.
Install Equipment Covers ...................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.10.2.
Complete PM Comments ...................................................................................................................... 8-16
Chapter9.
Technical Reference ..............................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2.
System Specifications.......................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2.1.
Safety Classification .................................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.2.2.
Environmental Requirements ............................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2.3.
Power Requirements................................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.2.4.
Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.2.5.
Earth leakage current............................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.6.
Physical Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.3.
Specification of Key Components.................................................................................................................. 9-6
9.3.1.
X-Ray Generator ......................................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.2.
X-Ray tube...................................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.3.
X-ray tube assembly ................................................................................................................................. 9-9
9.3.4.
Collimator ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.5.
Others ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-10
9.4.
Tube Rating Chart................................................................................................................................................ 9-11
9.4.1. Filament Emission Characteristics ................................................................................................................ 9-11

9.4.2.
Single Load Ratings ............................................................................................................................................ 9-12
9.4.3.
Thermal Characteristic ..................................................................................................................................... 9-13
9.5.
Radiation Safety Specification ...................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.5.1. Scatter Data ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-14

9.5.2. Scatter radiation specification ....................................................................................................................... 9-15
xiv
9.6.
Material Safety Data Sheets .......................................................................................................................... 9-21
9.7.
Material Recycling ............................................................................................................................................... 9-21
Appendix-System Schematics
xv
Chapter1. Introduction and Safety
1.1.
Introduction
1.1.1.
Objective
Provide Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product service documentation that is consistently
organized, easy to access and is designed to aggressively expedite fault isolation and decrease product
down-time.
1.1.2.
Scope
This manuals contents document the necessary information for service.
1.1.3.
Service Philosophy
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Products use precision components and utilize complex
manufacturing techniques. Component-level repairs that maintain compliance with these requirements
are sometimes not possible in the field. The system is therefore designed to be field serviceable at the
modular or Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) level.
1.1.4.
Qualifications
Reading this manual does not qualify an untrained person to service the equipment. This publication
assumes the reader is a skilled and fully qualified electronic technician who has experience servicing
medical imaging systems. Factory trained service personnel will benefit the most from this material.
1.1.5.
Unauthorized Modifications
GE HUALUN Medical Systems, Inc. certifies that when assembled according to the manufacturer's
instructions, this equipment meets applicable international standards. Unauthorized modifications to the
equipment may impact adherence to these standards and make the equipment unsafe to operate.
The owner is responsible for verifying continued compliance with all applicable regulations and
standards. Consult local, state, federal and/or international agencies regarding specific requirements
and regulations applicable to the use of this type of medical electronic equipment.
1.1.6.
Manual Organization and Use
The information documented here has been analyzed and divided into several sections. This manual
contains the following types of information:
1-2
Introduction and Safety-Information of the system and safety.
System Overview-General description of the system and subsystem. The subsystems have been
analyzed and divided into functional sections. Each functional section contains major assembly
and control locations, theory, functional tests and other information relevant at the subsystem
level.
Introduction and Safety
Installation Procedure Information of pre-installation, unpacking and installation check.
Calibration-Procedures for tuning and calibration relevant at the subsystem and system level.
Software Maintenance- Provides procedures for software maintenance and service mode
utilities.
Troubleshooting- Provides error code, error messages, and diagnostic programs that expedite
the diagnostic process.
Replacement- Removal and installation procedures for fuses, covers and field replaceable units.
Periodic Maintenance Procedure-Procedures for periodic maintenance.
Technique Reference-Technique Reference of the system.
Appendix-System Schematics.
1-3
1.2.
Safety
Do not attempt to service or maintain this equipment before reading this entire section.
1.2.1.
Safety Hazard Alerts
There are three hazard classifications used in this document. They are:
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in
moderate to minor injury, equipment damage or loss of data.
NOTE is given in situation requiring special attention.
NOTE
1.2.2.
Ingress of Fluids
Excessive amounts of fluids such as antiseptics, cleaning solutions or bodily fluids may damage internal
components if they are allowed inside the equipment.
WARNING
The equipment is not rated for water-tight operation. Do not allow any liquids to leak into
the equipment where they can cause electric shock, fires, and short circuits. If leakage
does occur, ensure that all internal circuitry is completely dry before attempting to
operate the equipment.
WARNING
Never store or operate the system in the presence of conductive fluids like water or
saline solution unless the system is adequately protected by an approved bagging or
draping system.
1-4
1.2.3.
Electrical Shock
If the equipment must be serviced with the covers removed, observe the following precautions:
Equipment that contains high power electrical components must be serviced only by
personnel familiar with proper safety procedures for working near these components.
WARNING
Disconnect AC power (and battery packs if used) before discharging static electricity in
components such as electrolytic capacitors and high voltage cables. Failure to heed this
message will result in death or severe personal injury.
WARNING
Allow adequate time for static charges to discharge through bleeder resistors. Use a
high wattage resistor when discharging circuits to avoid burns.
WARNING
Have someone watch while you work near high voltages. This person must remain
clear of all circuitry and be prepared to turn off the power to the system and render aid
in an emergency.
WARNING
High voltage cables, electrolytic capacitors, and CRTs can retain a dangerous static
charge for long periods after power has been removed. Some devices can acquire a
charge spontaneously without direct contact with other circuitry. Do not touch these
components unless power has been completely removed and they have been
discharged.
WARNING
CAUTION
Never operate the system unless all safety ground wires (green wire with a yellow stripe)
and related components are fastened in place. Dangerous electrical shock and
improper equipment operation can otherwise result.
CAUTION
Remove all metal rings and watchbands before working on system circuitry. Skin burns
and damage from involuntary muscle contractions can result if metal jewelry shorts
electrical circuits.
1.2.4.
Explosion
If an abnormal condition occurs, such as the room fills with flammable gas, steps must be taken to
prevent the gas from contacting components within the equipment. Follow these guidelines:
1.
Do not turn the system on or off.
2.
Do not un-plug or plug-in system or peripheral equipment power cords.
3.
Do not operate light switches or other electrical equipment.
4.
Evacuate all personnel immediately.
5.
Notify the hospital administration and/or fire department.
1-5
6.
Ventilate the room to clear the air of all flammable vapor or gas.
7.
Identify and remove the source of the flammable liquid, vapor, or gas.
1.2.5.
Thermal hazards
Before removing the cover of the system for maintenance or service, please pay attention to the points
with high temperature, for example, the current limiters, internal power distribute circuit etc. Otherwise it
may harm your hand or body.
1.2.6.
Equipment Stability
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product is mounted on wheels. And if it is moved or
operated improperly it could roll out of control. Follow these guidelines:
Two people should maintain control of the equipment when moving up or down an incline.
Place all mechanical assemblies in their most compact (transport) position and lock brake handles prior
to moving the equipment.
Use the handles designed for moving the equipment and mechanical assemblies.
Never attempt to move the system up or down steps.
Do not operate the equipment on unlevel floors.
Do not lock the wheel brakes and leave the equipment unattended on unlevel floors.
Always apply the wheel locks when the system is in its final position.
Do not move the equipment if the castors or wheels are not functioning properly.
Mechanical shocks to the equipment while disk drives are accessing information may cause damage to
the disk drive and loss of data.
1.2.7.
X-Radiation
CAUTION
This equipment either produces or is used in the vicinity of ionizing radiation. Observe
proper safety practices during operation. Use lead aprons, eye protection, thyroid
protection, and similar devices to protect yourself and others.
CAUTION
Where local Entrance Exposure Rates (EER) are different than the GE HUALUN rate
specified, the EER should be adjusted to the lower of the two.
1-6
1.2.8.
Motorized Mechanical Movement
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product has motorized mechanical assemblies. Please
follow these guidelines:
Always observe mechanical assemblies when operating the motor to avoid pinching or collision with a
person or object.
Use care when working around equipment to avoid unintentional motor actuation. Do not carelessly
place objects on the equipment or bump or lean against the equipment.
Observe and prevent articles of clothing from getting caught in moving parts.
1.2.9.
Work on Parts with Lead Materail
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product has parts with touchable lead material. They are
Monoblock, Image Intensifier, Image Intensifier cover, lead ring of collimator and collimator cover.
CAUTION
1.2.10.
WARNING
When working on those parts, Do Not directly touch the lead material.
Safety Interlock
Never bypass, jumper, or otherwise disable any equipment safety feature.
1-7
1.2.11.
NOTE
Item
1-8
Labels
Even though this manual is supplied only in English, some labels may have a foreign
language equivalent that will appear on your system.
Label
Quantity
Description
This label indicates the position of

the C-Arm Wig-Wag movement
handle. When the handle is
rotated to dashed position, the
Wig-Wag brake is released. When
the handle is in solid line position,
the Wig-Wag brake is locked.

the C-Arm rotation handle. When
the handle is rotated to the
dashed position, the brake is
released. When the handle is in
solid line position, the brake is
locked.

the C-Arm rotation handle. When
the handle is rotated to the
dashed position, the brake is
released. When the handle is in
solid line position, the brake is
locked.

the C-Arm orbital movement
rotated to the dashed position,
the brake is released. When the
handle is in solid line position, the
brake is locked.

the C-Arm orbital movement
brake is locked.

the C-Arm horizontal movement
brake is locked.
This label indicates that the

Mobile C-Arms mechanical
subassemblies position should be
placed in their most compact
position before transporting or
moving the system.
Pay attention to your feet keep

away from this area.
1-9
This label is attached below

Workstation handles to note that
do not use the workstation
handles to lift this system;
This label is attached by printer
cabinet to note that please pay
attention to the printer slide when
moving the workstation.
10
This label is attached on the

control panel to note that please
refer to operator manual to
operate the control panel.
This label is attached by UPS shut
down button to avoid misusing.
Only when UPS cant shut down
automatically after system power
off process complete, the user
should press the UPS shut down
button to shut off UPS manually.
11
Monoblock heat label
12
This label on the control panel of

the C-Arm indicates the
procedure of shutting down and
restart to avoid data missing.
13
Potential equalization terminal

label.
1-10
14
15
Pay attention to keep your

hands/fingers away from this
area.
This label indicates that you

should not touch the connector
and the patient at the same time.
The connector must be
connected to the appointed
device only.
This port is only used for user to
store patient image by USB stick.
Any other equipment is forbidden
to be connected strictly.
16
17
IPX8
This label on the footswitch

means that the degree of
protection of the footswitch is IP
X8. The electrical mechanism
within the footswitch is protected
from the effects of continuous
immersion in water.
This symbol indicates the location

of Emergency Stop Switch on the
system.
1-11
18
19
1-12
System rating plate indicates

manufacture information and
input power requirements.
Generator tube head rating plate.
20
This is the label of collimator.
21
This is the label of laser warning.

(The label will only be required if
there is laser aimer.)
This label warns the operator or

the patient not to look at the laser
beams directly. (The label will only
be required if there is laser aimer.)
This label indicates the

equipment was tested by a
Notified Body and was found to
be in compliance with the
requirements of all relevant
directives and standards in effect
within the European Union at the
time of manufacture.
This label indicates that waste

electronic and electrical
equipment must not be disposed
of as unsorted municipal waste
and must be collected separately.
Please contact an authorized
representative of the
manufacturer for information
concerning the decommissioning
of your equipment.
22
23
24
0459
1-13
25
26
Blank
N/A
This is the label of branding.
Not used
This label indicates the system

was tested by ITS authorized
body and was found to be in
compliance with the
requirements of all relevant
directives and standards at the
time of manufacture.
28
This label can be found on the XRay generator. It indicates the

location of the X-Ray source and
the controls used to produce
ionizing X-Radiation. Use
appropriate precautions and
protective equipment when using
the system and at all times when
X-Rays are present.
29
USB warning label
27
1-14
30
C-Arm weight label
31
Workstation weight label
Image Intensifier label for Brivo

OEC 715/785.
Image Intensifier label for Brivo

OEC 865.
32
1-15
33
Hg label is attached on the

monitor back.
34
removable copper 0.1mm Cu
35
removable Grid
36
skin spacer
This label indicates the system

complies with the Brazil local
regulation. It is only on the
system in Brazil.
37
1-16
38
This label indicates the key

switch. Turn the key switch
located on the C-arm interface
panel to enable X-Rays and
motorized mechanical
movement.
39
This is the label of functional

earth ground connection.
40
This is the label of J1 connector
41
This is the label of Mark A.
0.4mmAl. Its on the tube. For

Brivo OEC 715/785.
0.8mmAl. Its on the tube. For

Brivo OEC 865.
42
1-17
This is the label of fuse
44
This is the label of J3 connector.

Remove the workstation back
cover. The label is near the
connector on the bottom.
45
PLC label
46
DC BUS fuse
47
WIFI label. Only available when

you choose Wi-Fi Internet
Adapter option for some
configuration.
48
FCC ID label.
43
1-18
49
The Circuit Breaker or other over

current protector used in power
supply for this product shall meet
the requirements.
50
This warning label is on the

Workstation front cover.
51
Packing label.
Brivo OEC 715 Product Brand

name.

name.
52

name.
1-19
53
Component, Spot Film Device

label.
54
This is the label of collimator.

Remove the tube head cover. This
label is on the collimator.
1-20
1.2.12. Locations of the Labels

25
32
25
14
21
22
11
11
17
7
39
1
14
28
19
45
1-21
54
46
1-22
10
52
29
12
50
47
15
48
15
27/31/24
18/49
23
13
13
40
44
41
43
41
1-23
1.2.13.
Symbols
Be familiar with the following symbols that may appear on equipment and schematics so you can safely
maintain and operate the system:
Dangerous Voltage
This symbol identifies areas where hazardous voltages may be present. Use appropriate
safety precautions.
Protective Earth Ground

This symbol identifies the systems main protective earth ground terminal, which connects to
the facility earth ground through the grounding prong on the AC power plug. This connection
must be in place at all times for safe system operation.
Earth Ground Connection

This symbol identifies an earth ground connection that is necessary to maintain grounding
throughout the system.
X-Ray Source
This X-Ray Source symbol is used to identify controls that will produce ionizing X-radiation
when activated. Always use appropriate safety precautions when generating X-Rays.
This X-Ray Source symbol is used to identify controls that will produce ionizing X-radiation
when activated. Always use appropriate safety precautions when generating X-Rays.
Potential Equalization Terminal

This symbol identifies system terminals which, when connected together, are at the same
potential (not necessarily earth ground). Green/yellow wires normally connect potential
equalization terminals together.
Attention
Attention, see accompanying documentation for information. You can refer to this manual for
the operation instructions.
1-24
Type B
This symbol indicates the equipment is protected against electric shock by a protective earth
ground connection.
Ionization Radiation
This symbol indicates that there is ionization radiation.
1.2.14. Electromagnetic Compatibility Statement

This equipment may generate and use radio frequency energy. The equipment must be installed and
used according to the manufacturers instructions in order to avoid radio frequency interference. If this
equipment generates or receives interference do the following to correct the problem:
Verify that the equipment is the cause by turning the system on and off.
In the event of unintended motor actuation, immediately remove power to the equipment.
In the event of unintended X-Ray actuation, immediately remove power to the equipment.
Reorient the equipment until the interference stops.
Relocate the equipment with respect to other equipment in the room.
Plug the equipment into a different outlet so that the equipment and the receiver are on different
branch circuits.
Use only input/output (I/O) cables supplied by GE HUALUN Medical Systems Co. Ltd.
This product conforms with IEC60601-1-2: 2007 Ed3.0 EMC standard for medical devices.
NOTE
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. The equipment
may cause or be subject to radio frequency interference with other medical and non
medical devices and radio communications. To provide reasonable protection against
such interference, the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 system complies with emissions limits for
a Group 1, Class A Medical Devices and has applicable immunity level as stated in IEC
60601-1-2: 2007 Ed3.0.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 system needs special precautions regarding EMC
and needs to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information provided
in the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Operator manual.
Use of RF (Radio Frequency) sources that intentionally transmit, such as cellular
telephones, transceivers, radio-controlled products, or other RF emitting equipment may
cause performance outside the systems published specifications or other adverse
operation. Keep the power to these RF sources turned off when near this equipment.
1-25
Recommended separation distances and information regarding compatibility with other

equipment are located in the EMC Declaration Table as below.
If this equipment is found to cause interference (which may be determined by switching
the equipment on and off), the user (or qualified service personnel) should attempt to
correct the problem by one or more of the following measure(s):
1. Reorient or relocate the affected device(s).
2. Increase the separating space between the equipments and the affected device.
3. Power the equipment from a source different from that of the affected device.
4. Consult the point of purchase or service representative for further suggestions.
WARNING
WARNING
NOTE
Use of accessories, transducers, cables and other parts other than those specified by the
manufacturer of this equipment may result in increased emissions or decreased
immunity of the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference
caused either by the use of interconnect cables other than those recommended, or
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 system should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other
equipment and that if adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the Brivo OEC 715/785/865
system should be observed to verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will
be used.
To comply with the regulations applicable to an electromagnetic interface for a Group 1,

Class A Medical Device, and to minimize interference risks, the following requirements
shall be applied:
1. All interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly
grounded. The use of cables that are not properly shielded and grounded may
result in the equipment causing radio frequency interference in violation of the
European Union Medical Device directive and FCC regulations.
2. All of the recommended guidance regarding electromagnetic environment shall
be followed.
Guidance and manufacturers declaration Electromagnetic Emissions

The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product is intended to use in the specified
electromagnetic environment. The purchaser or user of the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm XRay Product should assure that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described below:
Emissions Test
Compliance
Electromagnetic Environment Guidance

The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray
Product uses RF energy only for its internal function.
1-26
RF Emissions
Group1
Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not

likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.
Class A
The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray

Product is suitable for use in all establishments other
than domestic and those directly connected to the
public low-voltage power supply network that supplies
buildings used for domestic purposes.
CISPR11
RF Emissions
CISPR11
Harmonic emissions
Not
applicable
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage
fluctuations/
flicker emissions
Not
applicable
IEC 61000-3-3
Guidance and manufacturers declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity

The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product is intended to use in the electromagnetic
environment specified below. The purchaser or user of the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray
Product should assure that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described below:
Immunity Test
IEC 60601
Compliance Level
Electromagnetic
Environment Guidance
6 kV contact
6 kV contact
8 kV air
8 kV air
Floors are wood, concrete, or

ceramic tile, or floors are
covered with synthetic material
and the relative humidity is at
least 30 %.
2 kV for power
supply lines
2 kV for power supply

lines
Test Level
Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
Electrical fast
transient Pulse
IEC 61000-4-4
Surge
IEC 61000-4-5
1
kV
for
input/output lines
1 kV
Line(s)
Line(s) to
2 kV Line(s) to earth
Voltage dips, short
interruptions and
voltage variations
on power supply
input lines
IEC 61000-4-11
<5 % UT (>95 % dip

UT) for 0,5 cycle
40 % UT (60 %
UT) for 5 cycles
1kV Line(s) to Line(s)

2 kV Line(s) to earth
in
dip in
70 % UT (30 % dip
UT) for 25 cycles
<5 % UT (>95
UT for 5 s
1 kV for input/output
lines
in
% dip in
<5 % UT (>95
UT) for 5 s
% dip in
Mains power quality is that of a

typical commercial and/or
hospital environment
Mains power quality is that of a

typical commercial and/or
hospital environment.
Mains power quality should be
that of a typical commercial or
hospital environment. If the
user of the Brivo OEC
715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm XRay Product requires continued
operation during power mains
interruptions, it is
recommended that the Brivo
OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm
X-Ray Product be powered
from an uninterruptible power
supply or a battery.
1-27
Power frequency
magnetic field
(50/60Hz)
3 A/m
3 A/m
Power frequency magnetic

fields are at levels
characteristic of a typical
location in a typical commercial
and/or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-8
NOTEUT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Guidance and manufacturers declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity

The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product is intended to use in the specified electromagnetic
environment. The purchaser or user of the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product should assure
that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described below:
IEC 60601
Compliance Level
Electromagnetic Environment
[V1 =] 3 V
Portable and mobile RF communications

equipment are used no closer to any part of
the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm XRay Product, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation appropriate for the
frequency of the transmitter.
Test Level
Conducted RF
3 V rms
IEC 61000-4-6
150 kHz to
80 MHz
Recommended separation distance

Radiated RF
3 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3
80 MHz to
2.5 GHz
[E1=] 3 V/m
d =[
3,5
] P
3
d =[
3,5
] P
3
7
d =[ ] P
3
80 MHz to 800 MHz
800 MHz to 2,5 GHz
Note: P is the power rating of the transmitter

in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended
separation distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey
a, are less than the compliance level in each
frequency range b.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following symbol:
a: Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for cellular telephones and land mobile radios, amateur
1-28
radio, AM and FM radio broadcast, and TV broadcast cannot be estimated accurately. To assess the electromagnetic
environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be performed. If the measured field
strength exceeds the RF compliance level above, observe the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product to
verify normal operation in each use location. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be
necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the [EQUIPMENT and/or SYSTEM].
b: Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths are less than 3 V/m.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
Note3: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.
The Recommended Separation Distances are listed in the next table.

Recommended Separation Distances for Portable and Mobile RF Communications
Equipment and the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 system
The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product is intended to use in the electromagnetic
environment where the RF interference is controlled. According to the power rating of the
communication equipment, the purchaser or user of the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray
Product can prevent the Electromagnetic interference by the recommended separation distance below:
Rated Power of
Transmitter/W
Separation Distance/m
150KHz to 80 MHz
d =[
3,5
] P
3
80 MHz to 800 MHz
d =[
3,5
] P
3
800 MHz to 2,5 GHz
7
d =[ ] P
3
0.12
0.12
0.23
0.38
0.38
0.73
1.2
1.2
2.3
10
3.8
3.8
7.3
100
12
12
23
0.01
0.1
1
For transmitters rated at a power not listed above, the Separation DISTANCE can be estimated using
the equation in the corresponding column, where P is the power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer.
Note 1: NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Note 3: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.
1-29
1.2.15. Lock-Out, Tag-Out

This procedure meets the basic LOTO requirements established by OSHA and follows the policy of GE
Healthcare for energy-isolation during the service/maintenance of this equipment. It is designed to
insure that each employee involved in servicing this equipment has exclusive control over when the
equipment is reenergized (i.e. each employee maintains a personal lock with a unique key).
It is the obligation of each employee to follow this procedure and understand that failing to do so can
cause serious injury or death.
Only Field Service Engineers who have complete LOTO Authorized and initial LOTO Verification training
will be permitted to execute Lockout/Tagout on this system. All other non-authorized individuals will be
considered affected individuals.
Specific Source of Energy
TYPE
SOURCE
MAGNITUDE
STORED
Electrical
Facility
120VAC/240VAC
NO
Electrical
Capacitors
310VDC
YES
Electrical
Inverter module(Connected with

Capacitors)
310VDC
YES
Gravitational
Potential (C-arm)
~50 lbs.
YES
Energy Control Procedures

1. Notify all affected individuals of a shutdown.
2. Verify safety of work area.
3. Identify all electrical sources.
4. Position C-arm for service.
5. Shut down system via the power breaker.
6. Remove A/C plug from wall power.
7. Remove interconnect cable from C-arm.
8. Apply the red lock and tag to the AC plug.
9. Remove Workstation back cover.
10. In Workstation, verify zero volts AC at breaker between the brown and blue wires.
1-30
11. Power is now locked out.
NOTE
In the event service will continue into another day, and/or the machine will cause a
hazard if reenergized after the authorized employee leaves the location, leave the A/C
cord cover installed with a transition lock and yellow tag attached.
If more than authorized employee is going to conduct service on the same system, at the
same time, multiple locking devices must be employed and each authorized employee
must adhere to the entire LOTO procedure.
Gravitational/mechanical energy
By removing the following components, unexpected gravitational energy can be released.
CAUTION
Removing the X-Ray tube, image intensifier, or the C weldment can cause the rear of the
C-arm to tilt and hit the floor. Place a block of wood under the rear of the C-arm to
prevent tilting crush hazard.
Testing and Positioning During Service

In the event that lockout/tagout devices must be temporarily removed from the energy isolating devices,
for testing or positioning purposes, the following sequence shall be followed:
1. Clear the machine of tools and materials.
2. Ensure that all employees/individuals in area are safely positioned or removed.
3. Remove energy control measures.
4. Energize system and proceed with testing or positioning.
5. De-energize system and reapply energy control measure.
1-31
Restore Power After Service

1. Re-inspect work area for hazards.
2. Reinstall Workstation covers.
3. Turn on breaker on the Workstation.
4. Connect main interconnect cable to the C-arm.
5. Notify all affected personnel that power is being restored.
6. Remove red lock and tag.
7. Energize the system.
8. Verify proper system operation.
9. Inform customer that system is ready to be returned to service.
WARNING
1-32
High voltage cables, electrolytic capacitors, can retain a dangerous static charge for long
periods after power has been removed. Some devices can acquire a charge spontaneously
without direct contact with other circuitry. Do not touch these components unless power has
been completely removed and they have been discharged. Equipment that contains high
power electrical components must be serviced only by personnel familiar with proper safety
procedures for working near these components. Disconnect AC power before discharging
static electricity in components such as electrolytic capacitors and high voltage cables. Failure
to heed this message will result in death or severe personal injury. Allow adequate time for
static charges to discharge through bleeder resistors. Use a high wattage resistor when
discharging circuits to avoid burns. Have someone watch while you work near high voltages.
This person must remain clear of all circuitry and be prepared to turn off the power to the
system and render aid in an emergency.
Chapter2. System Overview
2.1. System Descriptions

2.1.1. System overview
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product is intended to provide fluoroscopic and film imaging
of the patient in diagnostic and surgical applications. Clinical applications may include, but are not
limited to, orthopedic, Pain Management Procedures and General Surgery. Such users will use this
system on a daily basis.
WARNING
Only properly trained persons can operate this equipment.
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product includes:

Mobile C-Arm
high frequency X-Ray generator
image intensifier
GigE CCD camera and console
Collimator
Mobile Workstation
Dual LCD monitors
Computer
Power distribution unit
External storage media (USB), etc
Options
2-2
DVD R/W Rom (External storage media)
Thermal Printer, DICOM Printer
Laser aimer on the image intensifier
Laser aimer on the tube
30cm skin spacer
Film cassette holder
Video Distributor for External DVI video output
Removable Filter
Removable Grid
Dual 19 Mono LCD Monitor (only for Brivo OEC 785)
Wireless Network Interface (WNI) (only for Brivo OEC 865)
Two-pedal Footswitch
System Overview
Software Options: OptionBasicDicom, OptionDicomQ&R, OptionDicomMpps, OptionAnnotation,

OptionMeasurement
The C-Arms derive their name from the rigid, C-shaped weldment that supports the Image Intensifier,
collimator, CCD Camera, and X-ray tube. These components together are commonly called the C,
and the entire assembly from the casters up is known as the C-Arm.
The X-Ray tube generates an X-ray beam that is shaped and oriented by the collimator. After
passing through patient anatomy, the beam is directed onto a film cassette to produce a
radiographic film image, or through the image intensifier and CCD camera, to convert the X-ray
image to a video signal that is transmitted to the Workstation for display, processing, and storage.
2-3
2.1.2. Component Locator
1. Image intensifier and CCD camera

2. Lateral rotation movement brake handle
3. Orbital movement brake handle
4. Skin spacer
5. X-ray tube head (X-ray tube and collimator)
6. Front wheel
7. Rear wheel
8. Wig-wag movement brake handle
9. Steering handle
10. Horizontal movement brake handle
11. C-arm control panel
12. Hand switch
13. Brake release pedal
14. Brake pedal
15. Driving handle
16. Emergency switch
17. Footswitch socket
18. Key switch
19. Interconnect cable socket
2-4
System Overview
1. Exposure indicator
2. Mouse
3. Cabinet for printer
4. USB connector
5. Power on/off
6. Universal wheel
7. LCD Monitors
8. Workstation membrane keyboard
9. DVD driver
10. Brake pedal
11. Central control wheel
12. Handles
13. Room Control Connector
14. Network interface
15. Wireless network interface switch
16. Interconnect cable
17. Digital Video Interface (DVI)
18. Power Cable, Incoming circuit breaker and Power on indicator
2-5
Brivo OEC 715/785/865/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual
2.1.3. System block
System Schematics please refer to appendix.

2-6
System Overview
2.2. Subsystem
2.2.1. Power Distribution and Control
Interlock
In interlock loop, Interconnect Cable, Display Board, Collimator Control Board, Mainframe Control Board, Filament
Driver Board, KV Control Board and Power Distribution Unit Board compose a safety loop.
Once the interconnect cable between C-Arm and the Workstation is removed or any PCBs in C-Arm loose from
slot due to collision or other unexpected situation, the relay K4 (on Power Distribution Unit Board) will not be
energized so that the Mainframe can't be powered on. Workstation will boot up and just work in Review Station
status.
Power Distribution Unit Board

THEORY OF OPERATION
Power Supply Overview
The power of PDU board is driven by the main input power and the secondary side from main transformer
28VAC and 220VAC output.
2-7
Power Input
ACmainpowerinput:
This is a AC main input with bias 15%. It supports multiple rated voltages configuration with
100V/110V/120V/200V/220V/230V/240VAC (RMS).
Secondarysideofmaintransformer:
Another input comes from the secondary side output of main transformer. The rated voltage is 220V (RMS)
and 28V (RMS) for up-down board and mainframe.
Power On Board
+24V
When the main input power is ok with no gross over and under voltage condition, the relay K6 is activated
and the AC voltage of secondary side of start_up transformer (BT2) is applied at the D7 (2W06), then the
rectified DC voltage connected to the input pins of U4 (LM317T) and the output voltage is about +24VDC by
the configuration of R10 and R8. The +24V voltage is mainly to drive relays and get other necessary DC
power on board.
VCC_+12V
To make sure the WKS on/off control relay (K7) work properly in AC main power lost condition, the VCC_+12V
DC power use dual power method by the simple parallel of CMPTR_+12V and +12V. CMPTR_+12V is
connected the +12V power from computer and +12V is generated from the conversion of low dropout
regulator LM2940CT-12(D26).
+10V,+5V,+3.3V
To get more accurate voltage reference in voltage comparison circuit, the +10V power is achieved by the
+10V precision voltage reference REF01SC3 (D9).
+5V power is generated by the LM2940CS-5.0 (D8) and +3.3V power is generated by the LM1084-3.3.(U5)
2-8
System Overview
Power Output
The two channel AC voltages are generated from this board and then apply to the main transformer primary
side and mainframe accordingly.
Grounding Connection
In the PDU board there is an analog ground (AGND), digital ground (DGND) and a protective earth (PE).
Function Implement
The Power distribution Unit (PDU) board is mounted in the workstation and provides the controlled power for
main transformer and mainframe. It is responsible for several main functions as follows.
-
Main transformer primary side Inrush Current Suppression

Mainframe side Inrush Current Suppression
Normal Mode Voltage Surge Suppression
Common Mode Voltage Surge Suppression
Gross over and under voltage lock-out
Line RMS Voltage Conversion Circuit & Voltage Comparator
State Detection and Signal Drive Circuit
The Intelligent Power Control Unit
UPS control logic
The power on board comes from the output of the start-up transformer and generates the necessary DC
power like +24V, +12V, +10V, +5V, +3.3V.
2-9
An Altera CPLD U1 is used as main controller on the board; it controls most of the relays on the board,
generates the signal by the user interface and communicates with SIB board
Power on scheduling
To achieve the inrush current suppression for the primary side of the main transformer, power resistors R
(15Ohm, 50W) shall be used in system configuration. Approximately 2 seconds after power with no gross
over/under voltage fault is applied by the relay K1, relay K2 closes, bypassing the resistors R, reducing IR
voltage drop, and allowing them to cool. To avoid the risk that the resistor R will be heated and burned when
the K2 is in failure, relay K1 shall be energized for only about 1s.
Similarly, to achieve the inrush current suppression for the mainframe side, power resistors R(15Ohm,50W)
shall be also used in the secondary side of main transformer. The 220V voltage winding is applied to the
mainframe by the K3 and K4. When the secondary voltage of main transformer with no load is OK, K3 will be
energized first, then the K4 closes to shorten the R to reduce the power loss, the K3 will be energized for
about 1s to avoid the risk that the resistor R will be heated and burned when the K4 is in failure.
The 28V voltage winding is directly applied by the relay K5.
UPS status for Power On/Off

Normal Power off system
1.
2.
3.
4.
Power on system and inspect UPS button led and LCD status.
Front three LEDs and LCD backlight are lighted up, then a beep happen, LCD shows UPS status.
At that time, system will boot up successfully, then power off system. And inspect UPS status.
After system software exits successfully, a beep happen again, LCD shows nothing, but front three LEDs
and LCD backlight are still lighted up.
5. After 1 minute to 5 minutes, front three LEDs and LCD backlight extinguish.
Abnormal Power off system
1. Power on system and inspect UPS button led and LCD status.
2. Front three LEDs and LCD backlight are lighted up, then a beep happen, LCD shows UPS status.
3. At that time, system will boot up successfully, then unplug system AC power (please make sure battery is
fully charged) and inspect UPS status.
4. UPS works on battery mode and gives four beeps every 30 seconds, and system software find AC lost and
power off system automatically.
5. After system software exits successfully, LCD shows nothing, but front three LEDs and LCD backlight are
still lighted up.
6. After 1 minute to 5 minutes, front three LEDs and LCD backlight extinguish.
2-10
System Overview
Timing Sequence Chart

1s
1s
2s
2s
1s
1s
220V_Power
Air_break
350ms
HW_SW
K1
2s
K2
Ups_ctrl
Air
CPTR_12V
Heartbeat
INTERELOCK = 1
k3
k5
k4
k7
Normal power on timing
Normal power off timing
Interface
AC power input
AC power input is listed as follows.
Name
L
L1
N
N1
Description
AC power input for
PDU
Pin
PJ1-1
PJ1-2
PJ1-3
PJ1-4
Attribution
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER
Scale
Comment
100/110/120/
200/220/230/240VAC
2-11
Power Indicator interface

The voltages used to control the power indicator are listed as follows.
Name
PWR_LED_L
PWR_LED_N
Description
Power indicator
Pin
PJ1-5
PJ1-6
Attribution
Power
Power
Scale
Comment
100/110/120VAC
Main transformer primary side interface

The voltages applied to the main transformer primary side are listed as follows.
Name
Description
Pin
Attribution
Scale
PJ7-1
Power
100/110/
PRI_TRANS_L1
PDU provide
120/200/220/230/240V
voltages to the
PRI_TRANS_N1
PJ7-2
AC
primary side of
PRI_TRANS_L2
PJ7-3
Power
main transformer
PRI_TRANS_N2
PJ7-4
Comment
Main transformer secondary side interface

The voltages applied to the main transformer secondary side are listed as follows.
Name
Description
Pin
Attribution
Scale
PJ2-3
Power
100/110/
SEC_TRANS_220V_L
Output of
120/200/
secondary
SEC_TRANS_220V_N
PJ2-6
220/230/
side of main
SEC_TRANS_28V_L
PJ2-1
Power
240VAC
transformer
SEC_TRANS_28V_N
PJ2-4
Comment
Mainframe side interface

The voltages applied to the mainframe side are listed as follows.
Name
Description
Pin
Attribution
Scale
PJ6-4
MF_AC220V_L
power
220VAC
AC Output of PDU
MF_AC220V_N
PJ6-5
delivered to
MF_AC28V_L
PJ6-1
mainframe
power
28VAC
MF_AC28V_N
PJ6-2
Comment
Start_up transformer interface

The voltages applied to primary side of the start_up transformer are listed as follows.
Name
Description
Pin
Attribution
Scale
Comment
AUX_PWR_IN_L1
PJ13-1
Input winding
power
100/110/
AUX_PWR_IN_N1
PJ13-4
120/200/220/230/240V
AUX_PWR_IN_L2
PJ13-3
AC
Input winding
power
AUX_PWR_IN_N2
PJ13-6
Name
AUX_PWR_OUT_L1
AUX_PWR_OUT_N1
AUX_PWR_OUT_L2
AUX_PWR_OUT_N2
2-12
Description
Output
winding (24V
normaly)
Output
winding (24V
normaly)
Pin
PJ12-1
PJ12-3
PJ12-2
PJ12-4
Attribution
Scale
power
24VAC
power
24VAC
Comment
System Overview
Power on/off button interface

The voltages applied to the power on/off button are listed as follows.
Name
Description
Pin
Attribution Scale
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1
PJ5-1
Power
0/+12VDC
The button switch
on/off terminal
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_2
PJ5-2
Power
0/+12VDC
BUTTON_LED_+12V
PJ5-3
Power
0/+12VDC
The button
indicator
BUTTON_LED_GND
PJ5-4
power
0
Comment
CMPTR_+12V interface
The +12VDC power from computer are listed as follows.
Name
Description
Pin
+12V_CMPTR
+12VDC Power from computer
PJ4-1
GND_CMPTR
GND Reference point
PJ4-2
Attribution
power
power
Scale
0/+12VDC
0
Comment
The interlock signals for cable &board are listed as follows.

Name
Description
Pin
Attribution
INTERLOCK_CABLE
Interlock cable signal
PJ3-3
signal
INTERLOCK_COM
GND Reference point
PJ3-2
signal
INTERLOCK_BOARD
Interlock board signal
PJ3-1
signal
Scale
0/+12VDC
0/+12VDC
0/+12VDC
Comment
Attribution
signal
signal
Scale
Comment
Pin
PJ9-1
PJ9-2,10
PJ9-3
PJ9-4
PJ9-5
PJ9-9
Attribution
signal
power
signal
power
signal
signal
Scale
0/+3.3V
0/+3.3V
0/+3.3V
0/+3.3V
0/+3.3V
0/+3.3V
Comment
Pin
PJ8-1
PJ8-2
PJ8-3
Attribution
digital
GND
digital
Scale
0/+12V (>6V=High)
0V
0/+12V (>6V=High)
Comment
PJ8-4
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
PJ8-5
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
PJ8-6
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
PJ8-7
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
Interlock interface
PC power on/off switch interface

The switch on/off signal for PC are listed as follows.
Name
Description
Pin
CMPTR_CTRL_1
PJ10-1
PC ON/OFF Control
CMPTR_CTRL_2
PJ10-2
JTAG interface
Name
TCLK
GND
TDO
VCC_+3.3V
TMS
TDI
Description
JTAG input pin
GND
JTAG input pin
+3.3VDC power
JTAG input pin
JTAG input pin
System Interface Board interface

The signals to SIB are listed as follows.
Name
Description
SYS_PWR_REQ
system switch on/off signal
GND
GND
MAINS_LOST_ERR
status of Mainframe Power
transformer secondary over
SEC_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
voltage signal
transformer secondary
SEC_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
under voltage signal
+12V voltage from
12V_ERR
computer fault signal
RDY_ERR
WKS boot up ready fault

signal
2-13
MF_PWR
PDU_CONNECT_2
PDU_CONNECT_1
RSRV_FROM_PDU_1
RSRV_FROM_PDU_2
RSRV_FROM_PDU_3
GND
RSRV_FROM_SIB_1
RSRV_FROM_SIB_2
RSRV_FROM_SIB_3
GND
BEEP_INVALID_KEY_C
MD
INTLC_BOARD
ACK_PDU2SIB
SYS_PWR_OFF_CMD
SYS_PWR_OFF_DENY
MF_PWR_ON_CMD
RDY
BEEP_ERR_CMD
mainframe power detection

signal
connection status signal
from PDU to SIB
connection status signal
from PDU to SIB
Reserved signal from PDU
GND
Reserved signal from SIB
GND
Invalid key beep command
interlock board connection
status signal
acknowledge signal
between PDU and SIB
system power off
command
system power off deny
command
mainframe power on
command
WKS boot up ready
error beep command
PJ8-8
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
PJ8-9
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
PJ8-10
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
PJ8-11
PJ8-12
PJ8-13
PJ8-14
PJ8-15
PJ8-16
PJ8-17
PJ8-18
digital
digital
digital
GND
digital
digital
digital
GND
0/+12V (>6V=High)
0/+12V (>6V=High)
0/+12V (>6V=High)
0V
0/+12V (>6V=High)
0/+12V (>6V=High)
0/+12V (>6V=High)
0V
PJ8-19
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
PJ8-20
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
PJ8-21
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
PJ8-22
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
PJ8-23
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
PJ8-24
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
PJ8-25
PJ8-26
digital
digital
0/+12V (>6V=High)
0/+12V (>6V=High)
UPS interface
UPS switch on/off control signal interface is shown as follows:
Name
Description
Pin
Attribution
UPS_OUTPUT UPS output status signal
PJ14-1
Analog
GND
GND
PJ14-2
0
ON_BATT
UPS battery/line status signal PJ14-3
Analog
REMOTE
UPS remote signal
PJ14-4
Digital
UPS switch off interface in emergency is shown as follows:
Name
EMERGENCY_
BUTTON_1
EMERGENCY_
BUTTON_2
Description
UPS EMERGENCY SWICH
OFF BUTTON
Pin
Attribution
Scale
PJ15-1
Digital
3.3V/5V TTL
PJ15-2
Digital
3.3V/5V TTL
Test Point:
Name
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
2-14
Description
+12V
+24V
+5V
+3.3V
Scale
0/10-14VDC
0
0/10-14VDC
3.3V/5V TTL
Description
+12V power on board
+24V power on board
+5V power on board
+3.3V power on board
Comment
Comment
System Overview
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP10
TP11-TP15
TP16
+10V
CPLD_INTLC_BRD_A
CPLD_INTLC_CABLE_A
SIB_INTLC_BRD
TP18
TP19
TP20
TP21
TP22
TP23
TP24
TP25
GNDA
GNDA
+10V power on board

Interlock board signal
Interlock cable signal
AC Output of main transformer secondary side voltage divider
DC output of line gain in RMS-DC conversion circuit
The reference point of under/over voltage protection circuit
Reserved test points for debug for CPLD
Interlock board signal for SIB board
DC output of main transformer secondary voltage RMS-DC
conversion
DC output of follower in RMS-DC conversion
Over voltage test point in start-up process
Over voltage test point in normal operation process
Under voltage test point in start-up process
Under voltage test point in normal operation process
Reference point for analog circuit
Reference point for analog circuit
LEDs:
Name
HL1
HL2
HL4
HL5
HL6
HL7
HL8
HL9
HL10
HL11
HL14
HL16
HL17
HL18
HL19
HL20
HL22
HL3
HL12
Color
Green
Green
Red
Red
Red
Red
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
red
Green
Green
red
Green
Green
Green
Description
+3.3V power indicator
+5V power indicator
Secondary side over voltage fault indicator in start up process
Secondary side under voltage fault indicator in start up process
Secondary side voltage under voltage fault indicator in normal operation process
Secondary side voltage over voltage fault indicator in normal operation process
+12V power indicator
Reset status indicator
Interlock cable status indicator
Interlock board status indicator
UPS output state signal
Mainframe power status indicator
+12V error status indicator
Interlock cable lock status indicator
PDU connect2 status indicator
RDY error status indicator
PDU connect status indicator
For Debug only
For Debug only
2-15
2.2.2. Mother Board

The Mother Board is installed in the E-box of the Main Frame; it is responsible for below three functions:
-
Realize power and fuse allocation,

Offer connectors for cables to or from Collimator, Display Board, KV Control Board, Sealing Board, CCU, I.I.,
Hand Switch, Footswitch, Emergency Key Switch, Filament, DC Power Supply Boxes, Laser Aimer, and etc.
Offer interfaces and installation base for three children boards: Collimator Control Board, Mainframe Control
Board and Filament Drive Board.
The structure of MB is shown as follows:
Mother Board
Extension interfaces
Power
interface
2-16
Fuse
CCB
interfa
ce
MCB
interfa
ce
FDB
interfac
e
System Overview
2.2.3. Mainframe Control Board

The MCB (Mainframe Control Board) is located in C-Arm mainframe and is the main control unit in mainframe. It is
responsible for five functions.
-
X-ray control: KV, mA and exposure control interfacing with collimator board, filament board, and KV control
board
Image chain control: control camera and image intensifier
User interface: key input and LED display interfacing with display board
System monitor: check various error and warning
Communication with workstation
The structure of MCB interface is illustrated in the following diagram.
2-17
Functional Block
MCB consists of 10 function blocks, which are illuminated as follows:
MCB functional Block
MCU function
-
Read the registers of peripheral controller to get the status of sub-systems, such as getting the alarm
status, etc.
Write the registers of peripheral controller to control the status of sub-systems, such as PIO
(Programmable Input Output), light indicator, buzzer, etc.
Sample watchdog bite signal from supervisor circuit to check peripheral is still working
Check all switch signals to respond users input
Communicate with Control Panel board to get the key input and control the LED output
A/D convert all analog signal, such as shutter location, temperature of oil tank, mA feedback, KV
feedback, etc.
Communicate with DAC to control mA and KV output
Communication with Workstation
Communication with peripheral controller to report the working status of MCU
Peripheral controller function

-
Sample the status of input pins, and record them into status registers polled by MCU
Set output pins according to the control registers accessed by MCU
Generate interrupt signal of alarm to MCU in order to request the processing
Generate exposure control signals
Check switch stuck error
Control mAS control signals
Operational amplifier circuit function

-
2-18
Amplify or adjust input analog signals, such as kV feedback, mA feedback, temperature, shutter
location sample signal, and output those signals to the ADC unit (Analog Digital Converter)
Amplify or adjust analog signals output from DAC (Digital Analog Converter), such as kV setting, mA
setting, mA preheat, and output those signals to other sub-systems
mA PI control
System Overview
Transceiver
-
Transceiver circuit is responsible for regulating voltage level and supplying driving current.
Optical coupling
-
Optical coupling circuit is responsible for changing voltage level and isolating the ground of circuit at
each sides of optical coupler.
DAC
-
DAC (Digital Analog Converter) circuit is responsible for output analog signal, such as KV setting, mA
setting and mA pre-heat.
VFC
-
VFC (Voltage Frequency Converter) circuit is responsible for converting mA signal to frequency value
in order to implement mAs function.
Communication
-
RS485 protocol is used for MCU to communicate with workstation or DAP.

SPI protocol is used for MCU to communicate with Control Panel.
Indication
-
Indication circuit includes LED and buzzer, which are controlled by MCU and peripheral controller.
Miscellaneous hardware
-
Other circuits include power supply, supervisor circuit, watchdog circuit, clock generator, and security
control, etc.
Power Distribution
Power Supply Overview
The power of MCB is drove by power supply 1 & 2 via mother board, and +3.3V, +2.5V & +1.2V are generated
from +5V_PS1. Power supplies are listed as follows.
Name
+5V_PS1
GND_+5V
-15V_PS1
+15V_PS1
AGND
+24V_PS1
GND_+24V_PS1
+15V_PS1_D
GND_+15V_PS1_D
-15V_PS1_D
GND_-15V_PS1_D
+24V_PS2
GND_+24V_PS2
+12V_PS2
GND_+12V_PS2
+3.3V
+2.5V
+1.2V
Description
+5V power supply
Reference of +5V_PS1
-15V power supply
+15V power supply
Reference of -15V_PS1 & +15V_PS1
+24V power supply
+15V power supply
Reference of +15V_PS1_D
-15V power supply
Reference of -15V_PS1_D
+24V power supply
+12V power supply
Internal power
Internal power
Internal power
Source
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS2
PS2
PS2
PS2
+5V_PS1
+5V_PS1
+5V_PS1
Scale
+5V
0V
-15V
+15V
0V
+24V
0V
+15V
0V
-15V
0V
+24V
0V
+12V
0V
+3.3V
+2.5V
+1.2V
Pin
J2-A5/B5/C5
J2-A4/B4/C4
J2-A15/A16
J2-C15/C16
J2-A9/B9/C9
J1-B9
J1-B10
J1-A29/B29/C29
J1-A12/B12/C12
J1-C32
J1-A32
J1-A1/B1/C1
J1-A6/B6/C6
J1-B5
J1-A5
-
Comment
By LM1084
By LM1084
By LM1084
2-19
Grounding Connection
All the grounds of power are connected by mother board with one point strategy.
Collimator Control
Collimator control includes
- Collimator Shutter open/close control
- Collimator Shutter rotation control
- Collimator Iris open/close control
MCU gets users command from Control panel, and sends setting value of position information of Shutter
and Iris to Collimator by SPI bus. Meanwhile, MCU gets feedback value of position of Shutter and Iris from
Collimator by analog signal.
Analog signals (IRIS_POS_F/SHUT_ROT_POS_F/SHUT_WIDTH_POS_F), which are from collimator control
board to MCB, are sampled by ADC unit of MCU finally. MCB sends digital setting values to CCB via SPI bus.
The voltage level of all the digital signals from MCB to collimator control board is transformed from +3.3V to
+15V by optical coupling circuit.
Filament Control
The voltage level of all the digital signals between MCB and filament control board are transformed from
+3.3V to +15V by optical coupling circuit.
MCB sends digital setting values to DAC with SPI bus. Differential operational amplifier circuit amplifies
differential signals MA_CAT and KV_GND from tube, and outputs mA_sample to PI control circuit. PI amplifies
mA_sample and two signals out from DAC circuit, mA_setting and mA_preheat, and outputs signal MAC to
filament control board. The structure of PI control circuit is shown as follows.
The difference between signal mA_sample and mA_setting is output to proportional and integral circuit,
respectively. The outputs of those circuits are added by signal mA_preheat, then the result signal MAC is
output to filament control board.
The theory of PI control circuit is as follows. The tube current is controlled by signal MAC. Initially MAC equals
mA_preheat, which is a preset value corresponding to the user setting value mA_setting. Signal mA_sample
is the sample of tube current. If mA_sample is different with mA_setting, the error will be amplified,
integrated and added to signal mA_preheat by PI control circuit. Then the output signal MAC of PI control
circuit controls tube current in order to make the error be smaller. This process goes on, and finally
mA_sample value is equal to mA_setting value, and PI control is stable.
KV Control
After optical coupling circuit transforms the voltage level of 6 alarm signals, those signals will be sampled
and recorded by registers in Peripheral Controller. MCU will get these alarm status by local bus between
Peripheral Controller and MCU.
Digital signal EXPOSURE_COMMAND and SAFETY_EN are from MCB to KV control board, whose voltage level
is transformed from +3.3V to +15V by optical coupling circuit.
Analog signal KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT, which is from KV control board to MCB, is amplified (or adjusted) by
operational amplifier circuit and sampled by ADC unit of MCU finally.
Analog signal KV_SET_INPUT is from MCB to DAC through SPI bus, then to KV control board, and amplified (or
adjusted) by operational amplifier circuit.
2-20
System Overview
Camera Control
FRAME_SYNC and Last Image Hold (LIH) signals are critical for exposure control and are addressed in
exposure module. MCU sends GAIN information to camera to control the brightness of image.
Digital signals LIH is through optical coupling circuit from Peripheral controller of MCB to Camera. Digital
signal FRAME_SYNC is from Camera to MCB. It is the global synchronization signal of X-Ray control function,
so it acts as clock and interrupt signal to peripheral controller and MCU, respectively.
GAIN signal from MCB to camera is through RS485 bus.
Image Intensifier Control

II control here means II field switch only. F1/F2 signals are controlled by MCU directly.
Digital signals (F1/F2) are from MCB to II. The voltage level of those signals is transformed from +3.3V to +24V
by optical coupling circuit.
MCB outputs IDRG_HC signal to control the relay. When the relay is close, II_PWR is connected with +24V
and II_GND is connected with GND_+24V. Therefore, II is power-on. When the relay is open, II_PWR and
II_GND are both connected to GND_+24V, and then II is power-off.
Sealing Board
Analog signals KV_GND and MA_CAT are the anode and cathode of mA current signal, respectively. The
current transforms to voltage signal by flowing through a resistor. ADC unit of MCU in MCB samples this
signal after its scale is transformed to 0-2.5V by operational amplifier circuit.
There are two temperature measurement circuits in sealing board. Ones output is analog signal OIL_TEMP,
whose scale is 0-2V. ADC unit of MCU in MCB samples this signal after its scale is transformed to 0-2.5V by
operational amplifier circuit. MCU will compare this value with preset threshold to generate oil tank warm
warning and hot alarm.
The others output is connected/open status between THERMAL_SWITCH_A and THERMAL_SWITCH_B. If the
temperature of oil tank is higher than a preset threshold, the relationship between THERMAL_SWITCH_A and
THERMAL_SWITCH_B changes from connected to open. This relationship is transformed by optical coupling
circuit, which is shown as follows. The output of optical coupling circuit is connected to GPIO (General
Purpose Input Output) of MCU.
When THERMAL_SWITCH_A and THERMAL_SWITCH_B are connected, transistor is open. Then optical
coupling do not work, and signal OUTPUT is high logic at +3.3V. Otherwise, when THERMAL_SWITCH_A and
THERMAL_SWITCH_B are open, signal OUTPUT is low logic at 0V.
Workstation Communication
Communication interface between WK and MCB is full duplex RS485 bus.
Control Panel
SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) is used as communication layer protocol between MCB and Control panel.
Optical coupling circuit is used as physical layer. Because signals are transported on a long distance line,
they are prone to interfering by noise. So voltage promotion technical has been adopted because of its
width voltage threshold. The signal level is changed from +3.3V to +15V, and changed back to +3.3V by
optical coupling circuit.
Digital signal YELLOW_LED control the exposure LED on control panel, and the changes of signal level are
the same as SPI signals.
MCU in MCB connects MAX6954 and MAX7301 in Control panel with SPI bus. MCU is master of SPI bus, while
MAX6954 and MAX7301 are slaves. Master initiates every communication session, and only one slave, which
2-21
is selected by chip selection signal of bus, will respond the session. MCU reads or writes the registers in
slaves to get the status and control the output of slave.
MAX6954 is a key and LED controller. When a key press action is detected, an interrupt will route to MCU.
Then MCU will get the key matrix status to identify which key has been pressed by reading the status
registers in MAX6954. Meanwhile, MCU changes the 7-segent LED display by writing the control registers in
MAX6954.
MAX7301 is a LED controller. Similarly to MAX6954, MCU changes the LED display by writing the control
registers in MAX7301.
User Interface Control

Key Switch
As shown in Figure 17, the connected/open status between ON (or X-RAY OFF) and COMMON is transformed
to digital signal Exp_lift_column_enable (or Lift_column_enable) by optical coupling circuit. MCU get the
status of key switch by sampling this signal. The optical coupling circuit is shown as follows.
Signal ON corresponds to signal INPUT_A, and signal COMMON corresponds to signal INPUT_B. Then signal
ON corresponds to signal OUTPUT. When INPUT_A and INPUT_B are connected, transistor in optical coupler
is open and OUTPUT is 0V. Otherwise, OUTPUT is +3.3V.
Hand Switch
The circuit and theory are similar to key switch except checking the switch stuck error. The switch stuck error
occurs when one of HAND_SWITCH and HAND_SECURITY keeps inactive for more than 10 seconds after the
other has been active.
As shown in Figure xx, exposure command line and security line are independent by using different routes.
Foot Switch
The circuit and theory are similar to hand switch include checking the switch stuck error.
Emergency Switch
The circuit and theory are similar to voltage transmit circuit.
Removable Filter
The circuit and theory are similar to switch.
Indicator
Peripheral controller of MCB outputs digital signal INDICATOR_+24V corresponding to signal INPUT shown in
Figure 17, which is 0V/+3.3V voltage level. Then optical coupling circuit transforms it to digital signal
X_RAY_ON corresponding to signal OUTPUT, which is 12mA current. Signal X_RAY_ON connects to one
termination of indicator, and the other termination connects to GND_+24V, which is the reference of +24V.
When X_RAY_ON is active, the indicator will light.
Buzzer
6 different tones are generated.
-
2-22
Normal exposure: continuous Du-Du-Du with du 100ms and cycle 1s

HLF/RAD/DS exposure: continuous Du-Du-Du with du 100ms and cycle 500ms
Uncompleted XRAY (switch release early): Di-Di-Di-Di with Di 100ms and cycle 250 ms
Exposure exceeds 5 minutes: continuous Di
System Fault: Di-Di-Di-Di with Di 100ms and cycle 250 ms and then 1s interval and over again
System Overview
The circuit of buzzer control uses audio operational amplifier.
Auto Brightness Control

MCU gets IBS (Image Brightness Signal) from WKS through RS485, and looks up the ABC (Auto Brightness
Control) table with IBS value, and get the setting value of kV and mA. Finally, the kV and mA control analog
signals are output to KV control board and filament control board through DAC and operational amplifier
circuit or PI circuit sequentially.
Manual kV Setting
Control panel samples the manual kV setting value, and transports it to MCU by SPI bus. MCU looks up the
responding data and sets DAC circuit. Operational amplifier circuit amplifies kV control signal from DAC, and
outputs signal KV_SET_INPUT to kV control board finally.
Manual mA Setting
Control panel samples the manual mA setting value, and transports it to MCU by SPI bus. MCU looks up the
responding data and sends out signals to DAC circuit. The mA control analog signals, KVC and MAC, are
output to filament control board through DAC and PI circuit sequentially.
mAs Control
The setting value of mA is 20mA (or 10mA) in mAS mode. mA sample signal is transformed to pulse by VFC
circuit. The pulse is used as clock signal of down counter in peripheral controller. When mAS mode is set, the
mAS time is set in down counter as the initial value. While exposure starts, down counter works at the same
time. When the value of down counter reduces to 0, exposure stops.
High Level Fluoro

Logically, there is a table that consists of 4 columns: input kV value, input mA value, output kV value and
output mA value. MCU looks up the table by input kV and mA value, and gets output kV and mA value as kV
and mA setting respectively, then outputs those setting.
Auto mA Calibration
Because valid exposure period in each frame is smaller than 40 ms, response time from MAC signal set out
to mA stable should be within a certain time. Meanwhile, the response time is related with the parameters of
tube. The key parameter is the current of tube before exposure. If it is very near the current in exposure
followed, the response time will be short enough to meet the requirement.
Therefore, the rational is that a preheat table is setup to provide the mA_preheat signal in section 6.3.4
Figure 5, which give out a proper current of tube before exposure, and PI control will control mA stable in
several ms in exposure.
Unfortunately, the variation exists among the parameters of tubes. Although the variation is small, unique
preheat table should be setup for each tube. In order to get this unique preheat table, auto mA calibration
process shall be as follows.
- The variation is so small that a draft preheat table is generated from mass experiment, which is usable
for calibration
- MCU sends out mA_preheat signal according to the draft preheat table instead of MAC signal to filament
board
- Sample mA feedback (mA_sample signal in section 6.3.4 Figure 5) with ADC unit of MCU
- Then the relationship between MAC and mA of the tube is gotten
- Interpolation to get a unique preheat table of the tube, in which mA value is normalized
2-23
Exposure Control
Peripheral controller controls the exposure command and camera LIH (last image hold) as well as other
peripheral control signals. Refer to PDL document.
Debug
JTAG of Peripheral controller and proprietary COM port of MCU has reserved for debug.
Interface
Overview
MCB is plugged in Mother Board, and is connected with other sub-systems through Mother Board. The
electrical interface of Mother Board, please refer to Motherboard section.
The external physical interfaces of MCB are defined in the table below:
Connector
J1
Name
MCB digital
signal
connector
Type
DN41612 C
Type Male
Gender
Pin
Description
All digital signals from/to other sub-system, such as
collimator board, filament board, sealing board, camera,
KV control board etc.
J2
MCB analog
signal
connector
DN41612 Half
C Type Male
Pin
All analog signals from/to other sub-system, such as

collimator board, filament board, sealing board, camera,
KV control board etc.
Collimator Control
Signals from MCB to collimator control board are listed as follows.
Name
SPI_SCLK_CCB
SPI_DIN_CCB
SPI_SYNC_CCB
RSV_CCB
Description
SPI clock signal
SPI data from MCB to CCB
SPI chip select signal
Reversed for future
Attribution
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Scale
0V/+15V
0V/+15V
0V/+15V
0V/+15V
Pin
J1-B22
J1-C19
J1-A21
J1-B15
Comment
+15V=effective
-
Signals from collimator control board to MCB are listed as follows.

Name
IRIS_POS_F
SHUT_ROT_POS_F
SHUT_WIDTH_POS_F
Description
Feedback voltage from Iris
position rheostat
Feedback voltage from shutter
rotation position rheostat
Feedback voltage from shutter
width position rheostat
Attribution
Analog
Scale
0-5V
Pin
J2-C12
Comment
-
Analog
0-5V
J2-A12
Analog
0-5V
J2-B12
Attribution
Digital
Scale
0/+15V
Pin
J1-B14
Comment
+15V= effective
Digital
Analog
0/+15V
3.0-5.0V
J1-A15
J2-C11
+15V= effective
-
Filament Control
Signals from MCB to filament control board are listed as follows.
Name
FILDIS_FDB
FCSSW_FDB
MAC_FDB
2-24
Description
System general alarm to disable
filament current, Trigger by anyone of
several alarms
Large focus function selected
Fluoro mA control signal
System Overview
Signals from filament control board to MCB are listed as follows.

Name
OCALM_FDB
PWMC_FDB
Description
Overcurrent alarm of +24V power
supply in filament board
PWM control signal of filament current
Attribution
Digital
Scale
0/+15V
Pin
J1-C16
Comment
+15V= effective
Analog
0/+15V
J2-B11
KV Control
Signals from MCB to kV control board are listed as follows.
Name
SAFETY_EN
EXPOSURE_EN
KV_SET_INPUT
Description
Safety line for EXPOSURE_COMMAND
Exposure command
KV set value to KV control board
Attribution
Digital
Digital
Analog
Scale
0/+15V
0/+15V
0-6V, Unit is 20KV/V
Pin
J1-B19
J1-A17
J2-C10
Comment
+15V= effective
+15V= effective
-
Signals from kV control board to MCB are listed as follows.

Name
KV_LOW_ALM_N
KV_HIGH_ALM_N
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N
IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N
DC_ERROR_ALM_N
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM_N
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT
Description
KV too low alarm, lower
than 35KV
KV too High alarm, higher
than 120KV
Inverter over current alarm
IGBT error alarm
DC power bus error alarm
KV unbalance in two
bridges of inverter.
KV sample value from KV
control board
Attribution
Digital
Scale
0/+15V
Pin
J1-B17
Comment
0V= effective
Digital
0/+15V
J1-A18
0V= effective
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
0/+15V
0/+15V
0/+15V
0/+15V
J1-A16
J1-C17
J1-B18
J1-C18
0V= effective
0V= effective
0V= effective
0V= effective
Analog
0-6V, Unit
20KV/V
J2-A10
Camera Control
Signals from MCB to Camera are listed as follows.
Name
LIH
GPIO_IN2
GPIO_IN3
RXD485+
RXD485-
Description
Last image hold to camera
General Purpose Input signal 2 to
Camera
General Purpose Input signal 3 to
Camera
One of two differential signals
from MCB to Camera
The other one of two differential
signals from MCB to Camera
Attribution
Digital
Scale
0V/+15V
Pin
J1-C4
Digital
0V/+15V
J1-C30
Comment
0V=last image hold
+15V=living
Reversed for future
Digital
0V/+15V
J1-A11
Reversed for future
Differential
signal
+/-(1.5-5V)
J2-B1
J2-A1
2-25
Signals from Camera to MCB are listed as follows.

Name
TXD485+
Description
One of two differential signals from
Camera to MCB
The other one of two differential
signals from Camera to MCB
Frame synchronization signal from
Camera. Frequency is 25Hz
approximately
General Purpose Output signal 2
from Camera
General Purpose Output signal 3
from Camera
TXD485FRAME_SYNC
GPIO_OUT2
GPIO_OUT3
Attribution
Differential
signal
Scale
+/-(1.5-5V)
Pin
J2-C3
Comment
-
J2-C2
Digital
0V/+15V
J1-B24
Digital
0V/+15V
J1-B21
Reversed for future
Digital
0V/+15V
J1-B20
Reversed for future
Image Intensifier Control

Signals from MCB to II (Image Intensifier) are listed as follows.
Name
F1
Description
The LSB of three fields code, which
indicates the MAG size.
Attribution
Digital
Scale
0V/+24V
Pin
J1-A9
F2
The MSB of three fields code
Digital
0V/+24V
J1-A10
II_PWR
Power supply of II
Power
0V/+24V
II_GND
Reference of power
Power
0V
J1A2/B2/C2
J1A3/B3/C3
Comment
F2F1=00 means that MAG
size is set to 9
size is set to 4.5
size is set to 6
F2F1=11 is invalidation
-
Sealing Board
Signals from sealing board to MCB are listed as follows.
Name
OIL_TEMP
OIL_TEMP_GND
THERMAL_SWITCH_A
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
MA_CAT
KV_GND
2-26
Description
Output voltage of
temperature sensor
Reference of OIL_TEMP
One termination of
temperature switch
The other termination of
temperature switch
The cathode of mA sample

The anode of mA sample
Attribution
Analog
Scale
0-5V
Pin
J2-B13
Ground
Passive
0V
-
J2-C13
J1-B26
Passive
J1-B27
Analog
Analog
0-20mA
-
J2-A14
J2-C14
Comment
THERMAL_SWITCH_A &
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
connected means that
temperature is lower than
threshold.
THERMAL_SWITCH_A &
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
disconnected means that
temperature is higher than
threshold.
-
System Overview
UP/DOWN Control Board

Signals from MCB to UP/DOWN control board are listed as follows.
Name
UDB_ENABLE
Description
UP/DOWN function enable
Attribution
Digital
Scale
0-+15V
Pin
J1-C14
Comment
+15V=effective
Scale
0-+15v
0-+15v
0-+15v
0-+15v
0-+15v
Pin
J1-C9
J1-C10
J1-C8
J1-C20
J1-C21
Comment
0V= effective
0V= effective
0V= effective
0V= effective
0V= effective
Scale
+/-(1.55V)
Pin
J2-B2
J2-A2
Comment
-
Scale
+/-(1.55V)
Pin
J2-A3
J2-B3
Comment
-
Scale
0/+15V
0/+15V
0/+15V
0/+15V
0/+15V
Pin
J1-B23
J1-C24
J1-A25
J1-A28
J1-C23
Comment
+15V= effective
+15V= effective
0V= effective
Signals from UP/DOWN control board to MCB are listed as follows.

Name
UDB_OVERCUR_N
DOWN_PROTECT_TO_MCB_N
UP_TO_MCB_N
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
DOWN_SECURITY_TO_MCB_N
Description
Over current error
Reach limit
UP key
DOWN key
DOWN_SECURITY key
Attribution
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Workstation Communication
Signals from MCB to WK (Workstation) are listed as follows.
Name
WK_Y
WK_Z
Description
One of two differential signals from MCB to WK
The other one of two differential signals from
MCB to WK
Attribution
Differential
signal
Signals from WK to MCB are listed as follows.

Name
WK_A
WK_B
Description
One of two differential signals from WK to MCB
The other one of two differential signals from WK
to MCB
Attribution
Differential
signal
Display Board
Signals from MCB to Control Panel are listed as follows.
Name
SPI_CLK
SPI_MOSI
SPI_/CS1
SPI_/CS2
LED_
YELLOW_N
Description
Clock of SPI bus
Data from MCB to Control Panel
Chip select 1 for MAX9654
Chip select 2 for MAX7301
Yellow led lights signal
Attribution
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Signals from Control panel to MCB are listed as follows.

Name
SPI_MISO
DB_INT
Description
Data from Control Panel to MCB
Interrupt of Control panel
Attribution
Digital
Digital
Scale
0/+15V
0/+15V
Pin
J1-A23
J1-B25
Comment
+15V= effective
User Interface Control

Key Switch
Signals from key switch to MCB are listed as follows.
Name
KEYSW_ON
Description
The termination which
indicates lift column and x-ray
are both enable
Attribution
Passive
Scale
Open/Close
Pin
J1-C26
KEYSW_OFF

indicates lift column is enable
and x-ray is disable
Common termination
Passive
Open/Close
J1-B16
Passive
J1-A24
KEYSW_COM
Comment
KEYSW_ON & KEYSW_COM is
connected means both lift column
and exposure enable function
have been selected.
KEYSW_OFF & KEYSW_COM is
connected means lift column
function have been selected.
-
2-27
Hand Switch
Signals from hand switch to MCB are listed as follows.
Name
Description
Attribution
Scale
HAND_FLU
Hand switch
Passive
Open/Close
termination
Pin
J1-B28
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
HAND_HLF
HAND
_HLU_SECURITY
HAND_COM
Hand security line

termination
High Level Fluoro
hand switch
termination
High Level Fluoro
hand security line
termination
Common
termination
Comment
HAND_FLU & HAND_COM is
connected means HAND_FLU
button has pressed
-
Passive
Open/Close
J1-C27
Passive
Open/Close
J1-B7
Passive
Open/Close
J1-A22
HAND_HLF & HAND_COM is

connected means HAND_HLF
button has been pressed
-
Passive
J1-C15
Foot Switch
Signals from foot switch to MCB are listed as follows.
Name
Description
Attribution
Scale
FOOT_FLU
Foot switch
Passive
Open/Close
termination
FOOT_FLU_SECURIT
Y
FOOT_ HLF
FOOT_BUTTON1
Foot security line

termination
High Level Fluoro
foot switch
termination
High Level Fluoro
foot security line
termination
Button 1
FOOT_BUTTON2
FOOT_COM
FOOT_
HLF_SECURITY
2-28
Pin
J1-A27
Passive
Open/Close
J1-C28
Passive
Open/Close
J1-A14
Passive
Open/Close
J1-C31
Passive
Open/Close
J1-A20
Button 2
Passive
Open/Close
J1-A19
Common
termination
Passive
J1-B32
Comment
FOOT_FLU & FOOT_COM is
connected means FOOT_FLU
FOOT_HLF & FOOT_COM is
connected means FOOT_HLF
FOOT_BUTTON1 & FOOT_COM is
connected means FOOT BUTTON 1
has been pressed
has been pressed
-
System Overview
Emergency Switch
Signals from emergency switch to MCB are listed as follows.
Name
Description
Attribution
Scale
EMERGENCY_SWT1 One termination of Passive
Open/Close
Emergency
switch1
REF_
EMERGENCY_SWT1
EMERGENCY_SWT2
REF_
EMERGENCY_SWT2
Pin
J1-C11
Comment
EMERGENCY_SWT1 &
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1 is not
connected means
EMERGENCY_SWT has been
pressed
-
The other
termination of
Emergency
switch1
One termination of
Emergency
switch2
Passive
J1-B11
Passive
Open/Close
J1-C25
The other
termination of
Emergency
switch2
Passive
J1-A26
EMERGENCY_SWT2 &
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2 is not
connected means
EMERGENCY_SWT2 has been
pressed
-
Removable Filter
Signals from removable filter to MCB are listed as follows.
Name
PROTECT_A
PROTECT_B
Description
Removable filter A
sensor signal
Removable filter B
sensor signal
Attribution
Digital
Scale
0V/+15V
Pin
J1-B31
Comment
+15V= Filter removed
Digital
0V/+15V
J1-B30
+15V= Filter removed
Indicator
Signals from MCB to indicator are listed as follows.
Name
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
Description
Anode of indicator
Cathode of indicator
Attribution
Passive
Passive
Scale
-
Pin
J1-B8
J1-A8
Comment
The indicator will be lighted when a
certain current about 12mA flows
from XRAY_INDICATOR_A through
indicator to XRAY_INDICATOR_B.
Program Port
Program port signals are listed as follows.
Name
SERIAL_TXD
SERIAL_RXD
Description
Transmit signal of serial port
Receive signal of serial port
Attribution
Digital
Digital
Scale
-7V-+7V
-7V-+7V
Pin
J1-A31
J1-C22
Comment
-
2-29
Interlock Loop
Interlock loop signals are listed as follows.
Name
INTERLOCK_LOOP_A
Description
One termination of
interlock loop
The other termination
of interlock loop
INTERLOCK_LOOP_B
Attribution
Passive
Scale
Pin
J2-B16
Passive
J2-B15
Comment
INTERLOCK_LOOP_A &
INTERLOCK_LOPP_B is connected in
MCB as part of the whole interlock
loop. If connecter J2 of MCB is
loose, the whole inter loop will be
broken, Mainframe will power off.
Test Points
Reference
Name
Description
TP1
GND
Ground
TP4
KV-CLB
KV control signal used to calibrate mA feedback
TP5
KVO
KV control signal to KV control board
TP6
MA+
mA feedback signal without KV calibration
TP7
MA-SMP
mA sample signal with KV calibration
TP8
MA-SET
mA setting signal
TP9
PREHEAT
mA preheat signal
TP10
MAC
mA control signal to Filament board
TP11
PI
Output of proportional & integral circuit
TP12
MA-A
mA control signal without PREHEAT
TP13
PULSE
mAS control signal
TP14
MAS
mAS pulse signal
TP17
MA-OFF
mA control signal offset setting
TP18
PWM
Filament control signal from FDB
LED Indicators
Reference
Name
Description
D12
2V5
Light lights when +2.5V is available
D13
1V2
D20
CAMR
D22
D24
KEYON
CC
D26
HLFF
D27
D28
D29
KEYOFF
HINT
SIMO
D30
D31
THM
TEST

RXD485+ & RXD485-. D20 on MCB lights normally, and flickers in
communication
KEYSW_OFF & KEYSW_ON & KEYSW_COM. D22 lights when "KEYSW_ON" & turns
off when "KEYSW_OFF"
SPI_CC_CS. D24 on MCB lights normally, and turns off when CCB is drived
FOOT_HLF & FOOT_COM. D26 turns off when FOOT_HLF & FOOT_COM are
connected
KEYSW_OFF & KEYSW_ON & KEYSW_COM. D27 lights when "KEYSW_ON" & turns
off when "KEYSW_OFF"
D41 turns off when footswitch interupt signal is available to MCU
SPI_SIMO. D29 flickers on MCB
THERMAL_SWTICH_A & THERMAL_SWITCH_B.D30 on MCB lights normally, and
turns off in overheat error
Reversed for future use
2-30
System Overview
D32 turns off when FPGA configuration completes

HAND_HLF & HAND_COM. D33 turns off when HAND_HLF & HAND_COM are
connected
FOOT_BUTTON1 & FOOT_COM. D34 turns off when press
WK_A & WK_B. D35 on MCB turns off normally, and flickers in communication
D36 flickers when MCU work well
SPI_SOMI. D37 flickers on MCB
FRAME_SYNCH. D38 is flickering on MCB when FRAME_SYNCH is available
FOOT_BUTTON2 & FOOT_COM. D39 turns off when press
D41 turns off when footswitch interupt signal is available to MCU
EMERGENCY_SWT & REF_EMERGENCY_SWT. D43 turns off when press
DB_INT. D44 lights on MCB when pressing button of control panel
WK_Y & WK_Z. D45 on MCB lights normally, and flickers in communication
D46 lights when EXPOSURE command is sent out
HAND_FLU_SECURITY & HAND_COM & FOOT_FLU_SECURITY & FOOT_COM. D47
lights when either HAND_FLU_SECURITY & HAND_COM or FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
& FOOT_COM connected
D32
INIT
D33
D34
D35
D36
D37
D38
D39
D40
D41
D42
D43
D44
D45
D46
HLFH
SAV
WKT
MCU
SOMI
FSYN
MOD
CONF
FINT
STAT
EKEY
INT
WKR
EXPR
D47
D48
D52
D53
SAFE
RFB
HAND
RFA
D59
3V3
D60
+15
Light lights when +15V from PS1 is available
D61
+5
D62
-15
Light lights when -15V from PS1 is available
D66
+24PS2
D67
D69
+24PS1
FOOT

FOOT_FLU & FOOT_COM. D69 turns off when press
D70
+12
Name
MAS
MA-OFF
MA-GAIN
KV
MA-FB
mAS signal gain

mA control signal offset
mA control signal gain
KV control signal gain
mA feedback gain
PROTECT_A. D48 lights when one of two removeable filters is removed

HAND_FLU & HAND_COM. D52 turns on when press
PROTECT_A. D53 lights when the other of two removeable filters is removed
POT
Reference
POT2
POT4
POT5
POT6
POT7
Description
2-31
2.2.4. Display Board

Display board and membrane kit compose a whole control panel of C-Arm, installed in C-arm. Control panel kit
receives user input command and sends signal to Mainframe Control Board.
Power:
The power on display board include +5V, +15V and +3.3V, the +5V and+15V come from Mainframe Control Board,
+3.3V is generated by the +5V through power regulator on board.
Signals control:
Display Board connects with Mainframe Control Board through J2 (DB15), MCB controls the display board by SPI
BUS; SPI signals from MCB be isolated first, then control the 7-segment. LED displays and scans the 33 keys; also
the MCB controls the key indicator lights and forbidden lamp by SPI BUS, X-ray in use lamp controlled by MCB
directly.
6 interface:
Button indicator light Interface to user Requirements
The display board shall provide 17 button indicator lights interface to user.
X-Ray indicator Interface to user Requirements
The display board shall provide a yellow lamp interface to user. Shows X-Ray is in use.
Exposure Forbidden Interface to user Requirements
The display board shall provide a blue lamp Interface to user. Shows Exposure is forbidden.
Segment LED interface Requirements
The display board shall provide 11 7-segment LEDs interface to user.
Key Interface Requirements
The display board shall provide 33 keys Interface to connect with control panel.
MCB Interface Requirements
The display board shall provide MCB interface.
The MCB interface shall include following signals:
SPI_CLK: 38KHz;
SPI_CS2;
SPI_MOSI;
DB_INT;
INTERLOCK_B;
SPI_MISO;
SPI_CS1;
INTERLOCK_A
2-32
System Overview
Signals connected to motherboard

Name
+5V_DB
GND_PS1
SPI_CLK
SPI_CS2
SPI_MOSI
DB_INT
GND_PS1
INTERLOCK_B
+15V_DB
+5V_DB
GND_PS1
SPI_MISO
SPI_CS1
INTERLOCK_A
LED _YELLOW_N
Description
+5V from MCB
GND from MCB
Provide MAX6954 &MAX7301 work clock
MAX7301 select signal
Communicate with MCB
MAX6954 interrupt signal
GND from MCB
Interconnect with INTERLOCK_A
+15V from MCB
+15V from MCB
GND from MCB
Communicate with MCB
MAX6954 select signal
Interconnect with INTERLOCK_B
fluoro indicator
Pin
DB15-1
DB15-2
DB15-3
DB15-4
DB15-5
DB15-6
DB15-7
DB15-8
DB15-9
DB15-10
DB15-11
DB15-12
DB15-13
DB15-14
DB15-15
Attribution
Power
Ground
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Ground
Passive
Power
Power
Ground
Digital
Digital
Passive
Digital
Scale
+5V
GND
38KHz
0/15V
0/15V
0/15V
GND
+15V
+5V
GND
0/15V
0/15V
0/15V
Comment
0V=effective
0V=effective
0V=effective
0V=effective
2-33
Signals connected to key scan interface

Name
Save
swap
mode
Image_ rotate_ CCW
Image_ rotate_ CW
Horizontal_ mirror
Vertical_ Mirror
Mag_ mode_ selection
NULL
Collimator_ shutter_ CCW
Collimator_ shutter_ CW
Collimator_ shutter_ open
Collimator_ shutter_ close
Collimator_ iris_ open
Collimator_ iris_ close
Alarm_ reset
Pulse_ rate_ selection
Pulse_ Enable
Film_ enable
Low_ Dose_ Enable
KVp_ up
KVp_ down
mA_ up
mA_ down
ABS_ Enable
Noise_ Reduction_ up
Noise_ Reduction_ down
NULL
Brightness_ Contrast_ up
Brightness_ Contrast_ down
Brightness_ Contrast_ auto
Smart_ Metal_ Up
Smart_ Metal_ down
Smart_ Metal_ Auto
High Level Fluoro
2-34
Pin
DX3_1
DX3_2
DX3_3
DX3_4
DX3_5
DX3_6
DX3_7
DX3_8
DX3_9
DX3_10
DX3_11
DX3_12
DX3_13
DX3_14
DX3_15
DX3_16
DX3_17
DX4_1
DX4_2
DX4_3
DX4_4
DX4_5
DX4_6
DX4_7
DX4_8
DX4_9
DX4_10
DX4_11
DX4_12
DX4_13
DX4_14
DX4_15
DX4_16
DX4_17
DX4_18
Attribution
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Scale
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
Comment
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
open/close
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
close =effective
System Overview
2.2.5. Keyboard Control Board

The Keyboard Control Board is installed in the Workstation and acted as the translator between workstation
membrane keyboard and workstation computer.
It translates key press and release into make/break code that computer can identify. The interface and
communication between KCB and computer conforms to standard USB 1.1 protocol.
The structure of KCB is shown as follows:
Keyboard Control Board

Power
and
communi
cation
interface
Keyboard
decoder
TVS
protection
LED
indicator
Keyboard
scan line
interface
Power and USB signal

The keyboard control board connects
with the host computer of WKS by a
USB cable; the power and signal
conform to the standard USB 1.1
protocol.
Key matrix interfaces

The keyboard control board
connects with key membrane by
flexible flat cable; every scan wire in
flexible cable is protected by TVS
diode, which is realized by adding
TVS diode array chips, SP723AG in
the keyboard control board.
2-35
Key allocation and make/break code

The main control IC of the board is HT82K629A, a
keyboard encoder. It can function both in USB and
PS2 interface environment. What we apply in this
design is the USB interface, and it supports the
USB standard request as well as HID class request
version 1.1.
The pin assignment of HT82K629A is shown in
Picture 4, and the pin description is shown in
Table3
Key matrix forms at the crosses between R0~R7 and C0~C19. Membrane keyboard is adopted as the external
interface of the control board.
Pin description of HT82K629A:
2-36
System Overview
2.2.6. Updown Board

Up/down Board is located in C-Arm mainframe and is the control and drive unit of the lift column motor.
AC-DC
V_DETECT
KEYSWITCH
J3
1
GND_PS1
KEY_N
Key
Switch
Sensor
KEYSWOPEN
UP_N
DOWN_N
DOWN_N
Proximity
switch(E2EX5ME2 NPN)
GND_PS1
UDB_OVERCUR_N
UP_TO_MCB_N
+24V_UDB
GND_PS1
2
3
UDB_OVERCUR_N
UP_TO_MCB_N
Interlock protector
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
DISABLE
DOWN_PROTECT
Proximity
Switch
Protector
DOWN SECURITY_N
J5
Up/down Key Control &

Delay
J6
1
6
3
DOWN_PROTECT
UP_N
DOWN_SECURITY_N
Voltage Detector
KEY_N
MOTO 2
J2
Motor Current
Detector
UDB_OVERCUR_N
PMOSFET Driver
MOTO1
Up/down Control Relays
DOWN_COMMAND
MF_AC2
8V_N
Up/down
relays
UP_COMMAND
J4
MF_AC2
8V_L
DRV
CURRENT_
DETECT
Emergency Switch
MF_AC2
8V_N
J1
MOS_DRIVE_N
MF_AC2
8V_L
Motion
DIS/ENA
UDB_ENABLE
5
6
7
DOWN_PROTECT_CON
1
+24V_UDB
Power Regulator
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
DOWN_SECURITY_TO _M
CB_N
UDB_ENABLE
DOWN_PROTECT_TO _MCB_
N
+24V_UDB
GND_PS1
M
O
T
H
E
R
B
O
A
R
D
2-37
THEORY OF OPERATION
Power Regulator
This circuit is to translate the DC24V input to the DC+15V and DC+2.5V which would be used in the updown
board. Devices 7815 and LM431 are used to realize this function.
AC-DC
Translate the AC28V input to the DC output.
Up/down relays
This function is to realize the up and down motion. Different polar voltage would be added to the lift column
motor by these relays.
Relay K9 is closed-normal. When the motor is forbidden motioning, K9 shall turn on and this closed-normal
contact shall open.
When the up motion is enabled, relays K1-K4 shall turn on and relays K5-K8 shall turn off. And the positive
DC voltage shall apply to the lift column motor. The voltage of the signal MOTO1 shall higher than MOTO2
and the motor begins up motion.
When the down motion is enabled, relays K5-K8 shall turn on and relays K1-K4 shall turn off. And the
negative DC voltage shall apply to the lift column motor. The voltage of the signal MOTO2 shall higher than
MOTO1 and the motor begins down motion.
Up/down control relays
This circuit is to control the relays in Up/down relays circuit according to the commands from Up/down Key
Control & Delay circuit.
Up/down Key Control & Delay
This circuit is to translate the up, down, down_security signals to the UP_COMMAND and DOWN_COMMAND
signals to control the relays and the motor motion. It includes two basic functions: delay control function and
motion control function.
- Motion control function
When only the up key is pressed the UP_COMMAND signal shall be high level.
When the motor is not at the proximity protect position and only the down key is pressed, the DOWN_COMMAND
signal shall be high level.
When the motor is at the proximity protect position and both the down key and down_security key are pressed,
the DOWN_COMMAND signal shall be high level.
When both of the up key and the down key are pressed the motor shall stop. The signal UP_COMMAND and the
signal DOWN_COMMAND shall be low level.
- delay control function

The Updown board shall receive the lift column up or down command and then drive the motor motion with
a few milliseconds delay. The RC delay circuit is used to realize this function.
Voltage Detector
This function is to detect the DC voltage through the resistor divider. The output of this circuit is the input of
the PMOSFET Driver circuit.
2-38
System Overview
PMOSFET Driver
This circuit is to control the PMOSFET so that the DC voltage would not higher than 37V+/-5%. When the DC
voltage is higher than 37V+/-5% the PMOSFET would turn off. When the DC voltage is lower than 29V+/-5%
the PMOSFET would turn on.
Motor Current Detector
This circuit is to detect the motor current. There are two current limit values. One is for the up motion. The
other is for the down motion. When the motor current is larger than the limit value, the overcurrent signal
would send out to stop the motion.
Key Switch Sensor
This circuit is to detect the key switch signal to control the motor motion. When the key switch is at the OFF
state the output of this circuit would be high level and the motor motion would be disabled.
Motion DIS/ENA
This circuit is to detect the UDB_ENABLE signal from MCB to control the motor motion. When the
UDB_ENABLE signal is low level the output of this circuit would be high level and the motor motion would be
disabled.
Proximity Switch Protector
This circuit is to detect the state of the proximity switch to control the motor motion. When the motor is
down to the proximity protect position the output of this circuit would be high level and the motor would be
stopped.
Interlock Protector
There are many factures to affect the motor motion including up key, down key, down_security key, motor
current, key switch, proximity switch and motion DIS/ENA. This circuit is to combine these features to control
Relay K9 and then to realize the control of the motor.
- When any signal from motor current, key switch, proximity switch and motion DIS/ENA is to disable the
motor motion, relay K9 would turn on and HL5 would be bright. The DC voltage of the motor would down
to zero. And then the motor stops.
- The interlock function of motor current and keys are realized in this circuit. When the motor current is
overloaded the motor would be disabled to motion and HL4 and HL5 would be bright. Only when all the
keys are released the HL4 and HL5 can be dark. And then the motor motion is enabled.
- The interlock function of keys and proximity switch are realized in this circuit. When the motor down to
the proximity protect position HL5 shall be bright and the motor shall stop. Only when all the keys are
released the HL5 can be dark. And then press both the down key and the down_security key at the same
time. The motor begins down motion.
2-39
Interface:
AC power input
The AC power input is listed as follows.
Name
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC28V_N
Description
AC power input for motor
AC power input for motor
Pin
J1-1
J1-3
Attribution
POWER
POWER
Scale
28V AC
28V AC
Comment
-------
Up/down orders interface

Signals used to control the motion direction of the lift column motor are listed as follows.
Name
UP_N
GND_PS1
DOWN_N
DOWN_SECURITY
_N
Description
Up order from the up key
---Down order from the
down key
Down security order from
the down security key
Pin
J2-1
J2-3
Attribution
Digital
Ground
Scale
0V/24V
0V
Comment
LOW =the up key is pressed
----
J2-5
Digital
0V/24V
LOW =the down key is pressed
J2-6
Digital
0V/24V
LOW=the down security key is

pressed
Key switch interface

The key switch signals to enable or disable the motion of the lift column motor are listed as follows.
Name
KEY_N
GND_PS1
Description
Disable motion signal from
the key switch.
0V.
Pin
J3-1
Attribution
Passive
Scale
Short/open
Comment
short=Enable motion
J3-2
Ground
0V
----
Lift column motor interface

The DC power supplies for the motion of the lift column motor are listed as follows.
Name
MOTO1
MOTO2
Description
DC power to the lift column motor.
Up motion when the voltage is
higher than MOTO2s.
DC power to the lift column motor.
Down motion when the voltage is
higher than MOTO1s.
Pin
Attribution
Scale
Comment
J4-1
Power
0--+40VDC
J4-4
Power
0--+40VDC
The DC voltage between

MOTO1 and MOTO2 shall be
within the range: -40VDC-+40VDC
Mainframe Control Board interface

The signals to MCB are listed as follows.
Name
DOWN_PROTECT_T
O_MCB_N
UDB_OVERCUR_N
Description
Proximity protecting signal
to MCB.
Overcurrent signal to MCB.
Pin
Attribution
Scale
Comment
J5-1
Digital
0V/+15V
LOW=Proximity protect
J5-2
Digital
0V/+15V
Up signal to MCB.
J5-3
Digital
0V/+15V
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
Down signal to MCB.
J5-5
Digital
0V/+15V
DOWN_SECURITY_
TO_MCB_N
Down security key signal to

MCB.
Preserved signal from MCB
to disable the motor motion.
DC 24V power input to UDB.
----
J5-6
Digital
0V/+15V
LOW =Error, overcurrent

LOW =The motor is at
up motion
LOW =The motor is at
down motion
LOW =Down security
key is pressed
J5-7
Digital
0V/+15V
LOW =Disable motion
J5-8
J5-9
Power
Ground
+24V
0V
-------
UP_TO_MCB_N
UDB_ENABLE
+24V_UDB
GND_PS1
2-40
System Overview
Proximity switch interface

The signals from the proximity switch are listed as follows.
Name
DOWN_PROTECT
+24V_UDB
GND_PS1
Description
Proximity protecting signal
from the proximity switch.
Power to the proximity
switch
0V to proximity switch
Pin
Attribution
Scale
Comment
J6-1
Digital
0V/+24V
HIGH=Proximity protect
J6-4
Power
+24V
----
J6-5
Ground
0V
----
Test points list:

Name
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP10
TP11
TP12
Net name
--VREF_+2.5V
DOWN_PROTECT_CON
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
------+24V_UDB
VCC_+15V
MOTO2
MOTO1
Description
Proximity protect signal from proximity switch
+2.5V reference voltage
Proximity protect signal to control relay K9
GND
GND
GND
DC Voltage after rectification and regulation
Motor current
+24V voltage
+15V voltage
DC voltage for motor
DC voltage for motor
LEDs list:
Name
HL1
HL2
HL3
HL4
HL5
HL6
HL7
Color
Green
Green
Green
Red
Green
Green
Green
Description
Light=AC input has been transformed to DC voltage
Light=up motion is enabled
Light=down motion is enabled
Light=motor current is overloaded
Light=Relay K9 is turn on and DC voltage is not applied to motor
Light=Proximity switch is in proximity protect state
Dark=signal from MCB has disabled the motor motion
2-41
2.2.7. System Interface Board

The system interface board is mounted in the workstation and will provide the interface between user and
system. It is responsible for 8 functions.
-
Detect OR door open/close status and send it to WKS

Provide power switch of the Xray on indicator on OR room
Provide power switch of the Room In Use indicator on OR room
Provide power switch of the injector
Detect wireless switch short/open status and send it to WKS computer
Communicate with WKS computer through RS232 port
Extend Ethernet port from WKS computer to user interface.
Command translator between computer and PDU
The power of SIB board come from computer +5V and +12V. Fuse for +5V/3.15A F1 and +12V/1A F2 are used
to protect computer ATX power
Internal power to drive chips are divided from +5V, three voltages +3.3V, +2.5V and +1.2V are generated.
The signals come from and send to user interface are isolated with DC or AC relays K2~K5, the board can also
detect status of wireless switch J8 and control power of wireless router by MOSFET. All signals connect to FPGA
are drove with transceiver to improve the capability of current.
An Ethernet isolation is provided to user interface by SIB board, the connector J1 and J2 on SIB board can
provide 1500Vrms isolation each, with an internal Ethernet port inside computer, totally a 4000Vrms isolation on
Ethernet path.
An Altera CycloneIII FPGA U10 is used as main controller on this board, it communicates with computer and
control peripheral equipment according to command from computer and user.
TVS array U1~U5 are used to absorb surge from PDU.
The structure of SIB is shown as follows.
2-42
System Overview
Interface:
Power Interface
The pin definition of power connector
Name
+5Vin_Cmptr
+5Vin_Cmptr
+12Vin_Cmptr
GND_Cmptr
GND_Cmptr
GND_Cmptr
Description
+5V power
+5V power
+12V power
GND
GND
GND
Pin
1
6
5
2
4
7
Attribution
Power
Power
Power
Ground
Ground
Ground
Scale
0/5.5V
0/5.5V
0/13.2V
GND
GND
GND
Comment
Scale
+5V/-5V
+5V/-5V
GND
Comment
Computer Interface
Signals communicate with computer in WKS are listed as follows:
Name
SIB_TxD
SIB_RxD
GND_Cmptr
Description
SIB RS232 data send
SIB RS232 date receive
GND
Pin
2
3
5
Attribution
Digital
Digital
Ground
User Interface
Signals connected to user interface are listed as follows.
Name
Injector_Cmd_A
Injector_Cmd_B
Xray_On_Cmd_A
Xray_On_Cmd_B
Room_In_Use_Cmd_A
Room_In_Use_Cmd_B
Description
The power switch of injector
The power switch of X-ray on indicator
The power switch of room in use indicator
Pin
4
5
9
10
14
15
Attribution
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Scale
Open/Short
Comment
Output
Open/Short
Output
Open/Short
Output
2-43
Door_Open_Active_A
Door_Open_Active_B
Input to show the status of door status
1
11
Analog
Analog
0VAC/24VAC
Pin
1
Attribution
Digital
Scale
0V/12V
Input
PDU Interface
Signals connected to PDU are listed as follows.
Name
Sys_Pwr_Req
Description
Power off requeset
Mains_Lost_Err
Status of Mainframe Power
Digital
0V/12V
Sec_Ovr_Vltge_Err
Transformer secondary over voltage
Digital
0V/12V
Sec_Udr_Vltge_Err
Transformer secondary under voltage
Digital
0V/12V
12V_Err
Computer +12V error
Digital
0V/12V
Rdy_Err
Computer ready error
Digital
0V/12V
MF_Pwr
Information to indicate MF power status
Digital
0V/12V
PDU_Connect_2
Digital
0V/12V
10
Digital
0V/12V
Beep_Invalid_Key_Cm
d
Intlc_Board
Information to indicate cable between SIB and

PDU plug or not.
Information to indicate cable between SIB and
PDU plug or not.
Invalid key beep command
19
Digital
0V/12V
Interlock status of EE boards loop
20
Digital
0V/12V
ACK_PDU2SIB
ACK of commands send from SIB
21
Digital
0V/12V
Rsrv_From_PDU_1
Reserved IOs
11
Digital
0V/12V
Rsrv_From_PDU_2
Reserved IOs
12
Digital
0V/12V
Rsrv_From_PDU_3
Reserved IOs
13
Digital
0V/12V
GND
GND
Sys_Pwr_Off_Cmd
GND
GND
Power off command from computer
14
2
22
GND
GND
Digital
0V
0V
0V/12V
Sys_Pwr_Off_Deny
Power off deny from computer
23
Digital
0V/12V
MF_Pwr_On_Cmd
MF power on command from computer
24
Digital
0V/12V
Rdy
Computer ready
25
Digital
0V/12V
Beep_Err_Cmd
Error beep command
26
Digital
0V/12V
Rsrv_From_SIB_1
Reserved IOs
15
Digital
0V/12V
Rsrv_From_SIB_2
Reserved IOs
16
Digital
0V/12V
Rsrv_From_SIB_3
Reserved IOs
17
Digital
0V/12V
PDU_Connect_1
2-44
Comment
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Output
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Input
High=effective
Input
GND
GND
High=effective
Output
High=effective
Output
High=effective
Output
High=effective
Output
High=effective
Output
High=effective
Output
High=effective
Output
High=effective
Output
System Overview
GND
GND
18
GND
0V
GND
Ethernet Interface
Signals connected to Rom Interface are listed as follows.
Name
CX1+
CX1CX2+
CX2CX3+
CX3CX4+
CX4-
Description
Ethernet CX1+
Ethernet CX1Ethernet CX2+
Ethernet CX4-
Attribution
Differential
Differential
Differential
Differential
Differential
Differential
Differential
Differential
From
S10 pin 11
S10 pin 10
S10 pin 4
S10 pin 5
S10 pin 3
S10 pin 2
S10 pin 8
S10 pin 9
To
S9 pin 11
S9 pin 10
S9 pin 4
S9 pin 5
S9 pin 3
S9 pin 2
S9 pin 8
S9 pin 9
Comment
Test Points
The SIB provides test points for following signals:
Name
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13
TP14
TP15
TP16
TP17
TP18
TP19
Description
+5V power
+3.3V power
+2.5V power
+1.2V power
+12V_Cmptr power
+5V_Cmptr power
MF_Pwr_On_Cmd
Rdy
Sys_Pwr_Off_Cmd
Sys_Pwr_Off_Deny
ACK_PDU2SIB_FPGA
CLK_FPGA
DEV_OEn
DEV_CLRn
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
LED Indicators
SIB provides LED indicator for following signals:
Name
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
LED7
LED8
LED9
LED10
LED11
Description
+5V power
+3.3V power
+2.5V power
+1.2V power
+12V_Cmptr power
+5V_Cmptr power
MF_Pwr_On_Cmd
Rdy
Sys_Pwr_Off_Cmd
Sys_Pwr_Off_Deny
NRESET
Comments
High=effective
High=effective
High=effective
High=effective
High=effective
High=effective
Low=effective
Low=effective
Low=effective
Low=effective
Low=effective
2-45
LED12
LED13
LED14
LED15
LED16
LED17
LED18
LED19
LED20
2-46
T_LED1
T_LED2
T_LED3
T_LED4
XRAY_ON_CMD_FB
ROOM_IN_USE_CMD_FB
WIRELESS_PWR_CMD_FB
DOOR_OPEN_ACTIVE
ACK_PDU2SIB_FPGA
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
High=effective
High=effective
High=effective
N/A
Low=effective
System Overview
2.2.8. Collimator Control Board

Mother board
+15V -15V +5V
ERROR
INDICATORS
POWER SUPPLY
MOT_IRIS+
DIN
IRIS
SCLK
IRIS
Analog
PID
MOT_IRIS -
IRIS
MOT
Driver
IRIS
MOT
SYNC
MCB
DAC with
SPI
control
ROT
ROT
Analog
PID
MOT_ROT+
IRIS
MOT
Driver
MOT_ROT-
ROT
MOT
Collimator
WIDTH
WIDTH
Analog
PID
MOT_WIDTH+WIDT
IRIS
MOT MOT_WIDTH- H
MOT
Driver
IRIS_POSN
ROT_POSN
WIDTH_POSN
Collimator Control Board
COL_REF+
5V
COL_REF-
Power
-
There are +5V, +15V and -15V inputs.

+15V is used to drive OC input and all the OPA.-15V is used to drive all the OPA.
+5V is used to drive OC output, DAC and output-drive circuit. Locally,
-5V shall be generated from -15V by MC7905, and its used to drive output-drive circuit.
Locally, +5V1% reference shall be generated from +15V by LM4040-5.0, and its used as DAC reference.
Another LM4040-5 shall be used to output +5V1% reference to collimator potentiometer.
2-47
Communication with MCB and Collimator

DAC7554 is used to output 3 analog channels and its control accuracy is 12-bit. It shall be controlled by MCB
through SPI, in order to generate collimator-motor- target-position control signal. There are 3 motors in
collimator, which are IRIS motor, shutter width motor and shutter rotation motor. Therefore, DAC in CCB shall
support 3 independent channels. Meanwhile, CCB transmits 3 motors position feedback (analog signal) to MCB
directly. Through the PID adjustment, the motor driver can control the motor properly.
Interface
Signal Name
SPI_DIN_CCB
SPI_SCLK_CCB
SPI_SYNC_CCB
RSV_CCB
INTERLOCK_COM
INTERLOCK_COM
IRIS_POS_F
SHUT_ROT_POS_F
SHUT_WIDTH_POS_F
GND_15V
GND_15NV
GND_5V
+15V
-15V
+5V
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
SHUT_WIDTH_MOTSHUT_ROT_MOT+
SHUT_ROT_MOTIRIS_MOT+
IRIS_MOTSHUT_WIDTH_POS
SHUT_ROT_POS
IRIS_POS
COL_POTS_REF+
COL_POTS_REF-
2-48
Description
One termination of Emergency
switch1/input
Emergency switch1/input
One termination of Emergency
switch2/input
Connected to MCB for
reserve/input
System inter lock
System inter lock
Transmit IRIS motor position
analog feedback to MCB/output
Transmit shutter rotation motor
position analog feedback to
MCB/output
Transmit shutter width motor
position analog feedback to
MCB/output
+15V Ground
-15V Ground
+5V Ground
+15V power supply/input
+15V power supply/input
+5 V power supply/input
Shutter width motor +/output
Shutter width motor -/output
Shutter rotation motor +/output
Shutter rotation motor -/output
IRIS motor +/output
IRIS motor -/output
Shutter width position
feedback/input
Shutter rotation position
feedback/input
IRIS position feedback/input
CollimAtor potentiometer
reference +
CollimAtor potentiometer
reference -
Scale
0/+15V Digital
Direction
input
Connector. Pin
J1.a11
0/+15V Digital
input
J1.a12
0/+15V Digital
input
J1.a10
0/+15V Digital
input
J1.b12
0/+15V Digital
0/+15V Digital
0~5V analog
input
output
output
J1.a13
J1.b14
J1.b13
0~5V analog
output
J1.b10
0~5V analog
output
J1.b11
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
0~5V analog
Input
input
input
output
output
output
output
output
output
input
J1.c9,
J1.a9, J1.b9
J1.a4, J1.b4
J1.c4
J1.c15, J1.c16
J1.a15, J1.a16
J1.a5, J1.b5, J1.c5
J1.c2
J1.c3
J1.b2
J1.b3
J1.a2
J1.a3
J1.c12
0~5V analog
input
J1.c11
0~5V analog
+5V1%/5mA
input
power
output
n/a
J1.c10
J1.b1
Analog ground
J1.a1
System Overview
Test Point
TP refer
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13
TP15
TP16
TP18
TP19
TP27
TP28
TP30
TP31
TP32
TP33
TP101
TP102
TP103
TP104
TP105
TP106
Signal
+5V
+5V analog
-15V
Shutter rotation motor control after PI adjustment
Shutter width control after PI adjustment
IRIS control after PI adjustment
IRIS position after filter
Shutter width position after filter
Shutter rotation position after filter
Shutter rotation motor control+
Shutter rotation control after DAC
Shutter width motor control+
Shutter width control after DAC
IRIS motor control+
IRIS control after DAC
-5V
Shutter rotation motor controlShutter width motor control+15V digital
IRIS motor control+15V
Analog GND
Analog GND
Digital GND
Digital GND
GND +15V digital
GND +15V digital
LED
LED refer
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
Signal
-5V
+15V
-15V
+5V
2-49
2.2.9. kV control and IGBT assembly

KV Control Board
The kV control board is mounted inside the C-Arm Mainframe. It is one part of X-ray generator. The kV control
board will provide the following functional and performance.
-
Send out 4 channel PWM(Pulse Width Modulation) signal for IGBT inverter board
Provide insulated driver signal for IGBT
KV feedback control circuit
KV feedback value output
Exposure control
KV value set
Protect circuit and error signal output
KV control board mainly consists of 5 function blocks, refer to kV control board block diagram:
4 Input AC 20V
KV set
PI adjustor
KV feedback
40KHz
IGBT driver
PWM generator
HCPL316
IGBT inverter
board
Current
Feedback
ERROR output
1. KV min <25kV
2. KV max >120kV
DC bus
3. KV unbalance
4. Over current
5. Short circuit
LED
Outpu
t
PWM GENERATOR
KV control board provides PWM signal output. SG3525A pulse width modulator control circuits offer.
Improved performance and lower external parts count when implemented for controlling all types of
switching power supplies.
-
2-50
8.0 V to 35 V Operation
5.1 V 1.0% Trimmed Reference
100 Hz to 400 kHz Oscillator Range
Separate Oscillator Sync Pin
Adjustable Dead time Control
Input Under voltage Lockout
Latching PWM to Prevent Multiple Pulses
PulsebyPulse Shutdown
System Overview
Dual Source/Sink Outputs: 400 mA Peak
The switch frequency is 40KHz for X-ray generator. So the SG3525 should provide 40KHz PWM signal.
Frequency is determined by adjusting the resistor connected with pin6 and capacitor connected with pin5.
At this pin5 80KHz swath wave should be observed in oscillograph.
The pin2 inputs variable voltage signal. Then this voltage signal enters the comparator through internal
amplifier and generators PWM signal.
PI ADJUSTOR
X-ray generator provides stable kV when exposure. It needs to use feedback control to stabilized the output
kV. PI adjustor is usually using at feedback control. There are 2 PI adjustors in kV control board, voltage PI
adjustor and current PI adjustor.
Voltage PI adjustor consists of amplifier U6-2 and resistor R28, R35, R50, R32, capacitor C27, C31,. Before
entering the PI adjustor the set kV value subtracts the feedback kV value to send out error signal. This signal
is sent to voltage PI adjustor.
Current PI adjustor consists of amplifier U6-1 and resistor R44, R46, R47, capacitor C29, C30. The output
signal from voltage PI adjustor subtracts the feedback current of inverter output to send out error signal.
This signal is sent to current PI adjustor. Then the PI adjustor carries out the voltage signal and enters PWM
generator SG3525.
IGBT DRIVER
KV control board consists of IGBT driver circuit. Usually the IGBT driver circuit must be insulated with control
circuit and it still needs several independent power for IGBT gate driver. Agilent IC HCPL-316J is a highly
Integrated power control device that incorporates all the necessary components for a complete, isolated
IGBT gate drive circuit with fault protection and feedback into one SO-16 package. TTL input logic levels
allow direct interface with a microcontroller, and an optically isolated power output stage drives IGBTs with
power ratings of up to 150 A and 1200 V. A high speed internal optical link minimizes the propagation delays
between the micro-controller and the IGBT while allowing the two systems to operate at very large common
mode voltage differences that are common in industrial motor drives and other power switching
applications. The feather is as follows.
-
Drive IGBTs up to IC = 150 A, VCE = 1200 V

Optically Isolated, FAULT Status Feedback
SO-16 Package
CMOS/TTL Compatible
500 ns Max. Switching Speeds
For the independent driver power supply kV control board consists of 4 channel independent power. Each
channel can provide DC+18V and DC4.7V power for HCPL-316J. Those DC power is rectified from AC power.
The power interface connector is KJ7. It connected with driver power transformer.
PROTECT CIRCUIT
KV control board designed 6 protect circuits to protect the X-ray generator. KV lower protect circuit, kV
higher protect circuit, Over current protect circuit, IGBT error protect circuit. DC bus error protect circuit, kV
unbalance protect circuit.
According to generator design requirement the kV output value range is 40kV-110kV. This kV board set
protect circuit point is 25kV. That is if the kV value is lower than 25kV when X-ray generator is running the
exposure can be disable. The kV control board drawing shows the protect circuit. When kV feedback signal
KVT is higher than reference value in U10-1 the STOP signal is activated. At the same time led DS4 lightens.
This protect circuit is enable after a time of 6ms which made by resistor R74 and capacitor C47 after giving
the exposure command.
2-51
For the higher protect circuit point the value is set 120kV. When kV feedback signal KV- or kV+ is higher than
reference value in U10-2 and U11-2 the STOP signal is activated. At the same time led DS5 lightens. Jumper
W1 can disable this protect circuit. If jumper W1 is short circuit the higher protect circuit is disable.
For the over current protect circuit point the value is set 100A. when inverter output current measured by
current transformer is higher than the reference value in U17-2 the STOP signal is activated. At the same
time led DS56 lightens. Just like kV lower protect circuit this protect circuit is enable after a time of 6ms after
giving the exposure command.
For the DC bus error protect circuit point the value is set 250V and 360V. When DC bus voltage is lower than
250V or higher than 360V the exposure is disable. To the circuit, when DC bus voltage signal UDC is higher
than reference value in U19-1 and U19-2 the STOP signal is activated. At the same time led DS8 lightens.
Jumper W1 can disable this protect circuit. If jumper W1 is short circuit the higher protect circuit is disable.
For the kV unbalance protect circuit point the value is set 10kV. When difference between +kV absolute
value and kV absolute value in the monoblock is higher than 10kV the exposure is disable. To the circuit
when difference signal KVN is higher than the reference value in U18-2 the STOP signal is activated. At the
same time led DS57 lightens.
For the IGBT error protect, the driver IC U23, U24, U26, U27 can provide this functional circuit. When IGBT is
short circuit those 4 IC will send out fault signal to disable exposure.
All the protect threshold is as follows.
kV lower protect circuit
kV higher protect circuit
Over current protect circuit
IGBT error protect circuit
DC bus error protect circuit
kV unbalance protect circuit
kV value<25kV
kV value>120kV
inverter current >100A
IGBT short circuit
DC voltage<250V, or DC voltage>360V
kV>10kV
LED OUTPUT
KV control board provides LED output warning when protect circuit is activated. All warning state can be
clear through pushing switch S1 or energizing the kV control board again.
The IGBT board in the generator includes fuse F, IGBT Q1,Q2,Q3,Q4, snubber circuit (composed by R,C,D
components) and common inductor L. The drive signal for IGBT is given by the kV control board. The IGBT
board actually is a DC-AC inverter and the DC input of this board is the output of a AC-DC converter
consisted by the main transformer, rectifier bridge and the DC bus capacitor. For the serial resonant
frequency of resonant circuit is nearly 40kHz, the IGBT board provides 40KHz variable AC power to
Monoblock.
The Block diagram of the IGBT board is shown as follows:
2-52
System Overview
Signals from MCB to KV control board are listed as follows.

Name
SAFETY_EN
Description
Safety line for EXPOSURE_COMMAND
Attribution Scale
Digital
0/+15V
EXPOSURE_COMMAND
Exposure command
Digital
0/+15V
KV_SET_INPUT
KV set value to KV control board
Analog
0-6V
Comment
+15V=enable
0V=disable
+15V=enable
0V=disable
Unit is 20KV/V
Attribution
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
Analog
Scale
0/+15V
0/+15V
0/+15V
0/+15V
0/+15V
0/+15V
0-6V
Comment
0V=alarm
0V=alarm
0V=alarm
0V=alarm
0V=alarm
0V=alarm
Unit 20KV/V
Signals from KV control board to MCB are listed as follows.

Name
KV_LOW_ALM
KV_HIGH_ALM
OVERCURRENT_ALM
IGBT_ERROR_ALM
DC_ERROR_ALM
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT
Description
KV too low alarm, lower than 35KV
KV too High alarm, higher than 120KV
Inverter over current alarm
IGBT error alarm
DC Power Bus Error alarm
KV unbalance in two bridges of inverter.
KV sample value from KV control board
Test Point
Pin
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13
TP14
TP15
Description
+15V
Output A of SG3525
Output B of SG3525
The frequence of SG3525
GND
GND
+5V
-15V
GND
The current feedback of inverter output
The control voltage of KV PI
The control voltage of KV PI with inverter current
KV PI output
Midpoint of KV
KV feedback output
2-53
TP16
TP17
TP18
TP19
TP20
TP21
TP22
TP23
TP24
TP25
TP26
TP27
TP28
TP29
TP30
TP31
TP32
TP33
TP34
TP35
TP36
TP37
The sample voltage of DC bus over-voltage protection

The sample voltage of DC bus low-voltage protection
Divided DC bus
Optocoupler output of DC bus
GD4
GD1
TOP1
GD2
BOT1
GD3
TOP2
GD4
BOT2
18V1+
5V1-15V
KVKV+
KV set
+10V
KV low-voltage alarm
DC bus alarm
LED Indicators
Name
Signal
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
DS5
DS6
DS7
DS8
DS9
DS10
Exposure command
IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N
+15V
KV low alarm
KV high alarm
Overcurrent alarm
KV unbalance alarm
DC bus error alarm
24V of Optocoupler driver
-15V
2-54
System Overview
2.2.10.
Filament Driver Board
The filament transformer current sense circuitry uses hall current sensor to provide analog output proportional to
the actual filament transformer current, the ratio between the filament current and transformer current is
1:3.5556.
The FDB is mounted in the Mainframe E-box. It is responsible for several functions as follows:
-
Provide PWM output for driving Filament Transformers in High Voltage Tank
Switch large or small filament focus
Stop PWM generation for a while delay when switching large or small filament
Over current protection
Provide the over current alarm signal to MCB
Respond to alarm signal from MCB and stop PWM generation
Filament transformer current closed loop control
The structure of FDB is shown as follows.

Invertor
+24V
Over current
protect
PS1
24V_GND
Filament
Select
Circuit
SM
TANK
40-110kV
PWM
Driver
Hall current
sensor
FCSSW_FDB
Delay
Circuit
MCB
OCALM_FDB
FILDISA_FDB
MAC_FDB
Filament
Transformer
Current
SG3525
Filament
current
regulator
RMS Current
The FDB consists of 9 function blocks: Inverter, Overcurrent protect, PWM control, Filament select circuit, Hall
current detect, Filament transformer current control, L/S focus switch, 10V reference, and Interlock.
Inverter
The filament drive pulses PWMA and PWMB are applied to two triodes Q3 and Q5 to drive power MOSFET Q4
and Q6 in a switching stage. When either input is high, one of the two MOSFETs gates is positive and the
other negative. Power to the switching stage is constant +24V, needed 1.4A power input, which is provided
from external switching power PS1.
Overcurrent protection
The filament current is monitored across a 0.255, comprising R4 and R5 in parallel, in the DC bus. The
sample voltage inputs to Q1 base. The filament current for the large focus is less than 1.4A in normal
condition, which yields less than 357mV across the resistor pair. When the filament current exceeds 2.75A,
the voltage will exceeds 0.7V, Q1 will drive the base of Q2 on, then Q2 collector will be grounded,
OCALM_FDB will go high, OC_ALM_S will go low to drive U3(1/4) on to pull SMAC to -15V, SG3525 output will
shut down until S1 is pressed or the system restarts. Inductor L1 limits the peak switching current through
transitions and reduces high frequency radiated energy from the output stage.
2-55
PWM control
Pulses PWMA and PWMB at a frequency of 600Hz are produced by SG3525, pulse width modulator control
integrated circuits. The deadtime is programmed by C2 and R16. The duty ratio is controlled by regulating
circuit of MAC_FDB from MCB that is current setting by the preheat table lookup and feedback filament
current value that is provided by hall current sensor. The FILDIS_FDB from MCB can shut down SG3525
outputs directly.
Filament select circuit
The filament selection is made by applying logic high to FCSSW_FDB. This turns on Q7 and operates relay K1.
Under these conditions, the large filament is selected and LED HL3 lights. The filament drive outputs FILLA1
and FILLA2 are connected to the large filament primary side. The FILSM1 and FILSM2 are connected to the
small filament primary side. The FCSSW_FDB line will be pulled low by a resistor R28 if the connection is
broken.
Hall current detect
The FILCOM are connected to the central tap of the two primary sides of filament transformer in high
voltage tank. The return filament current passes through FILCOM to 24V_GND. If the filament current via the
hall current sensor CSNE151 is 5A, the current through Pin.13 of CSNE151 will be 25mA, which is a RMS value,
the voltage on TP1 will be 2.5V. The analog signal goes through RC filter composed of R10 and C4 to filament
current regulator.
Filament current control
The FCSSW_FDB determines the scale factors of regulating circuit towards MAC_FDB when the filament is
selected. Subtracting return filament current value LEMF from MAC_FDB through different scale operation
circuit, the result is sent to SG3525 to control duty ratio.
Normally, MAC_FDB is less than 5V, more than 3V. IF MAC_FDB is much more than 5V, filament current will
be maximized and SMAC will exceed 3.3V of input threshold of PWM comparator of SG3525, Duty cycle will
be maximized, FWMC_FDB will be send out to MCB until disposed.
Both of the delay circuit and the signal FILDIS_FDB from MCB are able to drive U3(2/4) on to pull SMAC to 15V, and OC_ALM_S is able to drive U3(1/4) on to pull SMAC to -15V, SG3525 outputs will shut down.
L/S focus switch
When filament focus switches, PWM pulses will shut down for a while delay of 56mS, because operate time
of relay is about 7mS and RC circuit of coil of relay costs about 6mS. The delay time should be more than
13mS. The delay signal is produced by CD4538 and logic gates. The delay time is determined by R42, C29
and R41, C28.
10V reference
The U7 REF102 chip provides standard +10V for regulating circuit.
Interlock
The J1A-13 and J1C-13 pin of connector are connected as interlock. The interlock goes through the FDB to
verify that the FDB is in place.
2-56
System Overview
Interface
Name
GND
15V
15NV
24V
24V_GND
MAC_FDB
PWMC_FDB
FILDIS_FDB
FCSSW_FDB
OCALM_FDB
FILLA2
FILLA1
FILSM1
FILSM2
FILCOM
Interlock_B
Interlock_C
Description
GND
+15V
-15V
+24V
GND of 24V
Set current value
Control voltage
output
Filament disable
Large or small
filament switch
Over current alarm
signal output
Large filament
Large filament
Small filament
Small filament
Filament common
port
Interlock_B
Interlock_C
Pin
J1A-12, J1A-32, J1B-12, J1C-12,
J1A-29, J1B-29, J1C-29
J1C-32
J1A-1, J1B-1, J1C-1
J1A-6, J1B-6, J1C-6
J1B-9
J1B-13
Attribution
Ground
Power
Power
Power
Ground
Analog
Analog
Scale
GND
15V
-15V
+24V
GND
0V~15V
-15V~15V
Comment
GND
15V
-15V
+24V
GND of 24V
J1C-10
J1A-10
Digital
Digital
0V/15V
0V/15V
J1B-10
Digital
0V/15V
15V=effective
0V= small
15V=large
15V=effective
J1A-18, J1B-18, J1C-18

J1A-20, J1B-20, J1C-20
J1A-22, J1B-22, J1C-22
J1A-24, J1B-24, J1C-24
J1A-26, J1B-26, J1C-26
Analog
Analog
Analog
Analog
Analog
0V~24V
0V~24V
0V~24V
0V~24V
0V~24V
J1A-13
J1C-13
Digital
Digital
0V/24V
0V/24V
Test point
Name
FC
PWMB
OC
FC_RC
+15V
GND
SMAC
SMAC_V
-15V
+24V
MAC
10V
OSC
PWMA
GND
GND
24V_GND
Pin
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13
TP14
TP15
TP16
TP17
Description
Return current
PWM drive signal
Overcurrent
Filtered return current
Power
GND
PWM control voltage
PWM control voltage
Power
Power
PWM control voltage
Power
crystal oscillator output
PWM drive signal
GND
GND
GND of 24V
Color
Green
Green
Green
Green
Red
Red
Pin
HL1
HL2
HL3
HL4
HL5
HL6
LED
Name
+15V
-15V
FIL_SEL
+24V
OC
FIL_D
Description
Power
Power
ON=large focus; Off=small focus
Power
ON=overcurrent
ON=filament disable
2-57
2.2.11.
Monoblock
Monoblock can generate X-ray. It mainly consists of high voltage generator and tube insert. All high voltage
components are put into oil box, which can enhance the insulation performance.
Monoblock generates 110kV inside the oil tank. The input voltage changes from 0V to 240V peak value. High
voltage is got from high frequency and high voltage transformer T1. The primary coil is 10T and the secondary
coil is 2500T. So the maximum voltage of secondary side is 60kV peak value at 40kHz.
Monoblock Schematic Diagram:
T1
D1
C1
R1
+kV
D2
C2
R2
-mA
kV
Inverter
Tube
D3
D4
C3
C4
R3
-kV
R4
T2
filament
Inverter
T3
High voltage circuit comprises rectifier circuit and voltage doubler. High voltage circuit composes of high voltage
diode D1-D4, high voltage capacitor C1-C4. If output voltage from T1 is 60kV peak value the high voltage circuit
output 120kV to the tube.
The controller needs to get kV value and mA value from monoblock. KV sense circuit comprises high voltage
resistor R1, R4 and sense resistor R2, R3. The high voltage resistor value is 400M ohm, sense resistor is 20k ohm If
the voltage on the tube is 120kV the +kV output 3V and kV output 3V. mA value is measured by serial resistor
between mA and ground. So the mA voltage value is negative.
The tube is used to generate X-ray. This tube is a kind of double focus with fixed copper anode tube. It is suitable
for oil insulation generator.
Analog signals KV_GND and MA_CAT of sealing board are the anode and cathode of mA current signal
respectively.
There are two temperature measurement circuits in sealing board. Ones output is analog signal OIL_TEMP.
The others output is connected/open status between THERMAL_SWITCH_A and THERMAL_SWITCH_B. If the
temperature of oil tank is higher than a preset threshold, the relationship between THERMAL_SWITCH_A and
THERMAL_SWITCH_B changes from connected to open.
2-58
System Overview
Signals from sealing board to MCB:

Name
OIL_TEMP
OIL_TEMP_GND
THERMAL_SWITCH_A
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
MA_CAT
KV_GND
Description
Output voltage of
temperature sensor
Reference of OIL_TEMP
One termination of
temperature switch

temperature switch
The cathode of mA sample
The anode of mA sample
Attribution
Analog
Scale
0-5V
Comment
-
Ground
Passive
0V
-
THERMAL_SWITCH_A &
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
connected means that
temperature is lower than
threshold.
THERMAL_SWITCH_A &
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
disconnected means that
temperature is higher than
threshold.
Passive
Analog
Analog
Technical Specifications:
Nominal high voltage
Nominal input power
Maximum anode heat content
Target material
Target angle
Small focal spot
Large focal spot
Filtration equiv.
Anode
Typical filament specification
Maximum filament current
Weight
Nominal heat capacity
110 kV
2.2 kW
53 kJ
Tungsten
10
0.61.4 mm
1.4 mm
0.55 mm Al
Stationary
4.2 V, 3.5A
4.6A
0.65 kg
76kHU
2-59
2.2.12.
X-Ray/key Switche and Emergency Switch
Key switch is used to control the unauthorized usage of X-ray exposure and vertical lift motor.
Signals from Key switch to Mainframe Control Board:
Name
XRAYOFF
Description
indicates lift column enable
and x-ray disable
Attribution
Passive
Scale
Open/Close
Comment
XRAYOFF & COMMON is connected means
XRAYOFF switch has pressed, which represents lift
column function has been selected and exposure
enable has not been selected.
ON

indicates lift column and xray are both enable
Common termination
Passive
Open/Close
Passive
ON & COMMON is connected means ON switch

has pressed, which represent both lift column and
exposure enable function have been selected.
-
COMMON
X-rays can be enabled via the footswitch or the Handswitch. Signals from footswitch and Handswitch to MCB are
listed in the following charts. Detailed interconnect information, please refer to chapter 2.2.3
Signals from Hand Switch to MCB:
Name
HAND_FLU
Description
Hand switch
termination
Attribution
Passive
Scale
Open/Close
Pin
J1-B28
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
Hand security line

termination
High Level Fluoro
hand switch
termination
High Level Fluoro
hand security line
termination
Common
termination
Passive
Open/Close
J1-C27
Passive
Open/Close
J1-B7
Passive
Open/Close
J1-A22
HAND_HLF & HAND_COM is

connected means HAND_HLF
-
Passive
J1-C15
HAND_HLF
HAND
_HLU_SECURITY
HAND_COM
Comment
HAND_FLU & HAND_COM is
connected means HAND_FLU
button has pressed
-
Signals from Footswitch to MCB:

Name
FOOT_FLU
Description
Foot switch
termination
Attribution
Passive
Scale
Open/Close
Pin
J1-A27
FOOT_FLU_SECURIT
Y
FOOT_ HLF
Passive
Open/Close
J1-C28
Passive
Open/Close
J1-A14
Passive
Open/Close
J1-C31
FOOT_BUTTON1
Foot security line

termination
High Level Fluoro
foot switch
termination
High Level Fluoro
foot security line
termination
Button 1
Passive
Open/Close
J1-A20
FOOT_BUTTON2
Button 2
Passive
Open/Close
J1-A19
FOOT_
HLF_SECURITY
2-60
Comment
FOOT_FLU & FOOT_COM is
connected means FOOT_FLU
FOOT_HLF & FOOT_COM is
connected means FOOT_HLF
has been pressed
System Overview
FOOT_COM
Common
termination
Passive
J1-B32

has been pressed
-
Emergency switch, located on the control panel of C-arm mainframe, stops all motorized motion immediately,
interrupts any X-rays in progress, and prevents further X-rays until you reset the system. At any time, if the
emergency switch is pushed down, the X-ray exposure shall be stopped immediately. System shall trigger the
related error message.
Name
EMERGENCY_SWT
REF_
EMERGENCY_SWT
EMERGENCY_SWT2
REF_
EMERGENCY_SWT2
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC28V_N
Description
One termination of
Emergency
switch1
The other
termination of
Emergency
switch1
One termination of
Emergency
switch2
The other
termination of
Emergency
switch2
-
Attribution
Passive
Scale
Open/Clos
e
Comment
EMERGENCY_SWT & REF_EMERGENCY_SWT is
connected means EMERGENCY_SWT has pressed
Passive
Passive
Open/Clos
e
EMERGENCY_SWT2 & REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2 is

connected means EMERGENCY_SWT2 has pressed
Passive
2-61
2.2.13.
Image Chain
Overview
The following diagram is the image chain pipeline of Brivo715/785/865.
Collimator collimates the X-ray beam to the appropriate field size and users setting. The x-ray beam passes
through Grid to reduce scattered X-ray photons. Image Intensifier converts this X-ray into lights for each field size
selection, and sends the light to CCD Camera head. CCD Camera head captures the light image and sends the
digital video data by Gigabit LAN to Network card. Network card input digital video to CPU, and the CPU performs
real-time post-processing (Brightness, Contrast, Edge Enhance, Zoom, and Negate) to be sent to image display.
CPU also analyzes the digital video signal, and outputs a video level indicator (VLI) to MCB; higher VLI when the Xray dose is higher than desired, and lower VLI when the X-ray dose is lower than desired. With AutoTechnique
enabled, VLI will be processed by MCB S/W, and commands will be sent to X-ray Generator and GigE Camera to
change kVp/mA/gain depending on the VLI value. Finally the optimized image and exposure technique are
produced.
Collimator Control
Collimator:
The collimator is an electromechanical assembly designed to allow the operator to restrict the size and
shape of the X-ray beam. The unit has a lead iris and shutters and is mounted directly over the X-ray tube
beam aperture. There are 3 motions in collimator: iris open/close; shutter open/close; shutter rotation.
-
The diameter of the iris aperture

The gap spacing between the semi-transparent copper leaves
The rotational position/orientation of the copper leaves
Collimator specification:
-
LengthWidthHeight: 180 mm130 mm95 mm

Weight: 1.65kg
8 leaves motorized iris collimator
2 blades motorized shutter
Shutter rotate angle: 360 degree
Collimator Control:
Overview
Collimator control subsystem is responsible for collimator motion control and status feedback. It consists of
Mother Board/MCB/CCB/collimator/cables between them and firmware in MCB.
2-62
System Overview
There is an independent control loop working for each motion. The negative feedback control loop is used.
E.g. for iris control, the following steps will be operated:
a)
Firmware in MCB sends a command to CCB by SPI bus to tell the required position of iris.
b)
CCB receives the command and compares it with the feedback position signal coming from the
Collimator. A PI operation is performed and works out the control signal. The signal is converted to drive
voltage by a power amplifier and sends to collimator.
c)
The drive voltage drives iris motor moving and the position feedback will be closer to command. So the
difference between command and feedback will reduce. The drive voltage returns almost zero while the
feedback is very close to the command. The control loop is finished.
Collimator control subsystem works in following situations.

a)
Move the iris and shutter to default position for each Mag mode. The default position is sent to
Collimator Control Board in one command.
b)
Move the iris and shutter to default position for film mode and return to last position while recovering
from the film mode. The default or last positions is sent to CCB in one command.
c)
Follow the operation of collimator from control panel. And the initial collimator position in each Mag is
the calculated result in collimator calibration recorded by system.
Image Intensifier
Key parameters of Image Intensifier for Brivo715/785:
Parameters
Useful entrance field size
Normal(9)
215
Output image diameter
20.2
Center Limiting resolution
44
DQE at 59.5 keV- absolute (IEC)
58
Operating Mode
Magn.1(6)
160
Magn.2(4.5)
120
Unit
mm
mm
50
54
lp/cm
%
2-63
Key parameters of Image Intensifier for Brivo OEC 865.:

Parameters
Operating Mode
Magn.1(6)
160
Magn.2(4.5)
120
Unit
Useful entrance field size
Normal(9)
215
Output image diameter
25.2
Center Limiting resolution
52
58
68
lp/cm
DQE at 59.5 keV- absolute (IEC)
65
65
65
mm
mm
GIGE Camera
There are two kinds of GigE Camera for Brivo OEC 715/785/865.
PN
5075006
5085003
Name
GigE Camera AM1565
GigE Camera AM1565B
Comments
For 715/785
For 865
The two kinds of camera share common electrical part and they are different on optics lens and relative
mechanical parts.
GigE Camera is above Image Intensifier. It takes the image from the output of Image Intensifier. The following are
the main functions of camera
Take the image and pack them per GigE protocol
Output Image per LIH control
Output Frame Synchronization Signal
Receive gain control signal and adjust gain
GigE Camera use CCD sensor to acquire image on the output window of image intensifier. Following table shows
the key specification of CCD sensor.
2-64
System Overview
Key Specification of CCD sensor

Specification
Image size
Active pixels number
Pixel size
Structure
Description
Diagonal 11 mm (Type 2/3)
1360 (H) 1024 (V) approx. 1.40M pixels
6.45 m (H) 6.45 m (V)
Progressive Scan
As previously being mentioned, two kinds of camera share common electrical part. Following picture shows
the structure of electrical function.
Camera System Control
In this structure, FPGA is central control unit of GigE Camera.

FPGA controls CCD driver electrical circuit to drive CCD sensor, then CCD sensor transfers the optical signal
into analog signal. VGA and 12-bit ADC convert analog signal to digital signal. FPGA buffers digital signal into
image buffer, then output per GigE Vision protocol.
FPGA can adjust the gain of image per receiving external gain control command from RS422 serial port.
FPGA provides two GPIO signal. One is FrameSync output, the others is LIH input.
FPGA makes FrameSync signal low for 5ms then high at every frame according 25FPS.
FPGA uses LIH signal to control transmitting of image as following: after 2 ms on the every falling edge of
FrameSync, FPGA starts to check LIH. If LIH is continuous high for 10 ms, FPGA start to transmit image.
otherwise, FPGA stops transmitting.
GigE Camera receives +12V DC as power input, then converts different DC voltage to supply different circuits.
Interface
There are two connectors in GigE camera, one is industrial standard RJ-45 connector for GigE Vision
Protocol on Gigabit Ethernet. The other is HDB15 female connector which provides power, RS422 and GPIO
as following Table:
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
RSV
LIH
TXD485+
RXD485GND
RSV
GND
Description
Reserved
Input, 12V logic Last image hold
Output, RS422 positive terminal of differential TXD signal
Input, RS22 negative terminal of differential RXD signal
GND
Reserved
GND
2-65
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TXD485RXD485+
VCC
GND
RSV
RSV
FrameSync
GND
Output, RS422 negative terminal of differential TXD signal

Input, RS422 positive terminal of differential RXD signal
+12V supply voltage
GND
Reserved
Reserved
Output, 12V logic Frame synchronization
GND
Lens
GigE Camera AM1565 uses Computar M1614-MP lens. This lens has 16mm focal lens, manual iris F1.4-F16
and manual focus.
Computar M1614 Lens

GigE Camera AM1565 uses an interface flange for mounting itself into image intensifier. This interface flange
is independent part from lens. This interface flange provide three holes and these holes accommodate
errors of at least 2 mm for positioning the image center.
GigE Camera AM1565 use 3D 500025 lens. This lens has 16mm focal lens, manual iris F1.4-F16 and manual
focus.
2-66
System Overview
3D 500025 Lens
GigE Camera AM1565B uses an interface flange for mounting itself into image intensifier. This interface
flange is integrated into lens. This interface flange provides three holes for mounting camera with image
intensifier, at the same time it provides 6 screws around flange to position the image center for
accommodating errors of at least 2 mm.
2-67
Anti-Scatter Grid
Key parameters of Anti-Scatter Grid for Brivo OEC 715/785/865.
Specification
Line Rate
Ratio
Cover Material
Interspace Material
Absorption Material
Quality Factor (Q =K/B)
Contrast Impr. Factor (K)
Exposure Factor (B)
Selectivity (E)
OEC 715/785
40L/cm
8:1
Al
OEC 865
60L/cm
10:1
Carbon
Al
Pb
0.64
2.3
4.0
4.5
Carbon
Pb
0.72
3.8
5.3
7.4
Selectivity means a relative improvement of the proportion Primary radiation with respect to scattered radiation
expressed by the ratio between the Transmission of Primary radiation and the Transmission of Scattered
radiation.
Exposure Factor means the ratio between the Indicated value of the total radiation without an Anti-scatter Grid
in a specific beam of radiation and that with the Anti-scatter Grid placed in the beam.
Setup points: No setup points available.
Monitor
There are 4 kinds of monitor for Brivo OEC 715/785/865.
PN
5075503
5085503
5085505
5330055
Name
19 Inch Color LCD Monitor
19 Inch Mono LCD Monitor
19 Inch Mono LCD Touchscreen Monitor
Component, LCD monitor, EVR (Bluestone Option Monitor)
Comments
For 715/785
For 865 left monitor
For 865 right monitor
For 785 Option
All kinds of monitors almost share common aspect and OSD function.
Following is 5075503s specification:
Item
LCD
Video Input Signal

OSD
Size
Aspect Ration
Resolution
Color Depth
Brightness
Contrast
Viewing Angle
H
V
Control key
Function
Power Supply
2-68
Preset Brightness
Preset Display Curve
Input Voltage
Power Switch
Specification
19.0
5:4
1280 x 1024 dots (SXGA)
16.7M RGB 6 bit-data + HiFRC data
360 Cd/m2 (min)
600:1(min)
150 degree
40 degree
DVI-D, VGA
Menu, up, down, exit
Backlight, Black level, Contrast, Brightness level, Position, Size,
Phase, Gamma, DICOM etc.
35020 Cd/m2, 30020 Cd/m2, 250 20 Cd/m2
DICOM, CIE, Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.0, Gamma 2.2(default).
AC100-240V, 50 / 60Hz; <0.9A
Yes
System Overview

Item
LCD
Video Input Signal

OSD
Size
Aspect Ration
Resolution
Maximum Brightness
Contrast
Viewing Angle H
V
Control key
Function
Power Supply
Preset Brightness
Input Voltage
Power Switch
Specification
19.0
5:4
1280 x 1024 dots (SXGA)
800 Cd/m2 (min)
600:1(min)
170 degree
170 degree
DVI-D, VGA
50020 Cd/m2, 60020 Cd/m2, 700 20 Cd/m2
AC100-240V, 50 / 60Hz; <0.9A
No

Item
LCD
Size
Aspect Ration
Resolution
Maximum Brightness
Contrast
Viewing Angle H
V
Video Input Signal
OSD
Control key
Function
Power Supply
Touchscreen
Preset Brightness
Input Voltage
Power Switch
Technology
Resolution
Interface
Specification
19.0
5:4
1280 x 1024 dots (SXGA)
800 Cd/m2 (min)
600:1(min)
170 degree
170 degree
DVI-D, VGA
50020 Cd/m2, 60020 Cd/m2, 700 20 Cd/m2
AC100-240V, 50 / 60Hz; <0.9A
No
IR
32767x32767
USB

Item
LCD
Video Input Signal
Size
Aspect Ration
Resolution
Maximum Brightness
Contrast
Viewing Angle H
V
Specification
19.0
5:4
1280 x 1024 dots (SXGA)
800 Cd/m2 (min)
600:1(min)
170 degree
170 degree
DVI-D, VGA
2-69
OSD
Control key
Function
Power Supply
2-70
Preset Brightness
Input Voltage
Power Switch

50020 Cd/m2, 60020 Cd/m2, 700 20 Cd/m2
AC100-240V, 50 / 60Hz; <0.9A
No
System Overview
2.2.14.
Computer and Peripheral
Computer
The computer mounted inside the workstation takes over most process of the system. It communicates with
external devices, receives image from GigE camera, process, display and save image. Following is the
configuration of computer.
PN
Name
5075506
Mainboard Assembly
5085507
5085508
5085509
5085511
Display Card
Memory Bank
Hard Disk
DVD RW Drive
5075512
Power Supply
5085514
5085900
Mouse
WiFi Connector
Configuration
CPU: CORE 3.06G 4M 1156P 2CORE I3-540(G)
Ethernet ports: Two on board Ethernet ports
1024MB DDR3 PCIE
2G DDR3-1333 240PIN 256X8 HYX(G)
500G 3.5" SATA 7KRPM 16M(G)
SATA DVD
ATX Power Supply:
Input AC : 100~240 50Hz /60Hz
Output: +5V, +/-12V, 3.3V
PS2 Mouse
Wireless Internet Adaptor 802.11N
Comments
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Option
N/A
N/A
Option
The computer contains one 2G DDR3 memory bank and one 3.5 500G SATA hard disk. The partitioned SATA hard
drive contains Linux operation system, application software and user data.
The computer contains DVI-D and HDMI output for monitor. The DVI-D is for left monitor and the HDMI is for right
monitor.
The computer contains two Ethernet ports. One is for GigE Camera AM1565 or GigE Camera AM1565B, the other
Ethernet port is used to connect DICOM printer. A WiFi collector is optional and used to connect DICOM printer
wirelessly.
The system operator can use wire or wireless to connect a DICOM server. Once the Workstation is connected to
the network, the operator can query the local server to determine if the desired images are available for
download, and then download selected images to the Workstation. The Workstation can also upload images over
the same network connection. Detailed instructions on DICOM operation are available in the Operator Manual.
Power Supply combined with Battery Pack provides UPS function. If Workstation lost AC power accidentally, UPS
function can provide at least 2 minutes to shutdown computer safely and automatically.
The computer contains three serial ports to communicate with other parts. COM1 is RS232 serial port and is not
used, COM2 is RS232 serial port and talks with SIB board, COM3 is RS422 serial port and talks with MCB board. In
addition, computer will provide +12V and +5V power to SIB board.
2-71
DVD and USB

A CD/DVD RW Drive is optional and mounted in the front of workstation. It connected to computer rear plane with
a SATA interface and power cable.
The CD/DVD RW drive can archive images inside hard disk, it supports the following writing media:
DVD+R
DVD-R
DVD+RW
DVD-RW
CD-R
CD-RW
The computer provides 6 USB 2.0 ports. One is for workstations membrane keyboard, one is from user interface
extended to the front of workstation, one is for touchscreen of 865, one is for UPS communication, the remains
are reserved, if you have option al printer, you can connect it into the remaining USB ports.
Keyboard and Mouse

The keyboard contains a simple switch matrix for alphanumeric data. The keyboard connects to computer
though USB interface. The following illustration shows the workstation keyboard.
The mouse is an ambidextrous three-button optical wheel mouse that plugs into a PS2 port.
2-72
System Overview
2.2.15.
UPS
There are one external UPS in system to protect computer and right monitor in case of AC lost accidently, left monitor is not
protected by UPS, so when AC lost accidently, user still can see the content of right monitor while left monitor is blackout.
UPS output capacity is 550VA/330W, and can provide at least 2 minutes for computer and right monitor so that system can
shutdown computer safely.
UPS is booted up or shut down by PDU board, and communication with computer by USB interface.
UPS Overview
Front Panel:
1
2
3
4
Mute
Power On/Off
Display/Menu
Display interface
UPS Connection:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Communication and Control

Reserve
Reserve
Power Input Cable
Middle of 5 (in red circle) used as output
Reserve
Reserve
Circuit breaker
2-73
Operation of UPS
Display interface
1
On LineThe UPS is supplying utility power to connected equipment
Power-SavingMaster and controlled outlets are enabled, saving

power when the master device goes into sleep or standby mode
Load CapacityThe load is indicated by the number of sections

illuminated, one to five. If the load exceeds the rated capacity, the
Overload symbol will flash off and on.
Battery ChargeThe battery charge level is indicated by the number of

sections illuminated. When all five blocks are illuminated, the Back-UPS
is at full charge. When one block is filled, the Back-UPS is near the end
of its battery capacity, the indicator will flash and the unit will beep
continuously.
OverloadThe power demand from the load has exceeded the

capacity of the Back-UPS.
EventAn event has occurred and the unit needs attention.
Automatic Voltage RegulationThe unit is compensating for extremely

low input voltage, but is not using battery power.
InInput voltage.
OutOutput voltage.
System FaultsThe system has a fault. The fault number will illuminate
on the display interface. See System Faults on page 4.
10
MuteThe audible alarm has been turned off.
11
Replace BatteryThe battery is not connected or is nearing the end of

its useful life. Replace the battery.
12
On BatteryThe unit is supplying battery backup power to the

connected equipment, it will beep four times every 30 seconds.
Modes of operation
Press DISPLAY to scroll through the display screens.
On Line Mode
Input Voltage
Counter Power
Estimated run time
Load in Watts
Load in %
Output
Output Frequency
2-74
On Battery Mode
Estimated runtime in minutes
Event Counter
Output Voltage
Input Voltage
Load in Watts
Voltage Load in %
Output Frequency
System Overview
Other status indicators

AVR: The Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) feature will compensate for excessively low input
voltages, without using battery power.When the AVR symbol is illuminated on the LCD, the unit is in
Boost mode, using the AVR feature.
UPS configuration
Unit sensitivity
Adjust the sensitivity of the UPS to control when it will switch to battery power; the higher the sensitivity, the more often the
unit will switch to battery power.
1. Ensure the unit is connected to utility power, but is OFF.
2. Press and hold the POWER button for six seconds. The LOAD CAPACITY bar will flash on and off, indicating that the unit is in
programming mode.
3. Press POWER again to rotate through the menu options. Stop at selected sensitivity. The unit will beep to confirm the
selection.
NOTE
The Medium sensitivity is the model used in Brivo OEC 715/785/865
2-75
Warnings and System Faults

Warnings:
Press DISPLAY to scroll through the display screens.
System Faults:
2-76
System Overview
Function Button Quick-Reference

Function
Button
Timing
(seconds)
UPS
Status Description
Power On
0.2
Off
Power Off
On
Press POWER to start receiving input utility

power. If A/C input power is not available, the
unit will run on battery power.
The unit is not receiving input utility power, but
is providing surge protection.
Status Inquiry
0.2
On
Verify the status or condition of the unit. The

LCD will illuminate for 60 seconds.
Full-Time/PowerSaving mode
On
The LCD will illuminate and the unit will beep to

confirm the Full-Time mode. The LCD will
darken and the unit will beep to confirm the
Power-Saving mode. While in Power-Saving
Mode, the LCD will illuminate if a button is
pressed, then darkens after 60 seconds of no
activity.
Event Specific
0.2
On
Disable any audible alarms caused by an

event.
General Status
Enable/Disable
On
Sensitivity
Off
Master/Controlled
outlet Enable/Disable
On
Master/Enable
Threshold
Calibration
On
Self-Test (manual)
On
Event Reset
0.2
On
Fault Reset
Fault
Enable or disable the audible alarms. The Mute

icon will illuminate and the unit will beep one
time. The Mute function will not activate unless
the UPS is operating on battery power.
The Load Capacity icon will blink, indicating
that the unit is in programming mode. Use the
POWER button to scroll through Low, Medium,
and High, stop at selected sensitivity. The unit
will beep to confirm selection. See
Configuration for details.
The leaf icon will darken indicating that the
Master Outlet feature is disabled or illuminate
to indicate the Master Outlet feature is
enabled. The unit will beep once.
While calibrating the threshold setting, the
device connected to the Master Outlet should
be turned off or placed in Standby or Sleep
mode. Upon completion, Power-Saving icon
will flash 3 and beep 3 times.
The UPS will perform a test of the internal
battery. Note: This will happen automatically
when the unit is turned ON.
When the Event screen is visible, press and
hold DISPLAY, then press POWER, to clear the
utility failure event counter.
After a fault has been identified, press POWER
to remove the visual indication and return to
standby status.
Power
Display
Mute
2-77
Troubleshooting
Problem
Back-UPS will not switch
on.
Possible Cause
The unit is not connected to utility power.
The circuit breaker has been tripped.
The internal battery is not connected.

The utility input voltage is out of range.
The unit does not provide
power during a utility
power outage.
The unit is operating on
battery power, while
connected to utility power.
The unit does not provide

the expected amount of
backup time.
The REPLACE BATTERY

indicator is illuminated.
The OVERLOAD indicator is
illuminated.
Ensure that essential equipment is not plugged

into a SURGE ONLY outlet.
The plug has partially pulled out of the wall
outlet, the wall outlet is no longer receiving
utility power, or the circuit breaker has been
tripped.
The unit is performing an automatic self test.
The utility input voltage is out of range, the
frequency is out of range, or the waveform is
distorted.
Battery Backup outlets may be fully or
improperly loaded.
The battery was recently discharged due to a
power outage and has not fully recharged.
The battery has reached the end of its useful
life.
The battery has reached the end of its useful
life.
The equipment connected to the unit is drawing
more power than the unit can provide.
The SYSTEM FAULT indicator

is illuminated, all the front
panel indicators are
flashing.
There is an internal fault.
Power is not supplied to

some outlets.
Power to the Controlled Outlets has

intentionally been turned off.
The Controlled Outlets are

not supplying power, even
though the Master device is
not in sleep mode.
The Master Outlet threshold may be incorrectly

set.
2-78
Corrective Action
Ensure that the unit is securely connected
to an AC outlet
Disconnect non-essential equipment from
the unit. Reset the circuit breaker. Reconnect equipment one item at a time. If
the circuit breaker is tripped again,
disconnect the device that caused the trip
Connect the battery
Adjust the transfer voltage and sensitivity
range.
Disconnect equipment from the SURGE
ONLY outlet and re-connect to a BATTERY
BACKUP outlet.
Ensure that the plug is fully inserted into
the wall outlet. Ensure that the wall outlet
is receiving utility power by checking it
with another device.
No action is necessary.
Adjust the transfer voltage and sensitivity
range.
the BATTERY BACKUP outlets and connect
the equipment to SURGE ONLY outlets.
Charge the battery cartridge for 16 hours.
Replace the battery.
Replace the battery.
the BATTERY BACKUP outlets and connect
the equipment to SURGE ONLY outlets.
Determine which internal fault message is
displayed by matching the number
displayed on the LCD with the
corresponding Fault Message (see System
Faults) and contact APC Technical
Support.
Confirm that the correct peripherals are
connected to Controlled Outlets. If this
feature is not desired, disable the PowerSaving Master and Controlled Outlets.
Adjust the threshold when the Master
outlet signals the Controlled Outlets to
shut down.
Chapter3.
Installation
3.1. Overview
This chapter describes the installation procedure of Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product.
3.2. Pre-Installation
3.2.1.
Dimensions and Weights of System
Dimensions:
C-Arm: Hmax/Hmin W L=215/170.5cm 78cm 179cm (84.6/67.1 30.7 70.3)
Workstation: H W L=167cm 64cm90cm (65.7 2535.4)
Weights:
C-Arm: 26010kg
Workstation: 17010kg
3.2.2.
Site Requirement
Scan room (H W L)
2.8 m 5.5 m 5.0 m
Entrance (HW)
2.0 m 1.2 m
Aisle (W)
2m
WARNING
Enough room should be provided for the movement, installation and operation of the
system.
WARNING
The floor should be hard enough to support the system. It should also be smooth and
horizontal.
3-2
Installation
3.2.3.
Power Supply Requirement
Voltage:
AC 100V/110V/120V|200V|220V/230V/240V 10%
Frequency:
50Hz/60Hz 3Hz
Rated Momentary Line Current (shorter than 5s):
30A (100V/110V/120V)
28A (200V)
25A (220V/230V/240V)
Rated Continuous Line Current:
20A (100V/110V/120V)
12A (200V)
10A (220V/230V/240V)
Maximum line impedance: 0.3|0.6|0.6
16A power supply is required in China. And 20 A is required in Japan.
Suitable sockets are required both in Scan room and Operating room for maintenance.
Power supply should comply with requirement of the system power supply requirements.
The sockets should be 3 cores with protective earth, which complies with the requirement
of the applicable electrical codes. Other equipment electrically connected with this
apparatus shares the same grounding connection.
NOTE
You should check the local power supply first. If it is not 200 V/220 V/230 V/240 V (50 Hz),
you need change the power supply cables and change the connections of the system.
Refer to the Power Supply Adaptation section3.5.1 for details.
WARNING
3.2.4.
Environments
Operating Conditions:
Temperature:
+10C~+40C +50F~+104F
Humidity:
20%~80% Relative, non-condensing
Atmospheric Pressure:
700hPa~1060hPa
Transportation and Storage:

Temperature:
-20C~+55C (-4F~+131F)
Humidity:
500hPa~1060hPa
3-3
3.2.5.
Tools and Test Equipment
Standard Tools and Test Equipment are required to install the system. In addition to standard service
tools and test equipment, the following special tools and standard test equipment are required to
complete this procedure.
Tool and Equipment List
Item
Comments
Screw Drivers
Recommend use auto screw

driver with Philips 2 head.
Wrench
Monkey wrench or wrench for

M8 and M12 hexagon screw
Allen Keys
Dosimeter
1012 Film
Blank CD/DVD disk
Spatial Resolution Tool
Lead Apron, thicker than 3mm
Pinchers
10
Scissors
11
Stopwatch
12
Network cable
13
Printer paper or film
14
Ruler longer than 12 inches (30cm)
15
Digital volt-ohm meter or equivalent
Item
3-4
Standard Tool and Equipment
Special Tool
GE part number
9 inch Film cassette holder (if required)
5085005
3 copper sheets, each 1mm thick
00-877682-01
9" BEAM ALIGHMENT TOOL ASSEMBLY
00-878105-02
Service Tool External DVD Surgery (If customer 5075511

order the Wireless DICOM Kit)
Installation
3.3. Unpacking
NOTE
There are 2 packages for Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product. One is for CArm (L W H=2000mm 900mm 1995mm. And the other is Workstation (L W
H=1015mm 900mm 2150mm).
NOTE
Before unpacking, inspect the shipping enclosure /boxes for damage and report to the
shipper if available.
The unpacking of the system should be done before moving it into the operation room, in order to check
if theres damage or non-apparent damage occurred during transportation.
The packages should be examined minutely during installation to avoid missing parts with small
dimensions or envelopes containing screws, washers, etc. Once damage is observed, notify service of the
transportation and insurance company immediately.
If non-apparent damage due to transportation was found during unpacking or installation, take the
same action in 15 days after delivery. The transportation corporation will not pay for non-apparent
damage generally unless making an application for inspection in 15 days after delivery.
If damage is discovered, contact the related company immediately, with specifying the type of apparatus,
the serial number and the order number if possible, and describing the nature of the damage.
Please follow the steps below to unpack the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product.
3.3.1.
Shipping Container Inspection
Inspect the shipping container for damage.

Describe the state of the shipping container in below:
3-5
3.3.2.
Unpack C-Arm
1. Place the C-Arm and workstation packages on the flat and leave enough space around.
2. Cut off the binding tie and remove the cardboard coping and box of the C-Arm. Then remove the
seal wrapper of the C-Arm.
3. Remove the limitation frame of Image intensifier and Monoblock.
4. Lock the cross-arm, Wigwag, lateral rotation and orbital movement brakes. Get the accessory
packages, wood crowbar and ramp from the C-Arm package. Put the wood ramp behind of the
C-Arm.
NOTE
The ramp and crowbar will also be used to workstation unpacking.
5. Remove four metal bracket fixed screws as below.
3-6
Installation
6. Fasten the jackscrew to lift the back of mainframe to remove the wood support, as above picture.
After removing the wood support, release central screw to land steering wheels on pallet, and
then remove the metal bracket.
NOTE
Lock the steering brake before release the central screw.

Dont prize the side the side metal cover of Mainframe
NOTE
3-7
7. Remove the secure screws of the metal bracket and wood support, as below picture.
8. Use wood crowbar prize the front base of C-Arm to remove the wood support as below picture.
NOTE
3-8
The wood crowbar shall prize below area (white box in below picture) as pivot and
pay attention to Mainframe base cover.
Installation
9. Hold the handles and move the C-Arm backward to draw out backwards the image intensifier
and Monoblock.
NOTE
Take care to protect the Image intensifier and grid when moving the C-Arm.
Remove the localizer frame of Image intensifier and Monoblock, before moving the C-Arm
backward.
10. Release steering brake and turn the right steering handle in a vertical position to keep the rear
wheels in a straight direction. Then carefully move the C-Arm backward along the ramp to the
site you desire. And then remove the middle limitation block bracket.
Middle limitation block bracket
11. Loosen the bolt with a screwdriver and remove the horizontal
cross-arm lock device. Loosen the horizontal movement brake

handle and push the C-Arm forward. Lock the brake handle. The
lock device is easy to be removed after powering on system and
lifting the lift column.
12. Install cable pushers shipped with system.

13. Check parts according to packing list (refer to the packing list
with the system for details).
Before moving the system, please make sure the 4 brake

handles: the C-Arm orbital rotation brake, the lateral
rotation brake, the Wigwag brake, and the horizontal
cross-arm brake are locked. Otherwise, equipment
damage or personal injury may result.
3-9
3.3.3.
Unpack Workstation
1. Cut off the binding tie and remove the packing of the workstation. Take out the ramp on standby.
And remove the wrapper on the workstation.
2. Remove all the screws on the wood support on both sides.

3. Remove the screws on both sides as below.
4. Lock the wheels to ensure the wheels to land on the wood support. For Brivo OEC 718/785: lock
all wheels of workstation. For Brivo OEC 865: lock the central control wheels.
5. Via fastening the jackscrew on both sides to lift up the workstation enough to remove the wood
support from pallet on both sides.
NOTE
For Brivo 865 let central control wheels first land on pallet.
6. Remove the metal support bracket for Workstation, by removing the fixed screws.
3-10
Installation
7. Put the ramp in position. Release all bracket and move the workstation along the ramp off the
pallet.
3-11
3.4. System Inspection

3.4.1.
Label Inspection
After the system installation, check and verify that all labels in section 1.2.10 should be in position.
NOTE
3-12
Labels below should be in local language according to the regulation requirement.
Installation
3-13
3.4.2.
External Inspection
1. Cabling and Connector inspection

Check the interconnect cable for damage or other problems. Verify that connector on cable mates well
with the connector on C-Arm and that there are no bent or missing pins. Make sure the strain relief
attaches securely to both the interconnect cable and connector.
Anti-Static Drag Wires
Check the systems antistatic drag wires. There is one suspended below the Workstation
and the other one underneath the C-Arm. Both wires must be securely attached to the
system and not be encumbered by debris.
Interconnect Cable and

Connector
Check Workstations Interconnect Cable for damage or other problems. Verify that Lemo
Connector on cable mates well with the connector on C-Arm, and that there are no bent
or missing pins.
AC Power Cord and

Plug
Verify that the AC power cord and plug supplied with the system is the correct one for
customer facility.
2. C-Arm Inspection
Inspect each C-Arm component listed under the heading C-Arm Inspection. Select one check box for
each item in the list. The choices are:
No problem Found
Loose or missing parts
Broken or damaged parts
Chipped or scratched paint
The items to inspect are grouped according to the larger visible, easily accessible assemblies and/or
modular parts of the system. Each inspection of an assembly item should include its visible component
parts and sub-assemblies.
C-Arm Inspection List:
Physical Location
Image Intensifier
C-Arm
X-ray Monoblock
Control Panel
Handles
Cabinet
Wheels
3-14
No problem
found
Loose or Missing
parts
Broken or
Damaged Parts
Chipped or
Scratched paint
Installation
3. Workstation Inspection
Inspect each workstation component listed under the heading workstation inspection. Select one check
box for each item in the list.
WorkStation Inspection list:
Physical Location
No problem
found
Loose or missing
parts
Broken or
damaged parts
Chipped or
scratched paint
Monitor and Arm

Keyboard
Mouse
Covers
Frame
Handles
Wheels
3.4.3.
Internal Inspection
Observe electrostatic discharge safety procedures.
NOTE
WARNING
1.
2.
Removing any covers exposes dangerous electrical voltages on several components.

When possible, disconnect system from AC line before removing any covers. When it is
necessary to leave the power applied, use extreme care to avoid death or injury from
electrical shock.
Remove workstation cover. Inspect the internal labels (refer to chapter 1.2.11) and parts. Check if
there are loose parts.
Remove the C-Arms covers. Check all cables and PCBs inside C-Arm. Look for loose PCBs and
connectors and reset.
3-15
3.5. System Setup

3.5.1.
Power Supply Adaption
If your power supply is 100V/110V/115V/120V/127V/200V/220V/230V/240V, please follow steps below to

change power supply. Otherwise, go to section3.5.2.
1. Make sure that workstation rear cover was removed.
2. Check the breaker, power cable and plug are proper and relative to the power supply voltage.
3. Input voltage option plug. The short terminator is used for setting input voltage. Upper option plug is
for 110V (100V/110V/115V/120V/127V/), under the 110V plug is the 220V plug (200V/220V
/230V/240V):
110V Jumper
220V Jumper
4. Change the bridge connectors of the transformer if need.
AC 100/110/115/120/127V
AC 200/220/230/240V
3-16
Installation
The system can adapt power supply of AC100V, AC110V, AC115V, AC120V, AC127V,
AC200V, AC220V, AC230V and AC240V by different connections of the transformer.
Before install the system, please check the power supply voltage range and the
transformer connection according to the diagram below.
NOTE
Wire
Voltage
Transformer taps
240 V
230 V
220 V
200V
Wire N (Brown)
Wire L1 (Blue)
Wire N1 (Black)
Wire L (Red)
10-11
10-11
10-11
10-11
9-10
11-12
9-10
11-12
9-10
11-12
Jumper
3.5.2.
120V/127V 110V/115V
100V
UPS Setup
UPS is assembled in back of workstation. Considering safety of shipping, battery is not connected with
power supply.
Follow these steps to setup the UPS.
1. Open the Power Distribution package.
2. Release screws to fixe UPS. Then take out UPS.
3-17
3. Lay UPS on side as below picture and remove the battery cover (battery cover is under UPS).
4. Pull out the battery of UPS and plug the power supply cable into the power pin of UPS box.
5. Push back battery and install the UPS cover.

6. Reassemble UPS.
NOTE
WARNING
3-18
The UPS receives AC power whenever the system power switch is on. The battery
recharges if necessary. If the AC main power fails, the UPS supplies power to computer
using its internal battery. The PDU will sounds bi-bi-bi-bi.
Do not connect any other devices to the UPS receptacles. UPS battery should be
disconnected before transportation. Battery can be left in the UPS.
Installation
3.5.3.
System Power On
CAUTION
When you place a recently unpacked system into use, allow it to stand in its new
environment long enough for any condensed moisture to evaporate. A decrease in
temperature or a humidity increase can cause water vapor in the air to condense,
sometimes on electric circuits. You may damage the equipment if you apply power
before this condensation dries.
1. Take out footswitch from the accessory package. Connect the footswitch to C-Arm.
2. Connect the interconnect cable to C-Arm.
3. Plug the power cord into appropriate AC receptacle. Turn on the circuit breaker on the back of
Workstation, and then press the power on/off key in front of Workstation.
WARNING
Before power on the system, please check and make sure that the voltage of the system
is compatible with the power supply. Or you must change the power supply settings of
the system.
Refer to Section 3.5.1 for details.
4. Verify that the workstation and C-Arm complete software boot and initialization with no errors
reported on their displays.
The auto fluoroscopy mode is selected and the power on indicator lights. The field size is in
Normal mode.
The left monitor of workstation will display GE logo screen. The right monitor will enter into the
User login Screen automatically.
5. Press vertical lift button and verify that vertical lift column is operational.
3-19
3.5.4.
System Configuration in Admin Interface
Setup in Admin Interface by Service Authority

1. Hold down Ctrl +Shift+Alt and keys at same time to invoke Admin Interface. Select Service
as User, and then input password to Login Service Tool Interface.
2. Input the system ID of the system. Refer to section 5.2.1.
3. Activate Product Mode configuration and software option feature by inputting eLicense key, refer
to section 5.2.2.
NOTE
Before activate Product Mode configuration by inputting eLicense key, an error message
will be prompted as below:
4. Check Fluoro Alarm Control through exposure management screen. Refer to section 5.2.4.
5. Check the exposure option and dose group by country through Exposure Management screen.
Refer to section 5.2.4.
CAUTION
The configuration must be complete in case the local regulation is not complied.
6. Click Shutdown button to shut down the system.
3-20
Installation
Setup in User Setup interface

1. Press the Setup
key on the
Workstation membrane keyboard or
select the Setup button on the
system panel in software interface to
access setup features.
2. Select Date Time & Region button to

setup:
Date
Time
Time Zone
Language
Date Format
Time Format
Number Format
Weight Unit
High Unit
3-21
3. Select C-Arm System button to

setup:
3-22
Hospital Name
Retain Last Exam Change or Boot
up
Screen Saver
Auto Save at End of Exposure
Auto swap
Room interface
Exposure Sound
Dose Warning Threshold.
Installation
3.5.5.
NOTE
NOTE
DICOM Setup and Check

You can choose the verification items from DICOM Worklist server, storage server and
printer server, according to the customers network situation and equipment.
Feature for DICOM, available DICOM features are displayed in Product config/Software
Option List, in this section just setup and check the option purchased by customer:
OptionBasicDicom (Contains: DicomWorklist/DicomStorage&Commitment/DicomPrint)
OptionDicomQ&R, OptionDicomMpps.
1. Plug the network cable into the

network connector socket on the
back of Workstation.
2. Press Setup
key in
application interface to invoke
the setup interface.
3. Network & DICOM setup:
Click Network & DICOM Tab to:
Input Local AE Title:
The default AE Title is Brivo

OEC. You can change it
according to the DICOM services
requirement.
Input Station Name
Configure system IP:
Click Configbutton and fill in

the network information.
Refer to 3.7.10 to perform

Wireless network setup and
verify.
Verify Network Connection:
Input Target IP then click Ping

can verify if the Network
configuration is successful or
not.
Configure screen of Local Network
3-23
4. DICOM Printers setup and check

DICOM Printers setup:
Click DICOM printers Tab on

setup screen.
Click Add button into Add

interface. Fill in the information
of the DICOM printers.
Click Edit button into Edit

interface, edit the information of
the existing DICOM printers.
In Add and Edit interface, click

Verify button. The message
The DICOM server has verified
successfully. will display if the
server has been connected.
Click OK button and then
select the Exit button to close
DICOM printer interface.
Use Delete button to delete

existing DICOM printer.
Add and edit interface of DICOM printers
3-24
Installation
DICOM printers function Check:
Press Image Directory

key on the workstation
keyboard.
Select DICOM printer server

from the Print screen. Click the
preview image and then click
the queue box. Click Print
button. Verify that the images
can be printed successfully after
the process complete.
5. Worklist Server setup and check

Worklist setup:
Select Worklist Tab in setup

interface.
Click Add button and fill in

the information of the DICOM
Worklist server.
Click Edit button, edit the

information of the existing
DICOM Worklist server.
In Add and Edit interface,

click Verify button to verify the
connection of Worklist server.
The message The DICOM server
has verified successfully. will
display if the server has
connected. Click OK button,
and then select the Exit button
to close the DICOM Worklist
screen.

existing Worklist server.
Add and edit screen of Worklist
3-25
Worklist Check:
Click Press
key to enter
Exam Management screen.
Click Schedule button to

enter Schedule Exam screen.
In Schedule Exam screen, check

the radio button of Worklist
Server and select target Server,
click Quick Query button then
patient list in Worklist server will
be displayed if all configurations
and parameters are correct.
6. Storage & Commitment Servers

Setup and Check
Storage & Commitment Servers
setup:
Click Storage & Commitment

Servers in setup screen.
Click Add button into add

screen. Fill in the information of
the DICOM storage and
commitment server.
Click Edit button into edit

screen. Edit the information of
the existing DICOM storage and
commitment server.
In add and edit screen, click

server has connected. Click OK
button and then select the Exit
button to close the DICOM
Storage server list screen.

existing DICOM Storage and
commitment server.
3-26
Installation
Add and edit screen of Storage & Commitment Servers
Storage & Commitment Servers

Function Check:
Press Image Directory

button.
Select DCIOM Storage Tab.
Click Export Tab.
In Store to pull down menu,

select available Select the
DICOM storage device.
Select one or more preview

images you want to archive.
Press and hold CTRL key on the

keyboard to select multiple
images from the previews in the
directory. Click send button.
Verify that the images are

copied to the storage server
successfully after the copy
progress complete.
All images successfully sent to

DICOM storage server will be
marked as S, if the Enable
storage commitment check
3-27
box is checked.
7. Query & Retrieve Setup and
Check
Query & Retrieve setup:
Click Query & Retrieve Tab on

setup screen
In local settings, setup local

transport parameters:
Local Listening Port

Time Out
Days to Cache Retrieved
Images

of the server of Query &
Retrieve.

the server of Query & Retrieve.

button to close Add or Edit
interface.
3-28
Add and Edit Interface of Query & Retrieve
Installation
Query & Retrieve function check:
Press
key to enter Query
& Retrieve screen.
Select target Server and input

filter option for Query, then click
Query button. The target patient
data will be displayed in Query
Results.
Select target patient data in

Query Results, then click
Retrieve button. The target
patient data will be displayed in
Retrieved Results.
8. MPPS Servers setup and check:

MPPS Servers setup:
Click MPPS Servers Tab on

setup screen:

of the server of MPPS Servers.

the server of MPPS Servers.

button to close Add or Edit
interface.

existing MPPS Servers.
Add and Edit Interface of MPPS Servers
3-29
MPPS function check:

New an exam, take exposure
and save several images.
In Image Directory :
Exam Status: In progressing
MPPS Status: Unreport
Click Report MPPS button:

Exam Status: In progressing
MPPS Status: Report
Click Complete button:

Exam Status: Complete
MPPS Status: Unreport
Click Report MPPS button:

Exam Status: Complete
MPPS Status: Report
Then in MPPS server can get the

exam complete information.
3-30
Installation
3.5.6.
DICOM Worksheet
Record Network & DICOM information below:

Station Name:
Enter information into Network & DICOM screen.
AE Title:
Local Network:
Wireless Network:
Does this site use DHCP?

Yes
Does this site use DHCP?
No
Yes
No
IP Address:
IP Address:
Gateway:
Gateway:
Subnet Mask:
Subnet Mask:
Will the site use DICOM Printer Server?
Yes
No
If yes, record their configuration here.

Server Alias:
AE Title:
IP Address:
Time out:
Port Number
Maximum Density:
Minimum Density:
Config Info.:
Border Density:
BLACK
WHITE
Orientation:
PORTRAIT
Empty Density:
BLACK
WHITE
Film Size:
8IN10IN
10IN12IN
10IN14IN
11IN14IN
Copies:
Print Priority:
HIGH
Destination:
MAGAZINE
Medium Type:
PAPER
Layout 1:
11
12
21
22
23
33
34
44
45
54
Layout 2:
11
12
21
22
23
33
34
44
45
54
MEDIUM
LANDSCAPE
10
LOW
PROCESSOR
CLEAR FILM
BLUE FILM
3-31
Layout 3:
11
12
21
22
23
33
34
44
45
54
Layout 4:
11
12
21
22
23
33
34
44
45
54
Will the site use DICOM Worklist Server?
Yes
No
Worklist Server
Server Alias:
AE Title:
IP Address:
Time Out
Port Number:
Worklist Filter:
Exam Date
Today
Next 2 Day
Next 3 Day
From
Modality
Next 7 Day
Date Range
CR
SC
To
All
RF
XA
Enter information above in the Schedule Filter screen. The users will enter additional information on this screen.
Will the site use Storage & Commitment Servers Server?
Yes
No
Storage Server & Commitment Servers Server

Server Alias:
AE Title:
IP Address:
Time Out
Port Number:
Send RDSR on complete or Discontinue
Image:
RF
Dose Summary:
RDSR
SC
Overlay:
Never Send
Always Send If Available
XA
CR
SC
Enable storage Commitment

Use Storage Server Settings
3-32
AE Title
IP Address
Time Out
Port Number
Installation
Will the site use Query & Retrieve?
Yes
No
Query & Retrieve Server

Server Alias:
AE Title:
IP Address:
Time Out
Port Number:
Information Model
Study Root
Patient Root
Local Settings:
Local Listening Port:
Time Out:
Days to Cache Retrieved
images:
Will the site use MPPS Feature?
Yes
No
MPPS Feature Server

Server Alias:
AE Title:
IP Address:
Time Out
Port Number:
3-33
3.6. Functional Checks

3.6.1.
Workstation Checks
Mechanical Movement Check:

1. Push the workstation and verify that the wheels roll smoothly without vibration and that they are
securely attached to the wheels.
2. Verify the operation of the brakes of workstation:
For Brivo OEC 865:
The Workstation brake pedal has three positions that
control wheel movement. The pedal is located on the left
side of the Workstation. Check the pedal positions
function:
Position 1: The wheels close to the pedal roll in a straight
line, and the wheels opposite pivot freely. Place the brake
pedal this position to move the Workstation long
distances.
Position 2: Allows all the wheels to pivot freely. Place the
brake pedal in this position to easily maneuver the
Workstation during final positioning. Push the workstation
and verify that the wheels roll smoothly without vibration
and that they are securely attached to the wheels.
Position 3: Prevents Workstation from moving.
3. Check movement of the monitor arm for ease of movement without excessive play. Make sure
that the monitors do not move after being positioned.
Workstation Operation Check:

1. Verify Patient Information function activates the Patient Information screen. Enter patient
information (
), display scheduled exams, display resume exams screen.
2. Verify Image Directory function (

3. Verify the ANNOTATION function (
customer purchase the option.
4. Verify the MEASUREMENT function (
customer purchase the option.
3-34
) allows you to enter Image Directory screen.

) allows you to enter Image Annotation screen, if
) allows you to enter Image measurement screen, if
Installation
5. Verify the DICOM Q/R function (

the option.
) allows you to enter Q/R screen, if customer purchase
6. Verify the SETUP function (

) allows access to the Setup screen. Press Security button
and select Require Users to Login in the screen.
7. Verify the Logout function (
), Pressing the Alt key and Logout key at the same time
allows the user to lock up the system.
8. Verify the CONTRAST function (

can be increased and decreased.
) displays an indicator bar and that the amount of contrast
9. Verify the BRIGHTNESS function (

can be increased and decreased.
) displays an indicator bar and that amount of brightness
10. Verify that Auto Brightness/Contrast (

contrast and brightness.
) automatically selects the optimum values of
11. Verify EDGE ENHANCE function (

) displays an indicator bar and that amount of
enhancement level increased and decreased.
12. Verify Recursive Factor (

) key can provides image noise reduction. Higher levels of recursive
filtering produce smoother (or less noisy) image, but cause more lag when imaging moving
objects or anatomy.
13. Verify NEGATE (

left monitor.
) function reverses the light and dark values on the image displayed on the
14. Verify Image Rotation function (

) , press the key rotate the image counterclockwise or press the right portion of the key to rotate the image clockwise.
3-35
15. Verify ZOOM function (

magnify the ROI.
) displays a square region of interest (ROI) box and that you can
16. Verify SAVE function (

), press the SAVE key. And then press
monitor image is previewed in the Image Directory screen.
key. Verify that the left
17. Verify SWAP (

) function, press SWAP key and verify this function exchanges images
between the left monitor and the right monitor.
18. Verify BLANK (

) function, press the Blank key to blank the screen quickly if the screens
are displaying information which will not be seen by someone else. Press any key on the
membrane keyboard to re-display the screens images
19. Press
key on keyboard. Enter Security screen. Select Require Users to Login to enable
the logout function. Click Change Password if you need to change password. Then Click OK
button.
20. Press Logout key (
applications.
NOTE
3-36
) at the same time. Verify that it can log the user out of the workstation
The logout function can only be available when you select Require Users to Login in
the Security screen of setup interface.
Installation
CD/DVD check:
CD/DVD is an option. This procedure is just performed on the system with this option.
NOTE
1. Place a blank CD or DVD in the in the CD/DVD drive and wait for the green LED on the front of the
drive to turn off.
2. Press the Image Directory key (
) on the keyboard to open the Image Directory. Make sure
the Image Directory has some saved images. Otherwise, then save some images by taking test
shots.
3. Select the Export button on the Image Directory screen. The Export screen lists the available
print and storage devices. Select CD/DVD and click the OK button to confirm your selection.
4. Click Option button. Select Include Viewer in copy option and click OK button.
5. Select one or more images from the Image Directory.
6. Click Export button on the Image Directory screen to copy the queued image.
7. Insert the CD/DVD to other computer. The media viewer will run automatically. Use the viewer to
confirm that the image was written to the CD/DVD successfully.
3.6.2.
C-Arm Checks
Mechanical Movement Check:

Perform the following mechanical inspections and checks.
Wigwag Movement Check:
1. Release the Wigwag brake.
2. Move the mechanics through the entire operational range. Verify Wigwag for ease of movement
without excessive play.
3. Verify that locking the Wigwag brake prevents Wigwag motion.
Horizontal Movement Check:
1. Unlock Horizontal brake and fully extend and retract the Horizontal Cross-Arm.
2. Verify that the Cross-Arm moves smoothly and quietly through the bearing block without
excessive play.
3. Place the Cross-arm brake in the lock position.
4. Verify that the cross-arm does not move.
CAUTION
Make sure cross arm is fully retracted and brake is set before moving C-Arm. Equipment
damage or personal injury may otherwise result.
3-37
C-Arm Orbital Rotation Check:

CAUTION
When you release the orbital movement brake, place your other hand on the C-Arm so
that you have control of the C-Arms movement.
1. Release the orbital brake.

2. Verify that C-Arm orbits smoothly in its cradle without excessive play.
3. Verify that the entire orbital scale is readable and in good condition.
4. Set the brake handle to lock position and verify that C-Arm locks firmly in position.
Lateral Rotation Check:
1. Release lateral rotation brake.
2. Verify C-Arm rotates smoothly in both directions.
3. Lock the brake and verify the brake locks C-Arm firmly in position.
WARNING
Before transporting the system, please make sure the 4 brake handles: the C-Arm
orbital rotation brake, the lateral rotation brake, the Wigwag brake, and the horizontal
cross-arm brake are locked. Otherwise, equipment damage or personal injury may
result.
Vertical Column Check:

1. Power on the system. Set the keyswitch in ON position (
). Press and hold the up vertical
column
key. The maximum distance is about 40cm. Verify that vertical column stops when it
reaches the limit and that operation is smooth and quiet.
2. Press and hold down vertical column switch. When the movement stops, press two keys
at the same time and C-Arm will be lowered to the lowest position.
Wheels
1. Push C-Arm slowly and verify that the wheels contact the floor and that they roll freely.
2. Make sure there are no worn or damaged areas on the wheel tread.
3. Verify that there is no wobble or binding associated with wheels.
Brakes Check:
1. Step on the rear wheel pedal brake. Verify that the rear wheels lock.
2. Step on wheel pedal release brake. Verify that brakes release and that both rear wheels roll and
steer freely.
Steering Check:
1. Verify that both rear casters respond appropriately to movement of the steering handle.
2. Verify that you can steer the rear casters 90 degrees to the left and 90 degrees to the right.
3. Verify that the casters track together when you steer them.
3-38
Installation
4. Place the mobile C-Arms rear wheel brake in release position. Push the C-Arm slowly and verify
that C-Arm can turn smoothly.
C-Arm Controls Check:

The following procedure produces X-rays. Use the appropriate personal protective
equipment to protect yourself from X-ray exposure.
WARNING
Image Orientation
Using the line pair tool as a phantom, take exposure in normal Fluoro mode and verify the following
functions:
Image Rotation key
Image Reverse key
rotates the image clockwise and counter-clockwise.

inverts and reinverts the image.
Field size
Place something on the Image Intensifier. Press field size key
select any of the three available sizes: NORM, MAG1 and MAG2.
repeatedly, verifying ability to
Collimator
Press each of the following collimator switches while taking exposure and verify each of the
following collimator actions.
Shutter Collimator rotate.
Iris Collimator opens and closes.
Shutter Collimator open and close.
3-39
kVp
, mA/mAs
Press the kVp and mA/mAs keys and verify that the technique can be adjusted manually. And
LED will illuminate indicating Auto.
Pulse Fluoroscopy
Select Pulsed normal Fluoro mode via the C-Arm control panel. The X-Ray Exposure indicator keeps
lighting when taking an exposure.
NOTE
If the pulse mode is enabled, the amount of accumulated time will be the actual exposure
time, which depends on the time of pressing X-ray switch, length of pulses and the
number of pulses per second.
1pulse count to
1pps : 50 milliseconds / 1 pulse approximately
Fluoro time, kVp, mA/mAs Display
Clearly Display Fluoro time, kVp and mA/mAs values.

Alarm Reset
Press and hold Alarm Reset key
for approximately 2 seconds. Verify Fluoro time displayed on
the C-Arm control panel resets to zero.
X-ray Emission Indicator
In the working mode, when the footswitch/handswitch is activated to take an exposure,
indictor will light.
the
X-Ray off Indicator
Key switch is placed in X-ray off position (

this indictor will light.
3-40
) or standby position (
), X-ray is disabled and
Installation
Radiographic Mode
Select Radiography mode key
and verify that the indicator lights.
Low Dose
Select the Low Dose key
and verify that the indicator lights.
Manual HLF
Select manual HLF mode. Take exposure and verify that a HLF exposure is taken. Verify that audible
tone beeps at normal rate.
Auto HLF and Digital Spot
This key is only effective in some countries. In the other countries, invalid key sound will be given
when pressing this key. High Level Fluoro and Digital Spot can be switched in Mode Setup
which is in system panel of software interface. High Level Fluoro Mode, Digital Spot Mode could be
enabled by pressing the right footswitch or handswitch.
The LED lights can reflect whether the Auto HLF or Digital Spot feature is available. Press this key
again to disable the High Level Fluoro Mode& Digital Spot Mode. Make sure the LED lights before
pressing the right footswitch or handswitch to make exposure.
Recursive Factor
Press recursive factor key

to select 2, 4, 8, 16 respectively to take an exposure. Verify the
amount of filtering can be increased and decreased. The noise in the image should be decreased as
the Recursive Factor is increased.
Auto/Manual Brightness/Contrast
Press the Auto/Manual Brightness/Contrast key to adjust the brightness and contrast level display.
The current contrast or brightness level is shown in a numeric value displayed on the bottom right
corner of the image.
3-41
Auto/Manual Smart Metal
Press the Auto/Manual Smart Metal key
to reduce the appearance of metal in the image. It
could provide optimum image quality even when metal is introduced to the field.
the Save key to save the left monitor image on the system disk.
Save. Press
Swap
Press the Swap key to exchange images between the left and right monitors.
Mode Switch
The Mode Switch button is not available for this system. Invalid key sound will be given when
pressing this key.
C-Arm key/X-ray switch test

Perform the following test to verify that the systems X-ray and key switches are operating satisfactorily.
WARNING
The following procedure produces X-rays. Use the appropriate personal protective
equipment to protect yourself from X-ray exposure.
Footswitch socket
Key switch
Interconnect cable socket
1. Place the X-ray Keyswitch in STANDBY position (

). Press Handswitch and verify that no X-rays
are generated. Press Vertical lift button and verify that vertical lift column is not operational.
3-42
Installation
2. Place X-ray Keyswitch in XRAYOFF position (

). Press Handswitch and verify that no X-rays
are generated. Press vertical lift button and verify the vertical lift column is operational.
3. Place X-ray Keyswitch in ON position (
). Press Handswitch, footswitch and vertical lift button
to verify X-ray and vertical lift column are enable.
Emergency Switch
Perform the following test to verify the emergency switch.
1. Press the emergency switch during raising C-Arm.
Emergency Switch
2. Verify that vertical column operation and exposure are disabled.

3. Release the emergency switch. Verify that the vertical column operation and exposure are
available.
3.6.3.
Auto Technique Tracking
Select Auto Fluoroscopy mode (

), and the NORM field size to take an exposure. Put the copper
filter on the Monoblock head. Verify that the kVp changes accurately as copper filters are inserted into
the field in the following ranges:
Copper mm
kVp range
Model
1mm
2mm
3mm
Brivo OEC 715/785
644kVp
744kVp
824kVp
Brivo OEC 865
624kVp
724kVp
804kVp
If the kVp is not in the range, refer to 4.6.7 for calibration.
3-43
3.6.4.
Image Resolution
Place spatial resolution tool in the front of the image intensifier. The angle between the horizontal axis of
the image and the resolution tool must be 45. Select appropriate kV value. Take an exposure and stop
once image is stable. The image is frozen on the left monitor. Verify the resolution in Lp/mm is equal to,
or greater than, the values listed below. Repeat and select any of three field sizes (NORM, MAG1 and
MAG2) to verify the resolution.
Model
MAG NORM
MAG1
MAG2
Brivo OEC 715/785
2.0
2.6
3.1
Brivo OEC 865
2.2
3.0
3.5
Field Size
Resolution (Lp/mm)
If the resolution check fails, refer to section 4.6.8 for Camera Focus calibration.
3.6.5.
Dose Limitation Check
Normal Fluoro Dose rate check

1. Operate C-Arm to make the generator being top and the image intensifier being bottom.
2. Position the detector of dosimeter at the center of the X-ray beam 30cm above the grid of image
intensifier. Cover the image intensifier with lead plate thicker than 3mm.
3. Set KVp as 110kVp, increase mA to maximum in manual mode. Measure the dose rate while
making exposure. Limits vary by the dose group, which was configured in software configuration
section by country.
4. Refer to below table verify the corresponding Dose group according to countrys Dose group
requirement (refer to 5.2.4).
Continuous Fluoro:
44 mGy/min (Dose group: Normal 50 and HLF 50)

HLF Dose rate check:

1. Position the dosimeter in the center of the X-ray beam 30cm above the grid. Cover the image
intensifier with lead thicker than 3mm for protection of the image intensifier.
2. Set kVp as 110kVp, increase mA to maximum in manual mode. Measure the dose rate while
making exposure. Limits vary by the dose group, which was selected in software configuration
section by country.
Continuous Fluoro:
Low dose Fluoro Dose rate check:
3-44

Installation
1. Position the detector of dosimeter at the center of the X-ray beam 30cm above the grid of image
intensifier. Cover the image intensifier with lead plate thicker than 3mm.
section by country.
Continuous Fluoro

Low dose HLF Dose rate check:

1. Position the dosimeter in the center of the X-ray beam 30cm above the grid. Cover the image
intensifier with lead thicker than 3mm for protection of the image intensifier.
section by country.
Continuous Fluoro
3.6.6.

Beam Alignment Check
Refer to chapter 4.6 performance Beam Alignment Check.

NOTE
German regulatory required that the collimator has to be visible on

two sides of the image, which are not opposite. For the system
installed in German, adjust collimator iris until the collimator meet
the requirement as below.
Australia regulatory required that the beam limiting device must
automatically limit the primary beam to X-ray image receptor area
(within 1% SID), which it must set to the selected field of the I.I. or image receptor in the
fluoroscopic mode. For the system installed in Australia, adjust collimator iris until the
collimator 8 leaves can be seen in the image.
3.6.7.
DAP Accuracy Check
Refer to chapter 4.7 to do DAP accuracy check.
3.6.8.
System Status Backup
Refer chapter 5, export system setup and administration configuration, if needed.
3-45
3.6.9.
NOTE
Fill in the product locator card

After the installation, please fill in the product locator card for PLC parts below and mail
the cards to local service operation office.
Item
Part Number
Part Description
Comments
5085004
GENERATOR, MONOBLOCK
5417680
ASM, COLLIMATOR
5075001
FRU, 9 Image Intensifier for 715,785
5075008
FRU, 9" Image Intensifier for 865
5000715
Asm, Brivo OEC 715
For Brivo OEC 715
5000785
Asm, Brivo OEC 785
For Brivo OEC 785
5000865
Asm, Brivo OEC 865
For Brivo OEC 865
3.7. Options Installation

3.7.1.
CD/DVD Burner Installation
1. Power off system.

2. Remove Worstation back, low side and front
covers.
SATA & SIB power

interface board
3. Open the computer cover and install the SATA

& SIB power interface board.
4. Connect the DVD SATA cable to anyone of SATA
data solts 2/3/4 of computer motherboard.
5. Remove 4 screws, secure the CD/DVD slot.
6. Insert CD/DVD into CD/DVD slot and connect the CD/DVD data cable and power cable to CD/DVD.
7. Secure CD/DVD by 4 screws which are fixed CD/DVD slot sheld before.
3-46
Installation
8. Fasten 2 secure screws of SATA data cabel on SATA & SIB power interface board.
9. According CD/DVD check procedure check CD/DVD function (Refer to CD/DVD check of 3.6.1
Workstation Check) and reinstall workstation covers.
10. Reinstall the computer cover and Workstation covers.
3-47
3.7.2.
Laser Aimer
Laser Aimer on Monoblock

1. Past multi language label and laser warning
label.
2. Laser Aimer, which attaches to Monoblock, is

incorporated with the collimator cover. Remove
the standard collimator top cover. Position the
collimator cover with laser aimer and plug the
power cable with laser label on connector.
Tighten the secure screws of the collimator
cover. Remove the laser aimer cover. Power on
the system.
Power Button
3. Install the BAFT to Image Intensifier and adjust BAFT center to image center.
4. Press the laser aimers green ON switch to generate the laser beam.
5. Loose the set screw a little inside so that you
can adjust the beam by the adjuster.
Set Screw
Circle adjuster
6. Adjust the adjusters of the laser until the intersection of the laser beam is in the center circle of
the beam alignment tool. (Use the circle to adjust the line to be vertical with the other and the
screws to adjust the position of the line.)
3-48
Installation
7. Fasten the set screw a little. And the beam position

will change a little. Then adjust the beam again
according to step5. Fasten the set screw to fix the
beam position and direction. Then install the laser
aimer cover.
8. Functional check: Turn on the laser aimer power

switch and verify that the intersection of the laser
beam is in the center circle of the beam alignment
tool and the two laser lines are vertical.
Laser Aimer on Image Intensifier

Perform the following procedure to install and operate the laser aimer on the Image Intensifier. The CArm can be placed in any orientation that is convenient for attaching the laser aimer. There are no
alignment marks or notches on the laser aimer that need to match any points on the image intensifier.
CAUTION
When the laser aimer is attached to the C-Arm, releasing the orbital or rotational brake
could cause the C-Arm to move. Make sure to hold the C-Arm to control its movement
whenever a brake is released.
1. Place the laser aimers attachment handle in the open position.

2. Move the laser aimer flush with the Image Intensifier, but slightly off center.
3. Center the laser aimer with the relation to the Image Intensifier. As you center the laser aimer, the
attachment hooks catch on the edge of the image intensifier.
4. Turn the attachment handle inward until the handle is completely
closed and the laser aimer is securely attached to the image
intensifier. Insert the metal bolt to the hole of the handle to lock.
3-49
CAUTION
Do not grasp the Laser Aimer's handle to position the C-Arm or to move the system.
Pulling the handle may cause the Laser Aimer to release from the image intensifier and
fall.
5. Use the image intensifier handle to position the C-Arm or to move the system to the desired location.
6. After attaching the laser aimer, place the C-Arm in the position it will be used during the procedure.
7. Turn the laser aimer ON and adjust the beam alignment
knobs until the laser beam is centered on the intersection of
the cross-hair on the Monoblock cover.
CAUTION
If the laser is ON, do not look directly into the laser aimers aperture.
8. Functional check: Using fluoroscopy, verify that the cross-hair in the fluoro image, at the center of the
area of interest.
NOTE
The location where the laser beam marks the patient corresponds to the center of the
area of interest, indicated by the cross-hair in the fluoro image.
Perform procedure below to remove the laser cover from the laser aimer:
1. Switch OFF the power to the laser aimer.
2. Grasp the two knobs on the laser cover.
3. Press down and rotate the cover (approximately 10 degrees counterclockwise) until the knobs align
with the notches on the housing.
4. Lift off the cover and resume laser aimer operation.
3-50
Installation
3.7.3.
Video distributor
Perform the following procedures to install the video distributor.

1.
Power off the system. Remove the rear and low side
covers of the workstation.
2.
Pull out the cabinet of workstation and remove the

cosmetic cover for distributor.
3.
Connect video cable (PN: 5085777) to video distributor

output 4. Connect power cable (PN: 5085717) and
route power cable to the bottom of Workstation.
4.
Connect video cable (PN: 5085777) to left monitor

video cable.
5.
Put the video distributor on the backboard. Fasten the 4 secure screws to fix video distributor.
6.
Connect the wires to the terminal blocks at the bottom of the workstation (connect the L line to
connector 23 or 24, N line to 25, or 26 and the ground line to earth). Put the power supply cable
along the wiring harness to get a good layout.
Video cable
(PN: 5085777)
3-51
7.
Plug the video cable of video distributor to the computers video connector DVI, which was
connected with the left monitors cable before.
8.
Functional check: Power on the system. Check that the

left monitor will display GE logo screen. Disconnect and
pull out the left monitor video cable then connect to
OUTPUT1 and OUTPUT2 respectively. Verify that the left
monitor will display GE logo screen in each case.
9.
Reconnect the video cable of left monitor and install the cabinet and other covers of
workstation.
10. Only 2 DVI output connectors are available for customer to use.
11. Customer can connect the external monitor to OUTPUT1 or OUTPUT2 of video distributor.
12. When not use the external monitor, install the cover DVI port protector shipped with distributor.
3.7.4.
Printers
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 offers below printers as option.
UP-990AD Thermal Printer
UP-D897 Thermal Printer
Please follow below steps to install the printers.

1.
2.
3-52
Power off the system. Open the rear cover of the

workstation.
Plug one end of the USB cable to the video port of the
printer. Plug the power supply cable into the socket on
the printer. Put the cables through the hole of the
workstation. Put the printer in the cabinet.
Installation
3.
4.
Plug the USB cable into the USB port on computer.

Cut off the other end of the power supply cable. Strip off 3 wire ends.
5.
Connect the wires to the terminal blocks at the bottom of the workstation (connect the L line (brown)
to connector 17 or 18 or 19, N line (blue) to 20 or 21 or 22 and the ground line (yellow and green) to
earth port. Put the power supply cable along the wiring harness to get a good layout.
6.
Functional check: Power on the system. Set the switch at back of printer to digital mode. Turn on the
printer. Verify that an image can be printed to the printer and the printer works with both paper and
film.
CAUTION
The Video Printer is not fixed in the cabinet. Please pay attention when moving the
WorkStation.
3-53
The power and video signal of the View Printer is provided by EVR system. Please do not
connect the power supply and video to other printer. Please do not connect other
external power supply and video signal to this printer. Otherwise, it may cause electrical
shock to user.
WARNING
3.7.5.
Film cassette holder
Please follow the steps below to install and remove the cassette holder:
1. Place the cassette holder over the face of the image intensifier with the handle opened out.
2. Rotate the cassette holder handle to securely attach the cassette holder to the image intensifier.
WARNING
Verify that the cassette holder is securely attached to the image intensifier.
Unsecured cassette holders may fall, injuring patients or personnel.
3. Insert a film cassette into the cassette holder and center it.
The cassette holder uses friction to hold the cassette.
NOTE
WARNING
Verify that cassette is held securely within the cassette holder. Unsecured film cassettes
may fall, injuring patients or personnel.
4. Remove the film cassette by pushing the cassette out of the cassette holder.
5. To remove the cassette holder, open the cassette holder handle and press firmly against the side of
the cassette holder.
NOTE
3.7.6.
The cassette holder is designed to snuggle attach to the image intensifier lip when the
handle is engaged. It may be necessary to strike the cassette holder with the palm of
your hand to dislodge the cassette holder from the image intensifier.
Tube Skin Spacer
Past the multi language label on Skin Spacer.
Install the skin spacer as the following steps:
3-54
Installation
Skin Spacer
Lock of the skin spacer
Small Monoblock Cover

1. Turn skin spacer 180.
2. Insert skin spacer into collimator
top cover as right pictrue.
3. Then clockwise turn the skin
spacer to lock it onto collimator
top cover.
3.7.7.
Dual pedal footswitch with save button
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product provides a two-pedal footswitch as an option.
Plug the cable of two-pedal footswitch to the socket on the right side of the C-Arm interface panel. Verify
that the connector locks in place.
3-55
Functional check: Power on the system. Press the left switch to start Fluoroscopy in the mode selected.
Press right switch to start High Level Fluoroscopy. Press image save Button can save an image displayed
on the left monitor.
3.7.8.
Removal Filter and Sensor Installation
Install the sensor

1. Remove the collimator cover.
2. Assemble each sersor into collimator cover by two secure screws and route the cable.
NOTE
Pay attention to the direction of sensor, wrong sensor direction will lead to sensor cant
detecte filter.
3. Connect the connetctor of sensor to J10/J11 which are from bundle cable .
4. Install the collimator cover.
Removal Filter
Sensor
5. Past the multi language label on the filter.
6. Install the filter. Have the filter locked by the bolt of

collimator top cover, by turn the filter clockwise.
3-56
Installation
7. In Product Config. interface (in software service tool) , check the check box of filter. Detailed refer to
5.2.2.
8. Reboot system and Login software service tool interface calibraiton Tab, the DAP calibration with
filter button will be activated and perform DAP calibraiton with filter refer to 4.7.2.
NOTE
3.7.9.
If the DAP calibration with filter button is not activated. Rechck the connection of all cable
and connector.
Removable Grid
Structure of Remove Grid

Past the multi language label on Removable
Grid Support.
Removable Grid Support
45
Carbon Protection Board
60
3-57
Grid for Brivo OEC865
Grid for Brivo OEC 715, Brivo OEC 785

White dot is the direction mark for Grid.
The connected line of direction mark is
in45with C-Arm, in Brivo OEC715/785.
White dot is the direction mark for Grid.

The connected line of direction mark is 60
degree with C-Arm, in Brivo OEC 865.
Assembly and install removal grid

1.
Remove the Grid by releasing the 6 screws from image

intensifier.
2.
Install the Carbon Protection Board into image intensifier.
3.
Install Removal Grid Holder on image intensifier.

NOTE
4.
Ensure the localizer bolt of Removal Grid

Holder in the slot of image intensifier.
Install Grid on removal grid hold and ensure the direction of grid as below picture.
For Brivo OEC 715/785
For Brivo OEC865
60
45
5.
The Removal Grid is ready for use.
3.7.10. Wireless DICOM

Wireless DICOM option kit includes 9 main parts:
1. WiFi adapter
2. Ethernet card
3. Power supply cable for WiFi adapter
4. WiFi adapter Power switch
5. Power switch cable
6. Ethernet cable
7. Treadle bars
8. Secure screws
9. Ethernet card pusher
3-58
Installation
Follow the steps below to install and configure Wi-Fi Internet Adapter kit.
1.
2.
3.
Remove Workstation top/back/side/front covers.

Install WiFi adapter by 2 treadle bars in up/right picture with 4 screws and connect Ethernet cable as shown in
the below picture.
Open Workstation computer cover and install the Ethernet card, and card pusher.
Treadle bars
Card pusher
4.
5.
6.
Ethernet card
Release the 4 secure screws of Workstation cabinet, release the cables connect System Interface Board and
pull out the cabinet.
Route and connect WiFi power supply cable to WiFi adapter and J5 (on System Interface Board in Workstation
cabinet)
Route and connect power switch cable to power switch and J8 (on System Interface Board in Workstation
cabinet).
3-59
System Interface Board

J5
J8
Power switch
for WiFi adapter
7.
Remove the WiFi power switch baffle and install the WiFi adapter power switch in Workstation cabinet back
plate. Connect the power switch cable to power switch in any Brown/Blue sequence.
Wireless power switch baffle

8.
9.
10.
11.
Reconnect cables of system interface board. Pull back Workstation cabinet and fasten the secure screws.
Get an extra laptop/computer and disconnect all wireless/wire connections in extra laptop/computer.
Connect Ethernet cable between WiFi adapter and extra laptop/computer.
Set extra laptop/computers Ethernet port to Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP mode).
12. Power on the system, and then power on the WiFi adapter.
13. Open Internet browser in extra laptop/computer and input http://www.mywifiext.net/welcome.htm.
3-60
Installation
14. On the setup page in the current browser select the preferred language and country/region for the system.
Follow below screen shots as reference.

16. Unplug Ethernet cable from laptop/computer.
17. Route Ethernet cable in Workstation and plug Ethernet cable into Ethernet card.
3-61
18. Re-install all covers removed in step 1.

19. Affix the WiFi label and FCC label on the Workstation cabinet as shown below:
WiFi Label
FCC Label
20. Reinstall Workstation application SOFTWARE.

21. Power on system, log in and click
button.
22. In Network & DICOM Tab, click Configure The Smart Wizard will detect available wireless networks, and
display the wireless list .
3-62
Installation
23. Select the corresponding router, click Continue button and input password. Click Continue button to
complete the Wireless setting. IP will be assigned automatically.
NOTE
The Wireless adapter will take several minutes to boot up. The wireless setting can only be
configured after the adapter is booted up completely.
Power indicator in orange means adapter is booting up.
Power indicator in green means adapter has booted up completely, and can be configured.
Booting
Booted up
FCC ID is recorded on the label located on the underside of the Wi-Fi internet adapter.
3-63
3.7.11. Mono LCD monitor installation

Refer to Chapter 7 to install the Mono monitor.
3.7.12. Software Option Installation

Refer to Chapter 5 to install software option function. It can be implemented in 3.5.4 System
Configuration together with product model configuration.
3.7.13. Room Interface (RIF)

Room Interface (RIF) is an interface interactive with operation room or some peripheral equipment. The
lamps in operation rooms such as Room In Use indicator or X-Ray On indicator can be connected to
system to warn user, injector can be controlled by room interface if necessary, also the exposure can be
restrained of door status in case of excessive radiation to user, all functions in RIF are not mandatory
when operating.
System provides a HDB15 connector as room interface output/Input to connect each indicators, on the
back of workstation. And door switch work mechanism software setup interface in workstation software.
3-64
Installation
For Room Interface (RIF) connection, the rules listed below shall be complied with:
1. All equipment and power connect to RIF shall be UL/IEC60601 certified.
2. For Room in Use Indicator, the
power shall be less than DC 36V, and
current shall be limited within 2A. The
connection diagram is recommended
as below.
3. For X-Ray on Indicator, the power

shall be less than DC 36V, and
as below.
3-65
4. For Injector in Use Indicator, the

power shall be less than DC 36V, and
as below.
5. For Door Open Detector, an AC 24V

with minimum power 24W is needed
to drive an AC relay in internal circuit,
the door switch status will be
detected by system. The connection
diagram is recommended as below.
3.7.14. Fill in the product locator card for Option

After the installation of option parts, please fill in the product locator card for PLC parts
below and mail the cards to local service operation office.
NOTE
3-66
Item
Part Number
Part Description
5075816
ASM, MONOBLOCK COVER WITH LASER AIMER KIT
Installation
3.8. Installation Check List

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Installation Checklist
Administrative Information
Medical Facility Information
Hospital or Clinic Name:
Address:
State:
Postal Code/Zip:
Contact Phone:
Field Service Engineer Information

FSE name:
Employee SSO:
Service Report Number:
Date Installation Start/Complete:
GE assigned system ID#
City:
Country:
Contact Person:
Department:
(Where applicable)
System Configuration
Workstation Software Version:
Serial Number:
Host ID:
MCB Software Version:

System ID:
System Inspection
External Inspection
Cabling and Connector inspection
Anti-Static Drag Wires
Interconnect Cable and Connector
Workstation Inspection
Physical Location
No
Problem
AC Power Cord and Plug
Mainframe Inspection
Problem and resolution

noted in comments section
Monitor and Arm

Keyboard
Mouse
Covers
Frame
Handles
Wheels
Physical Location
No Problem
Problem and resolution

noted in comments section
Image Intensifier
C-Arm
X-ray Monoblock
Control Panel
Handles
Cabinet
Wheels
Label Inspection
Internal Inspection
System Setup
Power Supply Adaption
UPS Setup
System Configuration in Admin Interface
DICOM Setup and Check
System Power On
Functional Check
Workstation Checks
Mechanical Movement :
Workstation Operation:
Pass
Pass
C-Arm Checks
Fail
Fail
Mechanical Movement:
Key Switch:
C-Arm Controls:
Emergency Switch:

Copper
Filters
(mm)
715/785
865
644
744
Specification(kVp)
824
Measured
(kVp)
Pass
Pass
Pass
Yes
Fail
Fail
Fail
No
Image Resolution
Adjustment
done?
Mag Mode
(Field Size)
624
Yes
No
724
Yes
804
Yes
Specification (LP/mm)
Measured
(LP/mm)
Adjustment
done?
718/785
865
NORM (9)
2.0
2.2
Yes
No
No
MAG1 (6)
2.6
3.0
Yes
No
No
MAG2 (4.5)
3.1
3.5
Yes
No
3-67
Dose Limitation Check and Pass

Dose Group
Normal Fluoro/Low Dose Fluoro
HLF/Low Dose HLF
Dose group: Normal 50 and HLF 50
Max____/____ 44 mGy/min
Max ____/____ 50 mGy/min
Max____/____ 44mGy/min
Max ____/____ 88 mGy/min
Max____/____ 44mGy/min
Max ____/____ 88 mGy/min
Beam Alignment Check and Pass
DAP Accuracy Check and Pass
Camera centering
Collimator Centering
Dose error____<10% DAP error____<10% in calibration Verification
Brivo OEC 715/785 ____<6 scale
____4 scales of display mark
Dose error____<30% DAP error____<30% in application Verification
Brivo OEC 865 ____ 1
System Status Backup (If needed)
Function Check for Option

Option Description
CD/DVD Burner
I.I. Side Laser Aimer
Printer UP-D897
Tube Skin Spacer
Pediatric Application:
Remove Filter and Sensor
Remove Grid
Verified
Not Installed
Option Description
Video Distributor
Tube side Laser Aimer
Printer UP-990-AD
Film Cassette Holder
Pedal foot switch:
Dual pedal footswitch with save button
Dual pedal footswitch
Verified
Not Installed
Fill PLC Card

Yes
No
Reporting
Reporting complete
Yes
No
Unique from #
Calibrated Tools List

Tool Name
Tool Number
Installation Comments
3-68
Calibration Due Date
(where applicable)
Chapter4.
Calibration
4.1. Overview
The Calibration described herein should be performed each time you replace a major system component.
Perform these tests in sequence that appears in this section if necessary.
The following tools and test equipment are required to complete the calibration.
Standard Tool and Equipment
Item
Tool and Equipment
Oscilloscope Tektronix 2236 or equivalent
Multimeter or equivalent
Lead Apron
kV meter
Dosimeter
Ampere meter or equivalent
Erasable marker (whiteboard marker)
10
mAs meter
11
Precision flat head screwdriver (3mm or less) to adjust camera iris, focus
12
Transparent adhesive tape, with cutter (or need scissor or knife to cut the tape)
13
1012 Film
Special Tool
Item
Tool
GE part number
Three copper sheets, each 1mm thick
00-877682-01
9-inch BAFT Tool
00-878105-02
PWA, extend board
5085609
WARNING
The system will produce X-Rays when implementing the following procedures. Take
appropriate measures and precautions to protect yourself and others from X-Ray
exposure.
CAUTION
You must obey the following steps to guarantee the safe operation of the C-Arm.
Improper adjustment may cause premature failure of major system components.
CAUTION
If the generator has not been powered for more than 3 months, perform the generator
warm procedure in section 4.5.
4-2
Calibration
4.2. kV Measurement and Adjustment

4.2.1. kV Measurement and Accuracy Check
The X-ray generator is composed of high voltage transformer, high voltage rectifier and X-ray tube in one
pressurized oil tank. kV value can be measured by kV meter. Position the kV meter in the center of the Xray beam 30 cm above the focal spot.
Take exposure at kV values below in manual normal Fluoro mode. The error should be within 7%
ranges. Otherwise, perform the kV adjustment procedure in section 4.2.2 until all the kV values meet the
requirement above.
Exposure
mode
Low Dose
kVp
value
99 kVp
Normal
Fuoro
High Level
Fluoro
Digital Spot
Radiography
2mA
Minimum
(kVp)
92.07
Maximum
(kVp)
105.93
66kVp
4mA
61.38
70.6
110 kVp
1mA
102.3
117.7
55 KVp
4mA
51.15
58.85
110 kVp
4mA
102.3
117.7
55 KVp
4mA
51.15
57.75
80 kVp
4mA
74.4
85.6
110 kVp
4mA
102.3
117.7
55 kVp
40mAs (For 100/110V/120V input)
51.15
58.85
mA or mAs Set Value
80mAs (For 200V/220V/230V/240V input)

80KVp
40mAs
74.4
85.6
110 kVp
20mAs
102.3
117.7
4-3
4.2.2. kV Adjustment
1. Remove the C-arm console cover. Check the connection of IGBT board cables.
2. Remove the cover of E-Box. Extend MCB board with extend board. Remove the J46 jumper on
extend board. Connect the probes of ampere meter to TP222 (+) and TP210 (-) on extend board.
3. Power on the system. Check that DS9, DS10 and DS3 indicators on kV control board light.
4. Hold down keys Ctrl +Shift + Alt + to invoke the service tool. Login service tool with password.
Click Calibration Tab, then click mA Calibration button, CA11 will display on control panel.
5. Rotate R40 and R27 on kV control board clockwise to the end.

6. Test the frequency of TP4 on kV Control Board with Oscilloscope. Adjust R13 on kV Control Board
to make the frequency of TP4 is 80kHz1kHz (TP6 and TP9 are GND.)
4-4
Calibration
7. Test the voltage of TP16 on kV control board with multimeter. The voltage should be 3.150.05V.
Otherwise, adjust R109. Clockwise rotation will decrease the voltage value and anticlockwise will
increase the value.
8. Test the voltage of TP17 on kV control board with multimeter. The voltage should be 3.150.05V.
Otherwise, adjust R110. Clockwise rotation will decrease the voltage value and anticlockwise will
increase the value.
9. Take exposure. Adjust R37 on Filament Driver Board to make sure the mA is 2.10.05mA.
10. Take one shot X-ray exposure by pressing footswitch. Then adjust POT6 on MCB board until TP5
(KVO) on MCB is 4.0V0.05V.
11. Take exposure and hold on. Measure TP15 on kV control board with multimeter. Adjust R50 on kV
control board to make the voltage is 4.0V0.05V. Check that DS1 should be light when exposure.
12. Restart system. Check the kV value as the table in 4.2.1. If they are not in specification, adjust R50
on kV control board or go back to step11.
NOTE
After the calibration, connect the jumper to J46 on extend board.
4-5
Refer to below picture for the test points, indicators and adjustors:
Mainframe Control Board
POT6
4-6
Calibration
kV Control Board:
DS9
R40
R50
TP15
R27
R13
TP4
TP16
R109
R110
TP17
DS1, DS3, DS10
4-7
4.3. mA Measurement and Adjustment

4.3.1. mA Measurement and Accuracy Check
1. Remove the cover of the C-arm console and the cover of E-Box. Extend MCB board with extend
board.
2. Remove the J46 jumper on extend board. Connect the probes of ampere meter to TP222 (+) and
TP210 (-) on extend board.
3. Power on and take exposure. The mA value can be measured in Fluoro mode:
The measured value will include mA real value and mA leakage from tube insert. So that:
Exposure mA_real =mA_measure kV/800
The error of Exposure mA_real value should be within 10% ranges.
Take exposure at mA values below in manual normal fluoro mode. The Exposure mA_measure value
should be between the minimum and maximum value in the form below. Otherwise, mA calibration
procedure should be performed until all the mA_measure values meet the requirement in the list.
4-8
Calibration
Exposure mode
Low Dose Fluoro
Exposure mA_real
2mA@80KVp
mA_measure Min (mA)

1.90
mA_measure Max (mA)

2.30
Normal Fluoro
0.1mA@40KVp
0.14
0.16
4mA@110KVp
3.78
4.54
6mA@110KVp
5.52
6.75
4.5mA@110KVp (In Dose Group

HLF 50)
4.17
5.10
HLF
4. mA accuracy of Digital Spot:

Measure the voltage of TP7 (MA-SMP) on MCB board with oscilloscope:
Formula A: Exposure mA_real =Sample Voltage (TP7) (unitV)*1000/400ohm (For power is less than
1320w)
Formula B: Exposure mA_real =Sample Voltage (TP7) (unitV)*1000/200ohm (For power is more than
1320w)
The error of Exposure mA_real value should be within 10% ranges.
The voltage of TP7 should be in the range of the form below. Otherwise, mA calibration procedure
should be performed until all the voltage values meet the requirement in the list.
Voltage (TP7)
minimum (V)
2.30
Voltage (TP7)
maximum (V)
2.82
16mA@110kVp
2.88
3.52
10mA@110KVp
3.60
4.40
Exposure
Exposure
mode
mA_real
Digital
6.4mA@80kVp
Spot
Comments
For 100/110V/120V and
200V/220V/230V/240V input
Set 3.2mA@80KVp in mainframe control
panel
Use formula A
For 200V/220V/230V/240V input
Set 4mA@110KVp in mainframe control
panel
Use formula B
For 100/110V/120V input
Set 4mA@110KVp in mainframe control
panel
Use formula A
5. mA accuracy in radiography model:

Measure the voltage of TP7 (MA-SMP) on MCB board with oscilloscope:
mA measured=Sample Voltage (TP7) (unitV)*1000/200ohm
mA real=mA accuracy measure
mA accuracy=[(mA set mA actual )/mA set]*100%
For power input: 100V, 110V/120V (Setting in Exposure Management)
Exposure mode
KV and mAs value setting
mA value
10mA
Voltage (TP7)
minimum (V)
1.80
Voltage (TP7)
maximum (V)
2.20
Radiography
40KVp@40mAs
110KVp@40mAs
10mA
1.80
2.20
4-9
For power input: 200V/220V/230V/240V (Setting in Exposure Management)

Exposure mode
KV and mAs value setting
mA value
20mA
Voltage (TP7)
minimum (V)
3.60
Voltage (TP7)
maximum (V)
4.40
Radiography
40KVp@80mAs
110KVp@40mAs
20mA
3.60
4.40
TP7
4-10
Calibration
4.3.2. mA calibration
Refer to the drawings at the end of this section for the location of the points. Remove J46 jumper on
extend board. Connect the probes of ampere meter to TP222 (+) and TP210 (-) on extend board in order
to make the ampere meter in serial.
1. Power on the system. Adjust POT4 on MCB board to make the voltage of TP17 (MA-OFF) is 0V.
2. Short J5 on MCB board. Press keys Ctrl +Shift+Alt+ on keyboard to invoke the service tool.
Login service tool with password. Click Calibration Tab, then click mA Calibration button, CA11
will display on Mainframe control panel.
3. Take exposure and adjust R37 on Filament Driver Board to

make sure the measured mA value is 2.10.05mA. Clockwise
rotation will increase the current. And anticlockwise rotation
will decrease the current.
R37
4. Measure the voltage of TP7 on MCB by multimeter, take

exposure and adjust POT7 on MCB board to make sure the
measured voltage is -0.8V0.05V
5. Remove jumper on J5 of MCB board. Take exposure and
adjust POT 5 on MCB board to make sure the voltage of TP7
on MCB is -0.8V0.01V. Clockwise rotation will increase the
voltage value.
6. Take exposure and adjust POT7 on MCB board to make sure
the measured mA value is 2.10.05mA, anticlockwise rotation
4-11
will increase the current.

mA Preheat Table Calibration:
7. Short J5 on MCB board. Select Preheat mA calibration in calibration screen of service mode.
CA21will display on control panel. Press footswitch or hand switch and hold on until END END
is displayed on control panel LED field, which would last for about 20 minutes.
If the footswitch or hand switch is released early, you should press the switch again until the
control panel LED displays END END.
If the Er* Er* is displayed on the control panel, you should redo the mA calibration procedure
from step1.
8. Make sure the footswitch or hand switch is released. Remove the jumper on J5. Reboot the
system. Take exposure at 80kV, 0.1mA. Check the measured current value should be 0.20
0.02mA. Otherwise, adjust POT4 on MCB board. Clockwise rotation will increase the current. And
anticlockwise rotation will decrease the current.
9. Take exposure at 80kV, 2mA. Measure TP7 (MA-SMP) on MCB board with oscilloscope. Set
oscilloscope in TRIGGER mode and the trigger level is 250mV. The first pulse wave should be
orthogonal and the mA feedback curve shall be converged within 10ms, similar to the picture
below:
4-12
Calibration
Otherwise, redo the mA Preheat Table Calibration. If the curve still cant be converged within 10ms,
slightly trim R37and redo mA Preheat Table Calibration.
10. Please refer to section 4.3.1 to confirm the mA accuracy.
4-13
POT4
POT7
POT5
J5
TP17
TP7
4-14
Calibration
4.4. mAs Measurement and Calibration

4.4.1. mAs Measurment and Accuracy Check
Remove J46 jumper on extend board. Connect the probes of ampere meter to TP222 (+) and TP210 (-) on
extend board. Connect the mAs meter to ampere meter in serial.
Take exposure by the parameters below. The error of mAs should be within 10%.
kV, mAs
Minimum (mAs)
Maximum (mAs)
40KV, 40mAs
36
44
60KV, 20mAs
18
22
80KV, 10mAs
11
110kV, 1mAs
0.9
1.1
4.4.2. mAs Calibration

1. Take exposure at 80kVp, 20mAs. Adjust POT2 on MCB board until the measured mAs value is
20.0mAs1mAs.
2. Check mAs accuracy according to section 4.4.1.
NOTE
After the calibration, connect the jumper to J46 on extend board.
4.5. X-Ray Generator Warm

This procedure is used to improve the life of the X-Ray generator. It is only performed after the Generator
is not powered for more than 3 months.
1. Power on the system
2. Close the collimator IRIS and place a lead shield in the X-Ray beam to protect the Image
Intensifier and CCD camera.
3. Select the Manual Fluoroscopy mode. Set the kVp value to 60 kVp@1mA. Take an exposure for 3
minutes.
4. Wait for 5 minutes after exposure.
5. Set the kVp value to 80kVp@1mA and take an exposure for 3 minutes.
6. Wait for 5 minutes.
7. Power off the system.
4-15
4.6. Beam Alignment and Image Calibration

4.6.1. Camera Centering
Camera Centering Check:
1.
Let C-arm in Image Intensifier Up/Monoblock Down position, Log in software service mode, in
calibration Tab, click Beam alignment button.
2.
Rough (recommend to 1.8LP/mm) adjust camera focus to see the light image margin clearly, refer to
4.6.8.
3.
Perform Camera Centering Check as below:

Fail
Fail
Circular Mask
Fail image: ABS and ABC mode there is black

margin in circular mask ring
4-16
Circular Mask
Fail image: None_ABS and None_ABC, manual

exposure in 60KV, 1.1mA with contrast in 65
and rightness in 40, there is black margin in
circular mask ring
Calibration
Good
Good
Circular Mask
Circular Mask
Good Image: ABC mode, manual exposure mode,

in 60KV, 1.1mA, there is NO black margin in
circular mask ring
NOTE
Good Image: None_ABS and None_ABC, manual

exposure in 60KV, 1.1mA with contrast in 65 and
rightness in 40, there is NO black margin in
circular mask ring.
Difference of two reading scales between display mark and light image margin in image
area 1/3, for Brivo OEC 865 system shall be 1scale of display mark, for Brivo OEC
715/785 shall be <6 scales of display mark.
Difference of two reading scales between display mark and light image margin in image
area 2/4, for Brivo OEC 865 system shall be 1scale of display mark, for Brivo OEC
715/785 shall be <6 scales of display mark.
1
4-17
Camera Centering Calibration procedure for Brivo OEC 715/785:

1. To have access to the Camera Securing Screws, perform the following.
a. Position the C-arm to Image Intensifier up, Monoblock down.
b. Remove the I.I. cover and cables connected to Camera.
c. Release 4 M4*16 secure screws of Image Intensifier upper counter balance to remove the
upper counter weight.
d. Reused 4 M4*16 screws which are secure upper counter balance as camera alignment
screws. Fasten the 4 screws with modest torque.
Camera Alignment Screws (there

are 4 screws with 90 degrees apart)
e. Loosen 3 camera secure screws.
4-18
Calibration
Camera
Securing Screw
2. Log in software service mode, in calibration TAB, click Beam alignment
3. Use the 4 Camera alignment screws to adjust the camera center. Make sure to unscrew one
screw first, and then fasten the screw on the other side to center camera. Perform camera
centering check and repeat adjusting camera alignment screws as many times as necessary.
4. When the camera centering verification meets the specification, fasten the alignment screws
and camera secure screws.
5. After fasten secure screws, recheck the alignment result. If fail, redo calibration.
Camera Centering Calibration procedure for Brivo OEC 865:

1. To have access to the Camera Securing Screws, perform the following.
a. Position the C-arm to Image Intensifier up, Monoblock down.
b. Remove the I.I. back cover and cables connected to Camera.
c. Remove the upper counter balance
4-19
Upper Counter Balance
d. Release 4 secure screws by TORX T20 screw driver.
2. Log in software service mode, in calibration TAB, click Beam alignment button
3. Use 2 camera alignment screws (by 1/8 Inch HEX wrench) to adjust the camera center. (On the
other side are two spring screws which do not need to be adjusted, just fasten/loose alignment
screws can center the camera.) Perform camera centering check and repeat adjusting camera
alignment screws as many times as necessary.
4-20
Calibration
1/8 Inch HEX

alignment screws
Spring Alignment
Screws
4. When the camera centering verification meets the specification, fasten the alignment screws
and camera secure screws.
5. After fasten secure screws, recheck the alignment result. If fail, redo calibration.
4.6.2. BAFT Installation:

1. Let C-arm in Up (Image Intensifier)/Down position.
2. Put the 9-inch BAFT (Beam Alignment Fast Tool) on top of the Image Intensifier.
3. Orient the tool so that the number 1 and 2 on the BAFT tool is away from the mainframe, number
3 and 4 is on the Mainframe side. (See the picture below)
4. Orient the tool so that the tool sides are aligned with the mounting surface of the Image
Intensifier.
Aligned
in
parallel
5. Set to normal mode, and fully open the collimator, and to make a shot.
6. Align the BAFT tool center to image display center:
4-21
a. Loosen the securing screws (4 screws for each horizontal and vertical adjustment).
b. During a MAG 1 Fluoro exposure, adjust position adjustment screws (1 screw for each
horizontal and vertical adjustment) on the BAFT tool to make the BAFT center and
intersection of the two lines overlapped.
c. Tighten the securing screws. Then make X-ray shot and double check the BAFT alignment.
8 Securing Screws
2 Alignment Screws
NOTE
4-22
Ensure BAFT tool is aligned perfectly, before performance below calibration.
Calibration
4.6.3. Collimator Centering

Collimator Iris Centering Check / Calibration:
1. Position the C-arm with Image Intensifier up and Monoblock down.
2. Log in software service mode, in calibration TAB, click Beam alignment button.
3. Take exposure in Normal Fluoro and ABS mode and adjust the BAFT to make BAFT center is match
the display center (3mm, between BAFT and cross mark).
4. Take exposure in Normal Fluoro and ABS mode, open/close the iris slow and continuously to show
the iris near circular mask and verify that the iris leaves is shown as balanced along the circular mask
around all angles.
The distance between leaf_1/2/3/4 and circular mask shall equal to the distance between opposite
leaf_5/6/7/8 and circular mask, and tolerance of two scales is 4 scales of display mark.
1
5. If not aligned, open the collimator cover, loosen the set screws (2 pieces), and adjust the
collimator iris alignment screws (2 pieces) to center the collimator on the BAFT (Use the BAFT
image to determine the direction to shift the collimator iris). Repeat step4 and 5 to center the
collimator.
6. Fasten the set screw of collimator.
4-23
NOTE
When adjusting alignment screws clockwise from the screw head, iris will move to
the marked direction. Iris will move to reverse direction when adjusting anticlockwise.
2 Set screws
2 Alignment screws
Cleanup
1. After completing collimator iris centering calibration, make sure to tighten all Collimator Iris
secure screws.
2. Take exposure in Normal Fluoro and ABS mode Recheck the calibration result, if fail, redo the
calibration.
3. Assemble the collimator cover.
4. Remove the BAFT tool from the Image Intensifier
4-24
Calibration
4.6.4. Collimator Check and Calibration

Collimator Check:
In application interface, perform below procedure to check the collimator status.
1. Install BAFT on the I.I. and take exposure in Normal Fluoro and
ABS mode and adjust the BAFT to make BAFT center is match
the display center (3mm, between BAFT and cross mark).
and center it on the image.
2. Set the system in Auto Technique mode and Auto
Brightness/Contrast mode to perform below check.
3. Check the accuracy of collimator preview:
a.
Switch between Normal mode/Mag1/Mag2. The leaves

of Iris/Shutter are out of image. (No include the country
with special regulation, eg. Germany).
b.
Minimum position of Iris/Shutter is in 50mm*50mm

square of BAFT.
c.
Press the Close/Open/Rotation (for shutter) button of Iris/Shutter on mainframe control panel
from maximum to minimum to see the preview line moving smoothly. Randomly select a
position record the preview line and then take exposure, the difference between preview line
and real Iris/Shutter leaves shall less than15mm/10degree(for shutter rotation).
4. If system cant pass the check, perform the collimator calibration again.
Collimator Calibration:
Position the C-arm with Image Intensifier up and Monoblock down.
Login Administration interface with service authority. In Calibration Tab, click Collimator calibration
button and follow the calibraiton wizard to do collimator calibration.
NOTE
Please strictely follow below procedure to perform collimator calibration, exposure and
move Iris/shuter to right position according to the calibration Wizard, then fill in reading
value, otherwise can result in error# 0112501.
4-25
Calibration Process:
Step1 Collimator Calibration Initializtion:
Comments: Shutter/Iris limitation position calibration.
Step2 Iris maximum position for Normal mode:
4-26
Calibration
NOTE
Definition for iris and Shutter position:

Make all iris and shutter leaves penumbra (One/both/all of the leaves) is just out of
image circular mask.
Measurement margin
Circular mask
NOTE
Methods for measuring Iris diameter:

Situation_1. In below left image:
Via opening Iris, two opposite leaves are just out of circular mask. Other leaves have
been out of image (Image intensifier output window). Measure the linear distance
between two leaves penumbra margins as the diameter of Iris.
Situation_2. In below right image,
Via opening Iris, only one leaves is just out of circular mask. Other leaves have been
out of light image (Image intensifier output window). So the linear distance between
4-27
two leaves penumbra cant be measured. Herein measure the linear distance between
the leave margin and 180 light image (Image intensifier output window) margin as
the diameter of Iris.
Measure
penumbra
margin
Measure
penumbra
margin
Measure
penumbra
margin
Measure light
image margin
NOTE
4-28
Negative Image can be treat as a reference for check the edge between penumbra
and light image
Calibration
Normal image
Negative image
Step 3 Iris maximum position for Mag1 (Adjusted way refer to step2):
Step 4 Iris maximum position for Mag2 (Adjusted way refer to step2):
Step 5 Iris position between 60mm and 65mm:
4-29
Diameter=60~65mm
Step 5 Iris position into 50mm*50mm square:

50mm50mm Square of BAFT
Step 7 Shutter maximum position for Normal Mode:

Comments: Measure method is same as Iris diameter measure method.
Step 8 Shutter maximum position for Mag1:
4-30
Calibration
Step 9 Shutter maximum position for Mag2:
Step 10 Shutter position for 50mm*50mm square:

Comments: Rotate shutter to make shutter leavse parallel with the side of 50mm*50mm square. And let
the shutter leave back shadle cover the line of 50mm*50mm square.
Step 11 Normal mode diameter of circular mask:
Step 12 Mag 1 diameter of circular mask:
4-31
Step 13: Mag 2 diameter of circular mask:
Step 14 Collimator calibration successfully completed:
NOTE
German regulatory required that the collimator has

to be visible on two sides of the image, which are
not opposite. For the system installed in German,
adjust the collimator iris until the collimator meets
the requirement as below.
Australia regulatory required that the beam limiting
device must automatically limit the primary beam
to X-ray image receptor area (within 1% SID), which
it must set to the selected field of the I.I. or image
receptor in the fluoroscopic mode. For the system
installed in Australia, adjust collimator iris until the
collimator 8 leaves can be seen in the image.
4-32
Calibration
4.6.5. I.I. Field Size Check and Calibration

I.I. Field Size Check
1. Select relative field size, open the collimator to the maximum, and take an exposure.
2. Read the BAFT tick mark on the boundary of the image. The size of the image should be within
the range of the values below.
Mag Mode
NORM
MAG1
MAG2
Displayed Image Diameter (mm)
210 10
155 8
115 8
3. If the size of the image is out of requirement, I.I. Field Size Calibration shall be performed.
I.I. Field Size Calibration

NOTE
I. I. Size adjustment is done in the I.I. factory. Adjust with much care only if the Power
Supply is changed or repaired. Always use non-metal flathead screwdriver to adjust the
I.I. potentiometer to avoid short circuit.
1. Loosen the 2 I.I. power supply fixed screws.
2. Disconnect relative cables to take out the I.I. Power Supply. Carefully adjust I. I. Field Size
potentiometer. Below are two ways to fixed I.I. power supply in calibration:
4-33
Field Size
Edge Resolution
Center Resolution
A5 As A13A12 A11A23A22A21A33A32A31
a. NORM field size: Set Field size to NORM, adjust trimmer A31.
b. MAG1 filed size: Set Field size to MAG1, adjust trimmer A32.
c. MAG2 filed size: Set Field size to MAG2, adjust trimmer A33.
3. Take an exposure, and check the Field size, repeat as many times as necessary as field size is in
specification.
Cleanup
1. After passing, remove the BAFT from the I.I. Grid.
2. Make sure to re-assembly of all components as the following
a. Power off the system.
b. Disconnect Camera Cables.
c. Reinstall the I.I. Power Supply and connect cables between power supply and I.I.
d. Connect Camera Cables, and make sure to tighten the secure screws.
e. Assemble the I.I. cover.
f.
NOTE
4-34
Power on the system.

Ensure the cable tightly connect to the I.I. Power Supply. Virtual connection will lead to
no image or image vibration in Fluoro.
Calibration
4.6.6. Limiting Field Size (Collimator Iris Field Size)

Limiting Field Size Verification
1. Create a new exam.
2. Load a film cassette in the BAFT.
3. Make sure the iris is opened completely.
4. Make an exposure at 45kVp@0.5mA in Normal, MAG 1, MAG 2 for 5~10 seconds for each mode.
Take the three exposures on one sheet of film. Note: to select the Film MAG Mode, do the
following: Select Manual - Fluoro, then Normal, MAG1 or MAG 2.
5. Remove the Film Cassette and develop the film.
6. Measure the Normal field size diameter of the collimator iris as projected on the film at 45 and
135 angle with the ruler.
L2
L1
7. Set the system to Normal field size, and take an exposure.

8. Measure, using the BAFT tick marks on the display monitor, the diameter of the circular image at
45 and 135 angle.
9. Calculate the diameter difference between film and display monitor at each 45 and 135 angle.
10. The difference should be within the range of the values below.
Mag Mode
NORM
MAG1
MAG2
Diameter difference
at 45 and 135 angle
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
11. Calculate the sum of diameter difference at 45 and 135 angle.

12. The difference should be within the range of the values below.
Mag Mode
NORM
MAG1
MAG2
Combined diameter
difference
16 mm
16 mm
16 mm
13. Repeat step 6 to step 12 for MAG1 and MAG2 field size.
4-35
14. If the requirements are not met, you must perform Limiting Field Size (Collimator Iris Field Size)
Calibration.
15. Refer to Collimator Calibration Procedure to do collimator calibration.
4.6.7. ABS Tracking Check and Adjustment

ABS Tracking Check
1. Make sure that X-ray tube cover is installed.
2. Position the C-arm with I.I. above the X-ray tube.
3. Select Auto Fluoroscopy mode, and the NORM field size to take an exposure. Put the 1mm, 2mm,
and 3mm copper filter on the tube head.
4. Verify that the kVp stabilizes in the specified range below for each copper filter thickness:
Model
Copper Filter Thickness
Brivo OEC 715

Brivo OEC 785
Brivo OEC865
1mm
2mm
3mm
kVp range
644kVp
744kVp
824kVp
kVp range
624kVp
724kVp
804kVp
5. If the ABS Tracking check fails, perform KVp accuracy check. If KVp accuracy check pass, perform
Entrance Dose Rate Check and Camera Iris Adjustment as below.
Entrance Dose Rate Check and Camera Iris Adjustment

NOTE
Camera Iris adjustment is done in the factory. Adjust with much care only if necessary.
1. Place the dosimeter probe on the I.I. grid center, and secure it with transparent tape.
2. Use 2mm copper to cover the beam path on the X-ray tube, and secure it with tape.
3. Position the C-arm to lateral position.
4. Make an exposure in Auto Fluoroscopy, and wait until the technique stabilizes. Check if the dose
rate is within:
Brivo OEC 715/Brivo OEC 785: 4.10.3mR/min (35.922.63uGy/min or 2155157uGy/hr)
4-36
Calibration
Brivo OEC 865: 3.10.3mR/min (27.162.63uGy/min or 1629157uGy/hr)

5. If failed, open the Camera head cover, and carefully adjust the camera iris. Loosen Camera Iris
Securing Screw, turn Camera Iris to smaller index to decrease the stable dose rate, and to bigger
index to increase stable dose rate.
Camera Iris
Secure Screw
Camera Iris
Adjustment Ring
Camera of Brivo OEC 715/785
Camera Iris
Set Screw
Iris internal
secure Screw
Camera Iris
Adjustment Ring
Camera of Brivo OEC 865

NOTE
The secure screw of Brivo OEC 865s Camera is 1/16 inch HEX.
Dont touch the iris internal secure screw which can lead to iris adjustment ring disabled.
NOTE
6. Make an exposure to make sure the entrance dose rate:

Brivo OEC 715/785: 4.10.3mR/min (35.922.63uGy/min or 2155157uGy/hr)
4-37
Brivo OEC 865: 3.10.3mR/min (27.162.63uGy/min or 1629157uGy/hr) as close as possible.

7. If failed after many trials, check the kVp and mA calibration, and come back to Camera Iris
Adjustment. Repeat as many times as necessary.
8. When passed, check if the kVp is within specification of ABS Tracking Check. If fails, perform
kVp and mA check, and return back to the Camera Iris adjustment.
9. When passed, fix the iris by tighten the Camera Iris Securing Screw, and remove the dosimeter
probe from the I.I., and remove copper from the X-ray tube, and perform ABS Tracking check.
Cleanup
When you follow the normal beam alignment procedure, at this stage, you do not need to
reassemble the Camera Head Cover. You may still need to access the camera head for Camera focus
adjustment.
4.6.8. Limiting Resolution

Limiting Resolution Setup
1. Position the C-arm with I.I. above the X-ray tube.
2. Create a new exam to make default settings.
3. Place a Spatial Resolution tool on the Image
Intensifier, and secure it with transparent tape.The
angle between the horizontal axis of the image and
the Spatial Resolution tool shall be around 45
degrees, and the layout of Spatial Resolution tool
should be as follow.
4. Select Auto Fluoroscopy mode. Take an exposure,
and stop when image is stable. Adjust kVp and mA if
necessary.
5. Read the limiting resolution on the display image. It is
Brivo OEC 715/765/865
the maximum number (lp/mm) where half of the
lines are distinguishable. Adjusting brightness and contrast to get high image quality.
6. Verify if the resolution is within the specified value range below.
Field Size
NORM
OEC 715,
OEC 785
Resolution
(Lp/mm)
2.0
OEC 865
2.2
MAG1
OEC 715,
OEC 785
2.6
7. Repeat step 2 to step 6 for MAG1 mode.

8. Repeat step 2 to step 6 for MAG2 mode.
9. If the resolution check fails, adjust the Camera Focus.
4-38
OEC 865
3.0
MAG2
OEC 715,
OEC 785
3.1
OEC 865
3.5
Calibration
Camera Focus Calibration

Camera Focus adjustment is done in the factory. Adjust with much care only if
necessary.
NOTE
1. To have access to CCD Camera Focus, perform the following.

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Turn off the power.

Position the C-arm to lateral position.
Disconnect the Camera Cables.
Remove counter weight.
Reconnect the Camera Cables.
Power on the system.
Loosen Camera Focus Securing Screw, adjustment Camera focus.
3. Make an exposure, and check the resolution again. Repeat as many times as necessary.
4. If passed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Tighten the Camera Focus Securing Screw.

Power off system
Disconnect camera cables
Install counter weight
Connect camera cable
Install I.I. cover
5. If the resolution check still fails after many trials, proceed to I.I. Focus adjustment.
Camera Focus
Adjustment
Ring
Camera Focus
secure Screw
Brivo OEC 715/785
4-39
Camera Focus
Adjustment Handle
Camera Focus
Security Screw
OEC 865
NOTE
The security screw of Brivo OEC 865s Camera is 1/16 inch HEX.
Image Intensifier Focus Calibration

NOTE
I.I. Focus adjustment is done in the I.I. factory. Adjust with much care only if the power
supply is changed or repaired. Always use non-metal flathead screwdriver to adjust the
I.I. potentiometer to avoid short circuit.
1. Loosen 2 securing screws for I.I. Power Supply.
2. Disconnect relative cables to take out the I.I Power Supply. Carefully adjust I. I. Field Size
potentiometer. Fixed I.I. power supply in below two ways as calibration:
4-40
Calibration
3. Carefully adjust the I. I. center resolution potentiometer and edge resolution potentiometer.
Edge Resolution
Center Resolution
Field Size
A5 As A13A12 A11A23A22A21A33A32A31
a. NORM field size: Set Field size to NORM, adjust trimmer A21 and A11.
b. MAG1 filed size: Set Field size to MAG1, adjust trimmer A22 and A12.
c. MAG2 filed size: Set Field size to MAG2, adjust trimmer A23 and A13.
4. Take an exposure, and check the Field. Repeat as many times as necessary as limiting resolution
is in specification.
Cleanup
1. After passing, remove the resolution tool from the I.I. Grid.
2. Make sure to re-assembly of all components as the following
4-41
a. Power off the system.

b. Disconnect Camera Cables.
c. Reinstall the I.I. Power Supply and connect cables between power supply and I.I.
d. Install counter weight.
e. Connect Camera Head Cable, and make sure to tighten the securing screw.
f.
Assemble the I.I. cover.
g. Power on the system.

NOTE
Ensure the cable tightly connect to the I.I. Power Supply. Virtual connection will lead to no
image or image vibration in Fluoro.
4.6.9. Shading Correction Check and Calibration

Shading Correction Calibration Check:
1. Set to Normal mode, Auto Technique On.
2. Take a Shot.
3. Turn on the Automatic Brightness& Contrast.
4. Keep the brightness level and manually increase Contrast Level to see well on Brightness
uniformity. Adjust the brightness level if necessary.
5. Pass if you see the brightness uniformity is good enough. For example the 1st image shows the
good brightness uniformity, and the 2nd image, 3rd image shows the brightness uniformity is not
good.
1st image(good example)
2nd image (Margin is darker

than center ) brightness
6. If you fail in step 5, need perform Shading Correction Calibration.
4-42
3rd image (brightness of

margin is brighter than center)
Calibration
Shading Correction Calibration:

1. Before calibration, make sure no object, C-arm is up-down position
2. Login Administration interface by service authority, select Calibration Tab, click shading
Calibration button.
3. In shading calibration interface, click each Mag calibration buttons, shading correction
calibration Wizard will be prompted. According to the Wizard complete the calibration.
4. Redo the Shading Correction Calibration Check to ensure the system is in good brightness
uniformity status.
4-43
4.7. DAP Accuracy Verification and Calibration

4.7.1. DAP Calibration Verification:
Login Administration interface by Service authority, select Calibration Tab. DAP calibration buttons
for system with filter and without filter are displayed on right screen.
NOTE
System with filter shall performance both calibration DAP Calibration with Filter and
Without Filter.
System without filter shall performance DAP Calibration Without Filter and the DAP
Calibration with Filter button is in grey.
4-44
Calibration
Beam Diameter Measurement:

Take a shot and measure the beam diameter of Normal mode by 9-inch BAFT (00-878105-02), then
input measure result to Area_1.
4-45
DOSE Value Measurement:

Put the sensor of Dosimeter on the center of Image Intensifier and set Dosimeter in accumulated dose
in Gy mode. Expose about 10 seconds as the KV&mA protocol in Area_A, then input each measure
result in Aerea_2.
DOSE Accuracy Calculation:
After finishing 6 measurements, click Calculate Error button, system will automatically calculate and
show the % of Dose Error and % of DAP Error in Area_I.
NOTE
The data of % of Dose Error shall be less than 10%, otherwise the system shall be
calibrated by Calculate Dose Coef.
The data of % of DAP Error shall be less than 10%, otherwise the system shall be
calibrated by Calculate DAP Coef.
4.7.2. DAP Accuracy Application Verification:

In application interface, perform below procedure to verify the DAP calibraiton result.
Dose Rate and Dose Accuracy Application Verification:

1. Create a new exam named "DOSE CHECK". Make sure the collimator is at the maximum position.
2. Put detector of Dosimeter at 30.0+/-1.0cm from the image intensifier surface in the beam axis.
Take an exposure in Auto Technique mode, observe and adjust the Dosimeter detector to the
center of I.I. Set Dosimeter to dose rate in Gy/min.
kV
mA
normal
45
Dose Rate read

from Dose
meter (mGy/min)
mode
Dose Rate
displayed on left
monitor
(mGy/min)
3. Take exposure with the modes and parameters listed below. When the reading of Dosimeter is
stable, record the dose rate displayed on left screen into column Dose Rate displayed on left
monitor; record the dose rate displayed on Dosimeter into column Dose Rate read from Dosimeter;
work out the Error and fill it into the column Error.
Error= (Dose Rate
displayed on left - Dose
Rate read from Dose
meter )/ Dose Rate read
from Dose meter <30%
4. Set Dosimeter to accumulated Dose in Gy and reset Dosimeter to zero.

5. Take exposure with the modes and parameters listed below. Record the dose value displayed
on left monitor into the column Dose displayed on left monitor before exposure, take exposure
and hold on for 5~10s then stop exposure, Record the dose displayed on left screen into column
Dose displayed on left monitor after exposure; record the dose displayed on Dosimeter into
column Dose read from Dosimeter, work out the Error and fill it into the column Error.
4-46
mA
4pps
80
Dose on the left

monitor= Dose displayed
on left monitor after
exposure- Dose
displayed on left
monitor before exposure
(mGy)
Dose read from

Dose meter
(mGy)
kV
Dose displayed
on left monitor
before exposure
(mGy)
Dose displayed
on left monitor
after exposure
(mGy)
mode
Calibration
Error= (Dose on
the left monitor Dose read from
Dose meter )/
Dose read from
Dose meter <30%
DAP Accuracy Application Verification:

1. Position C-arm to AP position. Ensure the Monoblock is at bottom and I.I. is at top.
2. Create a new exam named DAP CHECK.
3. Set Image Intensifier Field Size to MAG2
4. Install BAFT on I.I. Take exposure in Auto Fluoro mode and hold on. Close Iris a little by pressing
the Iris Collimator Close button on control panel until at least two opposite leaves are visible on
left monitor. And then stop exposure. Read the distance on BAFT between any pair of opposite
leaves. Record the value in column "Diameter". The unit shall be mm. Remove BAFT from I.I.
NOTE
The semi-transparent part of leaves shall be considered. The measurement shall start and
end at the middle of semi-transparent area.
5. Fix Dosimeter detector at II surface. Take an exposure in Auto Fluoro mode, observe and adjust
the Dosimeter detector to the center of I.I. surface. Set up the dosimeter to accumulated dose in
Gy and reset Dosimeter.
6. Set the kVp/mA and exposure mode as the parameters in below table and do measurement in
sequence. For each measurement, record the DAP displayed on left monitor into column "DAP
on monitor before exposure", then take exposure for at least 20 seconds. After exposure
stopped, record the DAP displayed on left monitor in column DAP on monitor after exposure.
Record the reading dose of Dosimeter in column Reading Dose. Reset the Dosimeter after
each measurement is done.
7. Calculate and fill DAP estimated in column DAP estimated.
DAP estimated = DAP on monitor after exposure - DAP on monitor before exposure
Calculate and fill DAP measured in column DAP measured
DAP measured = Reading Dose * 0.8285 * Diameter/ 100000
Calculate and fill Error in column Error (%).
Error = (DAP estimated - DAP measured) / DAP measured * 100
8. The errors calculated should meet the requirement according to local regulations (Not more
than 30% ):
4-47
Mag2
Normal
fluoro
45
Mag2
Normal
fluoro
105
Error (%)
DAP estimated
(Gy.cm2)
DAP on monitor
after exposure
(Gy.cm2)
DAP on monitor
before exposure
(Gy.cm2)
DAP measured
(Gy.cm2)
kVp
Reading dose
(mGy)
exposure
mode
mA
Mag
Diameter (mm)
9. If system cant pass the verification, perform the Collimator Calibration and DAP calibration,
then perform this verification again, until system passes the verification.
4-48
Calibration
4.7.3. DAP Calibration:
II
B
III
Formal DAP Calibration:

Must do DAP calibration verification before perform DAP calibraiton.
NOTE
If Just one of Dose/DAP Coefficient is failed, just calculate the failed coefficient
1. DOSE Rate Measurement:

Put the sensor of Dosimeter on the center of Image Intensifier and set Dosimeter in DOSE Rate in
Gy/sec model. Expose as the KV&mA protocol in Area_B, then input each 6 measurement results in
Area_3.
2. Dose Coef Calculation:
Click Calculate Dose Coef button, Dose Coefficients will be calculated and displayed in Area_II.
3. DAP Coef Calculation:
Click Calculate DAP Coef button, DAP Coefficients will be calculated and displayed in Area_III.
Click OK, DAP calibration is completed and a dialogue with DAP Calibration Done will be prompted.
4-49
4.8. Monitor Brightness and Contrast Adjustment

4.8.1. Keys assignment and operation LED
A dynamic help for keypad function is available for each menu. It explains the role of each Key on the
OSD menu window, which is currently active.
4.8.2. Lock and unlock the OSD menu

Action
Lock OSD menu (except hotkeys
if enabled)
Unlock OSD menu (except
hotkeys if enabled)
Key sequence
Press key Exit and Up Up Up in 3 seconds,
when keys are unlocked.
Press key Exit and Up Up Up in 3 seconds,
when keys are locked
4.8.3. Key functions in the OSD menu

Key(s)
Situation
Action
Menu
Always
Jump to next line
Up
Slide controller
Increase value
Selection point
To previous selection
Command
"Enter key"
Down
Slide controller
Decrease value
Exit
Selection point
Except "Exit OSD" menu
To subsequent selection
One menu level upwards (settings are
retained)
Return to main menu (settings are retained)
In "Exit OSD" menu
4-50
Calibration
4.8.4. Brightness and Contrast Adjustment
NOTE
Main Menu
The monitor is factory calibrated. For DVI-D input we suggest dont change the contrast
value, any change of this will change the optimized LUT settings and will lose some of
the image information. We suggest to only adjust the backlight of the monitor if the
luminance is not acceptable.
Function
Adjustment range
Description
Adjustment of contrast
Contrast
0255
This allows the brighter area to be seen more

distinctly. The center point is in 128 position.
Note: for DVI-D signals the Contrast setting is
optimized. Manual changes are not recommended.
It is used to adjust the black level of the monitor. The
center point is in 128 position.
Brightness
0255
Brightness
This allows the darker area to be seen more

distinctly.
Note: for DVI-D signals the brightness setting is
optimized. Manual changes are not recommended.
Backlight
Settings
0255
Adjustment brightness of LCD backlight to adapt

total brightness for room illumination
SETTING1
While choose backlight it will recall factory default

contrast, brightness, backlight.
SETTING2
SETTING3
User
4-51
Quit OSD
menu
Accept changes
Quick OSD menu and either save or reject the

changes. If you have reached this menu
unintentionally, you can return to the main menu
using the EXIT key.
Reject changes
OSD is
locked
4-52
If this message is displayed, you do not have the

authority to carry out the changes in the OSD menu.
Please contact your servicing partner in this case.
Calibration
4.9. Power Input Tolerance Check

4.9.1. Input Voltage Check:
Follow below procedure to perform Input voltage Check:
1. Check the current input voltage adaption of system and treat current input voltage as
parameter V1.
NOTE
There are 7 standard voltage configurations for different countries as follows:

100V/110V/120V/200V/220V/230V/240V
The voltage adaption for 115V is the same with the 110V; V1=110V;
The voltage adaption for 127V is the same with the 120V; V1=120V;
2. Remove the WKS back cover and Power Distribution Unit Board protection cover.
3. Plug out the connectors PJ3 and PJ10 on Power Distribution Unit Board;
4. Switch on the breaker on WKS;
5. Test the voltage between the terminal J1-9 and J1-12 by multi meter and treat the voltage
as parameter V2;
6. Long press the switch on/off button, until the WKS power on switch inner LED starts to flash;
7. Test the voltage between the test points TP19 (red) and TP25 (black) on the PDU board with
the DC voltage shift of multi meter. The voltage shall be within (V2*6.25/V1)0.01V
Example 1:
If the voltage adaption is 115V, then the V1 is 110V, and the actual tested input voltage is
117V (between J1-9 and J1-12), so the V2 is 117V.
So the voltage between the TP19 and TP25 shall be within (117*6.25/110)0.01.
Example 2:
If the voltage adaption is 220V, then the V1is 220V, and the actual tested input voltage is
215V (between J1-9 and J1-12), so the V2 is 215V;
So the voltage between the TP19 and TP25 shall be within (215*6.25/220)0.01.
8. If the voltage fulfill (V2*6.25/V1)0.01V, plug in connectors PJ3 and PJ10 removed in step3,
recover the Power Distribution Unit Board protection cover and WKS back cover.
If the voltage do not fulfill (V2*6.25/V1)0.01V, refer to 4.9.2 to perform calibration.
4-53
4.9.2. Input Voltage Calibration:

If the voltage is not in the specification, adjust potential meter R52 to ensure the voltage
between TP19 (red) and TP25 (black) on the PDU board is within the (V2*6.25/V1)0.01V,
R52
TP25
TP19
4-54
Chapter5. Software
5.1. Overview
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product provides service tool in software for the service
engineer.
Using the service tool, service engineer can:
Get system information and set system ID
Configure Product Model and Options
Configure exposure management parameters
Configure image processing parameter
System maintenance
System Log Viewer
This chapter will describe how to use the service tool and the procedure of software upgrade and
installation.
5.2. Service Tool

After Brivo OEC 715/785/865 system boots up successfully, press down Ctrl, Shift, Alt and keys
together, administration interface can be invoked.
Select Service as the user, input the password, then click Login button to enter the main screen of
Administration with service tool.
NOTE
5-2
All settings in service tool can be activated.
Software
5.2.1.
System Information
System information Tab including:
Product name
Host ID (ID to generate eLicense key for software function)
Serial Number
System ID
Workstation information:
Hardware information
Software Version
Build Number
Mainframe information:
Hardware information
Software Version
Build Number
Usage statistics
5-3
Above screen is an example and the software version in it may not be the latest version. Take the actual
show version of the software as standard.
About system ID set or upgrade:
Field engineer can set or upgrade system ID of the system. Current system ID is displayed on the screen
automatically. Fill in the new system ID in the textbox and restart system is OK.
The system ID will be set to blank in manufactory. Field engineer shall set system ID during installation
and make sure its the same as the SID in service record system (GIB).
5.2.2.
Configure Product
Configure Product by typing:

Input Product Name into Area_1 and input 16 digital option key into Area_2. Click <Add> button in
product configuration area.
Activate software option feature by typing:
Input Feature Name into Area_2 and input 16 digital option key into Area_4. Click <Add> button in
software option area.
Configure Product by import form USB stick:
Insert USB stick with license file into USB port of Workstation, in Medium pull down manual select
corresponding subarea and license file, click <import>, click <OK>.
Activate software option feature form USB stick:
5-4
Software
Insert USB stick with license file into USB port of Workstation, in Medium pull down manual select
corresponding subarea and license file, click <OK>.
NOTE
If invalid eLicense Key added or eLicense File imported, it will prompt the information
dialog with message: Its an invalid eLicense key/file. Input/import eLicense key/file is
needed.
Hardware Configure:
Monitor Type: Selects the monitor type (Mono Display / Color Display) from pull down manual for the
current product (No monitor type is set as default).
Filter Option: Disable/Enable removal filter option.
5.2.3.
Calibration
Above is the calibration interface, detailed calibration instruction, please refer to Calibration chapter 4.
5-5
5.2.4.
Exposure Management
Select Exposure Config Tab on the main screen. Exposure Config screen will be displayed.
Restore Default:
Restore Default can restore all setting back to new default value, as above picture.
NOTE
Once click Restore Default button need follow below instructions to recheck and set all of
the items in Exposure Config.
Exposure Control:
Enable or disable Auto Termination at 9'30" in one shot function. If this function is enable, when the
continuous fluoroscopy time reaches 930, X-rays will be terminated automatically.
NOTE
Refer to the below Exposure Management Matrix table at the end of this section to set
Fluoro Alarm Control.
Select Film option to enable or disable film exposure mode.
Dose Group Setting:

Base on the real power input select corresponding input voltage setting.
5-6
Software
NOTE
NOTE
Wrong input voltage settings will lead to system work in abnormal mode.
The following section describes the instruction how to set Dose Group and X-ray Control
according to the following Table Exposure Management Matrix. If the instruction
contradicts the corresponding regulatory requirements of certain countries or regions (for
example, some regulatory requirements are updated), change the setting according to
the regulatory requirements.
Select Dose Group Option by country to set the dose limitation in normal (standard) and HLF exposure.
The available options are:
Normal 88 and HLF 100
The skin dose rate in the Dose Group represents the value for conditions of free-in-air irradiation at the
patient skin: 30cm along the beam axis from the image intensifier surface.
1. Two dose groups in normal (standard) Fluoro mode:
Normal50: The skin dose rate does not exceed 50mGy/min in standard Fluoro mode, such as
Australia, Japan, New Zealand, etc.
Normal88: The skin dose rate does not exceed 88mGy/min in standard Fluoro mode, such as
USA, Germany, etc.
2. Two dose groups in HLF mode:
HLF50: The skin dose rate does not exceed 50 mGy/min in HLF mode, such as Japan, etc.
HLF100: The skin dose rate does not exceed 100 mGy/min in HLF mode, such as Australia,
Italy, UK, New Zealand, etc.
For the country, such as USA, if the skin dose rate shall not exceed 176 mGy/min in HLF mode from its
regulatory requirements, the system will use HLF100 in HLF mode because the maximum skin dose rate
of the X-ray tube cannot exceed 100 mGy/min.
3. For some countries, their dose limitation should be the combination of the above normal and HLF
groups. For example:
Australia: Normal50 and HLF100
China: Normal88 and HLF100
4. For countries or regions that have a higher standard Fluoro dose (at the patient skin) rate limit
than USA, the dose limits are set to the same value as for USA.
5. For countries or regions that have a higher HLF dose (at the patient skin) rate limit than USA, the
dose limits are set to the same value as for USA.
6. For countries or regions that do not specify standard Fluoro dose at patient skin, the dose limits
are set to the same value as for USA.
7. For countries or regions that do not specify HLF dose at patient skin, the dose limits are set to the
same value as for USA.
Refer to the below table Exposure Management Matrix to set Dose Group.
5-7
DAP Unit Config:
Field engineer can configure software DAP unite on this interface.
HLF level exposure setting:
Disable after High Level Exposure: Enable or disable The system automatically Disable After High Level
Exposure function. Some countries or regions, such as certain provincial locations in Australia, may
require enabling it.
Disable after No Exposure for 5 Minutes: Enable or disable Disable after No Exposure for 5 Minutes
function. Some countries or regions, such as certain provincial locations in Australia, may require
enabling it.
HLF Accessible Only in Auto ABS: Enable or disable HLF Accessible Only in Auto ABS function. Some
countries or regions, such as certain provincial locations in Australia, may require enabling it.
Automatic Termination at 20 in One Shot: Enable or disable Automatic Termination at 20 in One Shot
function. Some countries or regions, such as Australia or Switzerland, require enabling it.
Refer to the following table Exposure Management Matrix to set HLF scene setting.
Exposure Management Matrix
Countries /
Regions
Dose Group Option
HLF
Automatic
Disable after
Auto
Disable after
Accessible Termination
No Exposure Termination
High Level
Only in
at 20 in
for 5
at 9'30" in one
Exposure
Auto ABS One Shot
Minutes
shot
Albania
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Algeria
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Angola
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Argentina
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Australia
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Austria
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Bahrain
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Bangladesh Normal 88 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Belarus
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Belgium
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Bolivia
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Bosnia
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Brazil
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Brunei
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
5-8
Software
Countries /
Regions
Dose Group Option
HLF
Automatic
Disable after
Auto
Disable after
High Level
Only in
at 20 in
for 5
at 9'30" in one
Exposure
Auto ABS One Shot
Minutes
shot
Burkina Faso Normal 88 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Cambodia
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Cameroon
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Chile
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
China (P.R.)
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Colombia
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Costa Rica
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Cote d'lvoire Normal 88 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Croatia
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Cyprus
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Czech
Republic
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Denmark
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Egypt
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
France
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Germany
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Greece
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Guatemala
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Honduras
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Hong Kong
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Hungary
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
India
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Indonesia
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Iraq
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Ireland
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Israel
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Italy
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Jamaica
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
5-9
Countries /
Regions
Dose Group Option
HLF
Automatic
Disable after
Auto
Disable after
High Level
Only in
at 20 in
for 5
at 9'30" in one
Exposure
Auto ABS One Shot
Minutes
shot
Japan
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Jordan
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Kazakhstan Normal 88 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Kuwait
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Laos
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Lebanon
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Libya
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Luxembourg Normal 88 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Macedonia
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Malaysia
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Malta
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Mexico
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Montenegro Normal 88 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Morocco
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
New Zealand Normal 50 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Netherlands Normal 88 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Nigeria
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Oman
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Pakistan
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Panama
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Paraguay
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Peru
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Philippines
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Poland
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Portugal
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Romania
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Russia
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Qatar
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
5-10
Software
Countries /
Regions
Dose Group Option
HLF
Automatic
Disable after
Auto
Disable after
High Level
Only in
at 20 in
for 5
at 9'30" in one
Exposure
Auto ABS One Shot
Minutes
shot
Saudi Arabia Normal 88 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Serbia
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Singapore
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Slovakia
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
South Africa Normal 88 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
South Korea Normal 88 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Spain
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Switzerland Normal88 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Taiwan
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Thailand
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Trinidad &
Tobago
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Tunisia
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Turkey
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Ukraine
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
United Arab
Emirates
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
United States Normal 88 and HLF 100
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
United
Kingdom
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Uruguay
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Venezuela
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Vietnam
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
5-11
5.2.5.
Imaging Processing Config
System provide tool to set imaging parameters. Click Image Processing configure tab on the main
screen, the image processing interface is displayed.
NOTE
Changes on Image Brightness, Image Contrast, Black/Wihte Margin and Sharpen

power are not recommended because these values have been optimized for the image
quality to compromise any anatolomical imaging. Any changes will affect the system
image quality.
Image Brightness: Pressing up or down arrow or dragging the block allows you to adjust image
brightness default from 0 to 100.
Image Contrast: Pressing up or down arrow or dragging the block allows you to adjust image
contrast default from 0 to 100.
Edge Enhance: Select default value of sharpening power from 0-9.
Rotation Angle: Select default value of image rotation angle from 0~359.
TNR (Temporal Noise Reduction): Select default value of noise filter from 0-3.
SM (Smart Metal) value: Select default value of the appearance reduction of metal in the image
from 0-50.
5-12
Software
Enable or disable IP circular mask: it is used to assist beam alignment calibration. Make sure it is
set back to the default setting Enable after beam alignment.
Enable or disable IP shading correction image processing function.
Enable or disable Display Mark: it is used to assist beam alignment calibration. Make sure it is set
back to the default setting Disable after beam alignment.
Enable or disable Shading: it is used to assist to judge shading correction calibration result. Make
sure it is set back to the default setting enable after judging shading correction calibration.
Black/White Margin: This adjustment shall be made very carefully only when necessary, as it may
affect the overall image quality. Pressing up or down arrow allows you to adjust image margin
from 0 to 50%. Increasing White Margin value may enhance contrast in bright regions, and
increasing Black Margin value may enhance contrast in dark regions. Increasing White Margin
may decrease overall image brightness. Increasing Black Margin may increase overall image
brightness.
5.2.6.
Maintenance
5-13
Export/Import System Setup:

Export/Import configuration file set in user Administration interface by USB stick.
Export/Import Administration Config:
Export/Import configuration file set in service tool (Administration) interface by USB stick.
Recommend export both files before upgrading system Operation System and Application software and
import after upgrading.
Backup/Restore Database:
Backup/Restore Database for/from database pool.
Backup the current database file on this screen. The database file contains patient and exams
information. Click Backup button to save the current database file. A double confirm screen will pop up.
Click Yes button to start backup. The process will complete until Database backup finished. message
displays. There are two backup files in the system and used by turns.
Click Restore button to enter the Database Restore screen. The backup files name contain the time
stamp. You can choose a database according to the time. Click Restore button and click Yes on the
double confirm screen to start the restore process. The restore will complete until Database restore
finished. message displays.
Data Integrity Check:
The consistency check function is to check the consistency between the database and image files. Click
Data Integrated Check button on main screen to enter consistency check screen.
Click Check button on the screen, and then click Yes button in confirmation screen to start the check
process. The result will be displayed on the frame after the process complete.
Upgrade Software:
This feature is for uninstall the APP software of Brivo OEC 715/785/865 C-Arm system. After uninstalling
the APP software system will go back to Operation System interface. Then insert the APP installation CD,
APP installation Wizard will be invoked automatically.
Detailed software upgrade procedure refer to 5.3.
Reset Admin Password:
This feature is to reset Admin password to original.
5-14
Software
5.2.7.
Log Viewer
Log viewer screen allows service engineer to review the system log including the system event and
detailed information of error, warning and information messages, detailed even code explanation please
refer to chapter6.
There is system Log which is less about 100MB and divided into 10 files, 10M per file. Log information will
be recovered when the file size exceeds the limitation automatically.
Click Log Viewer Tab on main screen:
Date: Used to select the period to show the log. You can search the logs created in the selected
period. The available options are: all date, day, week, month, half year or one year.
Type: Select the log type including error, warning, information and event.
Sub-system: Search the log information according to software sub-system that the event or failure
happened on.
Search for: Input the key words of the log text in the textbox to search.
Exception code: Input the error code displayed on the monitor and control panel to search the log.
Module: Search the log information according to module that the event or failure happened on. The
available options are: computer, software, X-ray exposure and all.
Search Button: Click the button to start the search operation and invoke detailed Log information.
5-15
Log Information Area: Display the search results of the log. This field will show the error code, Type,
sub-system, module, create date and log text of the log.
Reset Button: Click Reset button to clear all selected search option and restore to defaults.
Export Button: Click Export button to export log files to USB disk which is selected in Medium pull
down manual. The export complete with a message Log export finished. All log files will be exported
into one *.zip file named with system S/N and exported date/time. Extract the file with password
(same as login service tool), System Log will be divided into small files after exported, the maximum of
the file numbers are 10.
5-16
Software
5.3.
5.3.1.
Software Installation and Upgrade

Install Operating System
There are two software installation Disks for Brivo OEC 715/785/865 C-Arm X-ray Product.
Disc 1/2 is the Operating System (OS) installation CD
Disc 2/2 is the application Software
The OS installation CD should be installed prior to Application CD during the initial installation.
NOTE
NOTE
Setting and Configuration backup/restore:

System providing User settings, Administration Settings, and Product configuration
backup/Restore feature. Before installing OS and APP backup all setting and
configuration are recommended. Detailed please refer to 5.2.2 and 5.2.6.
CD/DVD Rom is an option part, so upgrade software need use USB CD/DVD Rom with
Part No# 5075511 on none CD/DVD Rom system.
You must press
key immediately during system booting in step 1.
NOTE
NOTE
As installing Operating System or Application, system (Power Distribution Board) will

make a beep alert sound for loosing heart beat between workstation and System
Interface Board more than 3 minutes.
5-17
1. Turn on the system (during the memory testing) repeated press

BIOS password to Login BIOS setup interface.
2. Use the arrow right button to select the Boot screen.
5-18
key on the keyboard. Input
Software
3. Use arrow down Boot Device Priority and press Enter. Then choose the CD/DVD as 1st boot
device.
4. Press the
key and then press Enter. This will save your settings, and the system will
reboot. (The system is now set to boot from CD ROM first.)
5-19
5. System will boot up, in system boot up section, insert the OS installation CD into the CD/DVD
driver of the Workstation. When below screen is prompted. Select Surgery Bluestone Program,
and then press Enter.
6. Later interface with progress bar will be prompted.
7. As Helios installation complete interface prompted, take out operation system installation CD and
reboot system.
5-20
Software
8. Reset HDD as first boot up device in BIOS, according to above BIOS setting step.
9. System log into Linux that means operation system is successfully installed.
5-21
5.3.2.
NOTE
Install Application Software

Installing application software on new operation system, please directly jump setp3.
CD/DVD Rom is an option part, so upgrade software need use USB CD/DVD Rom with
Part No# 5075511 on none CD/DVD Rom system.
Unplug Ethernet cable and turn off WiFi power supply on the back of Workstation, before
clicking Upgrade Software button.
NOTE
1.
5-22
Setting and Configuration backup/restore:

System providing User settings, Administration Settings, and Product configuration
backup/Restore feature. Before installing OS and APP backup all setting and
configuration are recommended. Detailed please refer to 5.2.2 and 5.2.6.
In Admin interface Click Maintenance Tab, then click Upgrade Software button. Upgrade software
will be prompted, click Yes,
Software
2.
Shut down and reboot system, waiting for log in Linux desktop.
3.
Insert the Application CD to CD/DVD driver of the workstation, click OK on below dialogue :
4.
Click Run on below dialogue:
5-23
5.
Input system serial No. twice, and then click OK.
6.
By default the application will be installed with Retain the existing user data on the system. If the
user data need not be retained on the system, select Not retain the existing user data. Click OK
go to next step.
CAUTION
7.
5-24
Select Not retain the existing user data will delete all existing data and it cannot be
recovered.
In the confirmation screen, click Yes to continue the installation process. If do not want continue
current installation mode, press No.
Software
8. After the installation mode is selected, the application install process will be started.
9. If no error is detected during the installation, stage 1 complete screen will be displayed.
10. Click OK to complete the installation stage1, reboot system. After system booting up, the installation
stage 2 will be started when the system boot up complete.
11. When the installation stage 2 complete, Brivo OEC Product application install complete screen will be
displayed, Click OK. Take out the application installation CD and shutdown system.
12. Turn on system and login APP interface to do workstation operation check as defined in section3.6.1.
13. If in step6 select Not retain the user data, need login Admin interface by service authority to
perform Shading Correction Calibration refer to Chapter 4 and reconfigure/set system refer to
Chapter 5.
5-25
5.4. Firmware Upgrade

5.4.1.
MCU Firmware Upgrade
Installing PCW16FXsetup Programmer into laptop, Windows 2K/XP/7:

1. Insert the Firmware Download Software Tool CD to CD/DVD drive, find the installation software:
2. Double Click the installation Software, a progress bar will be prompted:
3. Click Next button:
5-26
Software
4. Click Next:
5. Click Install:
6. Click Finish button to complete installation procedure.
5-27
Install USB converter driver in Windows 2K/XP/7 into laptop:

Method 1:
After insert the converter the system can install the driver automatically.
Method 2:
Use converter User guide CD to install the driver. The CD is packed with the converter.
Plug in USB converter to laptop and insert Firmware Download Software Tool. Diver and User guide
interface will be promoted. Click Product Driver, select the corresponding operation system in laptop,
and then click setup in the folder to complete the driver installation.
5-28
Software
NOTE
If methods 1/2 are not available, please follow method 3 in below.
5-29
Method 3:
In Firmware Download Software Tool CD, in patch the location of the driver on your system:\MCU
Firmware Download Software Tool\USB-232-485-422 click autorun icon. After Driver and Users
Guide interface being promoted, follow method 2 install driver.
5-30
Software
MCU firmware flash

1. Recommend export the Product configuration
and Software option license file by USB stick, in
administration interface by service authority,
refer to 5.2.2.
2. Shutdown system and remove the Mainframe
back cover and eBox cover.
3. Shorten the boot mode jumper right 2 pins on
the Mainframe Control Board, as shown on
right picture.
4. Plug in the upgrade cable as right picture and
insert USB convertor with upgrade cable to
laptop USB port.
5. Then power on system.
6. Start FUJITSU FLASH MCU Programmer on by click Start\Programs\FUJITSU FLASH MCU

Programmer\ FMC16FX
Change the Target Microcontroller to MB96F346A/R/Y as show in below:
7. Find COM No. and Set Environment:

Find COM No.:
In Computer Management check COM No. of the USB Serial Port.
For Example: In below screen capture, Ports_USB Serial Port is COM3.
5-31
Set Environment:
In Set Environment set the COM No. as getting from Computer Management, as above example
radio button of COM3 is checked in Environment in below picture.
8. Click Open button and chose MCB*.mhx (In below picture the file name is MCB*.mhx) stored on the
Install CD.
5-32
Software
9. Click Full Operation button, then reset the MCU by pressing Reset button on Mainframe control
Board as below, then click OK.
5-33
10. Click OK as below to finished MCU firmware flash.
11. System Recovery

Power off the system reshort cut the jumper as original.
Unplug the firmware download cable from Mainframe Control Board.
Reinstall the eBox cover and Mainframe back cover.
Power on system, then reconfigure Product and Software option function as original, refer to
5.2.2.
Performance below calibrations, refer to Chapter 4:
Below mA calibration and Beam Alignment Calibration interface just press OK button is to
finish the mA calibration. Because no hardware setting is changed, actual calibration is not
needed.
NOTE
5-34
mA Calibration
mA Preheat calibration
Beam Alignment Calibration
Collimator Calibration
Necessary DAP Calibration
Shading Correction Calibrations
Software
5.4.2.
CPLD Upgrade
USB-Blaster Driver installation

NOTE
In order to install the USB-Blaster driver successfully, please confirm your operation system
in your laptop, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows 7 System, then following the
corresponding directions below before installation.
Install the USB-Blaster Driver on Windows 2000/XP

1. Insert the Firmware Download Software Tool CD, and plug in the USB-Blaster download cable into the
PC.
2. On the Found New Hardware Wizard window,
select Install from a list of specific location
(Advanced) and then click Next to continue.
3. Select Dont search. I will choose the driver to

install and click Next to continue.
5-35
4. Select Sound, video and game controllers, and

click Next to continue.
5. Select Have Disk and browse to the location of

the driver on your system: \CPLD Firmware
Download Software Tool\USB Blaster
Drivers\usb-blaster and click OK.
5-36
Software
6. Select Altera USB-Blaster and click Next to

continue.
7. Click Continue Anyway when the Hardware

Installation warning window appears.
8. Click Finish in the Completing the Add/Remove

Hardware Wizard window and Reboot your
system.
Installing the USB-Blaster Driver on Windows 7:

1. Insert the Application CD to CD/DVD drive and plug the USB-Blaster download cable into the PC.
5-37
2. Open Control panel

and click View devices
and printers to
continue
3. Double Click USB-Blaster in the device list
4. Click Hardware and Properties to continue.
5-38
Software
5. Click Change settings to continue.
6. Click Update Driver to continue
5-39
7. Click Browse my computer for driver

software to locate and install driver
software manually.
8. Browse to the location of the driver

software on your system and click
Next to continue.
9. Click install this driver software

anyway on the windows security.
5-40
Software
10. Click close and the USB blaster

driver is installed on your system
successfully.
Install Stand-Alone Quartus II Programer

1. Open the CD/DVD Rom find the installation software in CD
5-41
2. Click on install to continue
3. Click Next to continue
5-42
Software
4. Click I agree to the terms of

the license agreement and
Next to continue
5-43
8. Click Yes to remove the

temporary extracted files
when installation
5-44
Software
9. Click finish to complete the

installation
5-45
CPLD Firmware Download

1. Shutdown system and remove relative covers to access below boards, refer to chapter7.
2. Insert USB-Blaster download cable, then boot up the system:
Mainframe Control board
System Interface Board
Download Port is J3
Power Distribution Unit
NOTE
Download Port is J13

Red cable is opposite to 1 pin of J13.
3. Open the Stand-Alone Quartus II Programer on laptop
5-46
Download Port is PJ9
Software
4. Click Hardware Setup and double click USB-Blaster to select it, then close the window
5. Download model selection:

For Mainframe Control Board and System interface
Board, model shall be Active Serial Programming
5-47
For Power Distribution Unit, model shall be JTAG
6. Click Add File and Browse to the location of the file on your system: select the right firmware file,
click open to continue.
5-48
Software
CPLD firmware file name:

For Mainframe Control Board: Xray_Control*.pof
For Power Distribution Unit: PDU*.pof
For System interface Board: SIB*.pof
7. Check program/configure and verify check box. And then click start button to download CPLD.
For Mainframe Control Board and System interface Board:
For Power Distribution Unit:
5-49
Firmware programing
8. When the progress bar reaches to 100%, the downloading is completed. Then shut down the system
and pull out the USB-Blaster download cable.
5-50
Software
NOTE
In case progress bar displays failed, the progress is interrupted. Check the connection
of USB-Blaster download cable and reload from 5.4.2 STEP 1.
System Recovery
1. Shutdown system and unplug the firmware download cable.
2. Reinstall all covers.
5-51
Chapter6. Troubleshooting
6.1. Overview
This chapter describes messages that appear on the right workstation monitor during system operation.
Messages may indicate any of the following:
Error Messages
Warning Messages
Information
When the error message appears, error code will also be displayed on the kV, mA display field on control
panel, if the Mainframe is connected with Workstation.
6.2. Error Recovery Steps

Perform the following error recovery procedures if you encounter problems during start-up or operation:
1. Some messages can be cleared by pressing OK button or taking exposure, but will periodically redisplay while the condition exists.
2. If an error message occurs, shutdown the system. Wait one minute, and then press the power on key.
If this fails to restore normal operation then proceed with step 3.
3. Press the power off key, disconnect the power cord, and call for service. Refer to chapter 1 for
communication center telephone numbers. Do not continue using the system.
WARNING
System may fail at any time. Ignoring error and warning messages may result in
equipment damage and personal injury.
6.3. Event Messages

6.3.1.
Structure of Message Code
Three subcodes constitute the message:

Subsystem Code
**
Example:
01
6-2
Component Code
**
Exception No.
***
Message ID
**_**_***
02
001
01 02 001
Description
------Tube temperature sensor
feedback SPI line work
abnormal
Troubleshooting
6.3.2.
Definition of Code
Subsystem
XRay Control
Imaging
Application
Subsystem Code
01
Component Code
Component
CPLD
Tube
Collimator
KV Control Board
Filament Drive Board
Control Panel
Hand Switch
Foot Switch
Key Switch
Emergency Switch
Up/Down Control Board
DAP
ComServo
Camera
Calibration
ABS
KVMA
Exposure Control
WKSMessage
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
ImageAcquisition
PreProcess
PostProcess
Viewer
ImagingEngine
01
02
03
04
05
Annotation
CinePlayer
CineSetup
ExamManagement
GraphicApplicationKit
ImageDirectory
Measurement
ModeSetup
Setup
ZoomRoam
Administration
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
02
03
6-3
Infrastructure
6-4
MiniImageDirectory
12
CommServo
DatabaseManagement
DcmDataTranslator
DcmTranscationUnit
DcmScu
Desktop
MediaManagement
DeviceManagement
SystemInit
Logger
ImageManagement
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
04
Troubleshooting
6.3.3.
Exception
ID
Message List
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
(Displayed in User Interface)
Diagnosis Reference
X-ray Control
0101001
Warning
CPLD firmware
version is
incompatible
with MCB
software
Camera frame
sync signal is
lost
Mainframe hardware version

exception. The mainframe
stopped.\nPlease call for
service.
1. MCU or CPLD Firmware

flashed wrong version
2. MCB Issue
0101002
Warning
Camera signal cant

detected.\nPlease restart the
system. If this issue persists,
please call for service.
CPLD works
abnormally
after checking
external
watchdog chip
during system
boot up
Tube
temperature
sensor's
feedback SPI
line is works
abnormal
Tube
temperature
sensor's
feedback line is
disconnected
Tank surface
temperature
has reached
untouchtemperature
Mainframe hardware
exception.The mainframe
stopped.\nPlease restart the
1. Camera may be
abnormal.
2. MCB may be abnormal.
3.Maybe Bundle connection
issue or Bundle cable is
abnormal
1. MCB may be abnormal
0101003
Warning
0102001
Warning
0102002
Warning
0102800
Warning
0102803
Warning
Tube is hot
0102804
Warning
Tube is
overheating
Tube temperature monitoring

exception. Exposure is
disabled.\nPlease restart the
1.MCB may be abnormal
Tube temperature monitoring

exception. Exposure is
disabled.\nPlease restart the
Xray tube housing overheated.
Exposure is disabled.\nPlease
do not touch the
housing.\nPlease wait for the
tube to cool down before
making another exposure.
Tube is hot.\nYou may
continue with exposure, but
discretion is advised.
Tube overheated. Exposure is
disabled.\nPlease wait for the
tube to cool down before
making another exposure.
1. Maybe Tube temperature

sensor connection issue.
N/A
N/A
N/A
6-5
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0103001
Warning
0103002
Warning
Leaves
open/close
stuck
Collimator leaves open/close

stuck.\nPlease restart the
0103003
Warning
Leaves rotation
stuck
Collimator leaves rotation

stuck.\nPlease restart the
0103004
Warning
IRIS width SPI

channel is
abnormal
0103005
Warning
Leaves width
feedback SPI
channel is
abnormal
0103006
Warning
Leaves angle
feedback SPI
channel is
Collimator iris monitoring

exception. Iris cant open or
close.\nPlease restart the
monitoring exception. Leaves
cant open or close.\nPlease
restart the system. If this issue
persists, please call for service.
monitoring exception. Leaves
cant rotate.\nPlease restart
6-6
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Iris stuck
Message
Collimator iris stuck.\nPlease
Diagnosis Reference
Leaves rotation stuck
1.Collimator may be
abnormal
2.CCB may be abnormal
4.Mother Board may be
abnormal
5.Cable between
Motherboard and
Collimator may be
abnormal
1. Collimator may be
abnormal
2. CCB may be abnormal
4. Mother Board may be
abnormal
5. Cable between
Motherboard and
Collimator may be
abnormal
1.Collimator may be
abnormal
2.CCB may be abnormal
4.Mother Board may be
abnormal
5.Cable between
Motherboard and
Collimator may be
abnormal
MCU IRIS width A/D failure,
MCB may be abnormal
MCU Leaves width A/D

failure, MCB may be
abnormal
MCU angle width A/D
failure, MCB may be
abnormal
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
abnormal
Message
Diagnosis Reference
the system. If this issue

0103007
Warning
Iris channel SPI

bus Tx is time
out
Collimator iris control

Collimator iris control
control exception. Leaves cant
open or close.\nPlease restart
0103008
Warning
Iris channel SPI

bus Rx is time
out
0103009
Warning
Leaves
open/close
channel SPI bus
Tx is time out
0103010
Warning
Leaves
open/close
channel SPI bus
Rx is time out

open or close.\nPlease restart
0103011
Warning
Leaves rotation
channel SPI bus
Tx is time out

rotate.\nPlease restart the
0103012
Warning
Leaves rotation
channel SPI bus
Rx is time out

rotate.\nPlease restart the
0103800
Warning
Collimator is
not calibrated.
0104001
Warning
DC is Error
Collimator not calibrated. Iris

and leaves cant be
manipulated.\nPlease call
service to calibrate the
collimator.
Generator power exception.

abnormal
abnormal
Leaves open/close channel
SPI (MCU) bus Tx is time out
abnormal
Leaves open/close channel
SPI (MCU) bus Rx is time out
abnormal
Leaves rotation channel SPI
(MCU) bus Tx is time out
abnormal
Leaves rotation channel SPI
(MCU) bus Rx is time out
abnormal
1. Calibrate collimator
1. DC Bus Fuse maybe

broken.
2. IGBT assembly kit issue
6-7
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0104002
Warning
0104003
Warning
0104004
Warning
0104005
Warning
KV is unbalance
Execution exception.\nPlease
0105001
Warning
Filament is over
current by HW
monitor
0105002
Warning
Inverter is over
current
0105003
Warning
Filament is over
current by SW
monitor
6-8
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
IGBT is error
Message
Generator power exception.
KV is high than
120KV
Generator exception. Exposure

is disabled.\nPlease restart the
KV is lower than Generator exception. Exposure
35kv
is disabled.\nPlease restart the
Diagnosis Reference
1. IGBT drive cable maybe
disconnected.
2. HV drive transformer may
be abnormal. Check the
IGBT driver transformer
output voltage at kV control
board on the capacitor C98,
C99, C100, C101 or other
components connected
capacitor, voltage is 24VDC
+/-1V.
3. Monoblock may be
abnormal.
KV need be calibrated
1. Security line maybe

disconnected.
2. KV need be calibrated.
3. KV return cable
disconnects.
4. Cables connected
Monoblock maybe
disconnect.
5. Monoblock may be
abnormal.
1. One of KV return cable
maybe disconnects.
2. Monoblock may be
abnormal.
1. 24V fuse for FDB may be
broken.
2. FDB may be broken.
3. Filament drive cables are
may be short circuited.
4. Tube insert of Monoblock
may be abnormal.
1. Monoblock may be
abnormal.
1. FDB may be Broken
2. 24V fuse for FDB burnout.
3. Filament drive cables are
short circuited.
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
Diagnosis Reference
4 MCB may be broken
5. Tube insert of Monoblock
breaks.
0106001
Warning
6954 chip
verification is
failed: The
written value is
not same with
the read back
value
Control Panel exception.

0106002
Warning
7301 chip
verification is
failed: The
written value is
not same with
the read back
value

0106003
Warning
6954 channel
of SPI bus TX is
time out

0106004
Warning
6954 channel
of SPI bus RX is
time out

0106005
Warning
7301 channel
of SPI bus TX is
time out

1. MAX6954 chip of Display

Board may be abnormal
2. Maybe connection issue
in Cable between Display
Board and Mother board
3. Power supply may be
abnormal
4. MCB SPI channel may be
abnormal
1. 7301 chip of Display
Board may be abnormal.
2. Maybe connection issue
in Cable between DB and
Mothor board
3. Power supply may be
abnormal
4. Maybe MCB SPI channel
may be abnormal.
2. Motherboard and Display
Board cable connection
may be abnormal
3. DB may be abnormal
MCB SPI write to Display
Board (Nixie tube
) time out:
may be abnormal
MCB SPI write to Display
Board (Nixie tube
) time out:
may be abnormal
6-9
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0106006
Warning
0107001
Warning
Left hand
switch is stuck
since safe line
error
0107002
Warning
Right hand
switch is stuck
since safe line
error
0107800
Warning
During bootup ,
left hand switch
is pressed
0107801
Warning
0108001
Warning
During bootup ,
right hand
switch is
pressed
Left foot switch
is stuck since
safe line error
0108002
Warning
Right foot
switch is stuck
since safe line
error
0108800
Warning
During bootup ,
left foot switch
is pressed
0108801
Warning
During bootup ,
right foot
switch is
pressed
6-10
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
7301 channel
of SPI bus RX is
time out
Message
Left hand switch stuck.

check the left handswitch and
Right hand switch stuck.
check the right hand switch
and restart the system. If this
issue persists, please call for
service.
Left hand switch pressed
during boot up. Please release
the left hand switch.
Diagnosis Reference
MCB SPI writes to Display
Board (Function LED) time
out
Board cable connetction
may be abnormal
N/A
N/A
N/A
Right hand switch pressed

the right hand switch.
N/A
Left foot switch stuck.

check the left foot switch and
Right foot switch stuck.
check the left foot switch and
Left foot switch pressed during
boot up. Please release the left
foot switch.
N/A
Right foot switch pressed

the right foot switch.
N/A
N/A
N/A
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Key switch is
rotated to "Xray Off" position
Message
0109800
Warning
0109801
Warning
Key switch is
rotated to "Off"
position
0110800
Warning
Emergency
switch is
pressed
0112500
Warning
DAP event
buffer overflow
0112501
Warning
DAP parameter
buffer overflow
Mainframe buffer overflow. The

mainframe stopped.\nPlease
0112800
Warning
DAP is not
calibrated
without filter
0112801
Warning
DAP is not
calibrated with
filter
Dose not calibrated for the

tube without filter
option.\nPlease call service to
calibrate dose.
Dose not calibrated for the
tube with filter option.\nPlease
call service to calibrate dose.
0113002
Warning
WKS UART
write fault
Key Switch in Xray Off.

Exposure is disabled.\nTo
enable exposure, please turn it
to On.
Keyswitch in Off. Exposure and
lift column motion are
disabled.\nTo enable exposure
or lift column motion, please
turn it to On.
Emergency switch pressed.
Exposure and lift column
motion are disabled.\nTo
enable exposure or lift column
motion, please release the
switch.
Communication exception. The

Diagnosis Reference
N/A
N/A
N/A
1. Don't follow calibration

procedure to perform
calibration. (Reboot system
and Login Serivice Interface,
directly perform collimator
calibration to resolve this
problem.)
1. Don't follow calibration
procedure to perform
calibration. (Reboot system
and Login Service Interface,
directly perform collimator
calibration to resolve this
problem.)
MCB serial port writes to

WKS fault.
1. MCB may be abnormal.
2. Motherboard may be
abnormal.
3. Cable connection may be
abnormal
6-11
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0113500
Warning
0113501
Warning
0113502
Warning
WKS message
buffer overflow
0113503
Warning
sendMessage
from MF to
WKS time out
0113504
Warning
RCC-UART Tx
buffer overflow
0113505
Warning
Mainframe not
finds WKS in 4
minutes after
system boot up
6-12
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Mainframe
comservo
protocol is
incompatible
with WKS
comservo
protocol
RCC time out
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Communication protocol
stopped.\nPlease call for
service.
1. WKS and MF version may

be not compatible.

Serial communication
between WKS and MF
failure:
1.Bundle cable may be
abnormal.
2. Cable connection
between WKS computer
serial port and
motherboard may be
abnormal.
3. WKS computer serial port
may be abnormal.


Serial communication
between WKS and MF
failure:
abnormal.
2. Cable connection
between WKS computer
serial port and
motherboard may be
abnormal.
3. WKS computer serial port
may be abnormal.
(Just displayed on MF
control panel) Serial port
communication failure
between WKS and MF.
1. Bundle cable may be
abnormal
2.WKS computer serial port
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
0113506
Warning
Ping time out
0114001
Warning
Camera serial
port UART write
fault
0114500
Warning
0114501
Warning
Camera serial
port
transmission
buffer overflow
Camera serial
port RCC time
out
0114502
Warning
0115001
Warning
0115002
Warning
Camera serial
port
unexpected
data error
Flash erase
fault during
calibration
Flash erase
fault when
saving product
information
Message
Cant detect the workstation.

The mainframe
Camera control exception. The

Calibration data save
Diagnosis Reference
connection may be
abnormal
3.WKS computer serial port
may be abnormal.
4.Mother Board serial port
connection may be
abnormal
5.WKS boot up failure
MF receive Ping frame time
interval more than 2s
1.WKS software may be
abnormal.
Communication between
MCB and camera failure
2.Camera may be abnormal
3.Motherboard may be
abnormal
abnormal
Camera communication
protocol issue
1.Camera may be
abnormal.
Flash erase fault during
calibration
1.MCB
6-13
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0115003
Warning
0115004
Warning
Flash write fault

during beam
alignment
0115005
Warning
Flash erase
fault during
Collimator
calibration
0115006
Warning
Flash write fault

during DAP
calibration
0117001
Warning
KV is not
accurate
0117002
Warning
MA is not
accurate
0117003
Warning
MA is very low
(<0.05ma)
0117004
Warning
MA is very
high(>23.5ma)
0117005
Warning
0117006
Warning
6-14
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Flash write fault
during MA
calibration
Message
Diagnosis Reference
KV feedback
channel SPI is
abnormal

System execution
exception.\nPlease try again. If
this issue persists, please call
for service.
System execution
for service.
System execution
for service.
System execution
for service.
MA feedback
channel SPI is
abnormal
Flash write fault during DAP

calibration
Redo KV calibration
Redo mA calibration
Redo mA calibration
Redo mA calibration
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Little MA
feedback
channel SPI is
abnormal
KV feedback
channel SPI Tx
time out
KV feedback
channel SPI Rx
time out
Preheat MA
feedback
channel SPI Tx
time out
Preheat MA
feedback
channel SPI Rx
time out
Little MA
feedback
channel SPI Tx
time out
Little MA
feedback
channel SPI Rx
time out
MAS output is
over limit
0117007
Warning
0117008
Warning
0117009
Warning
0117010
Warning
0117011
Warning
0117012
Warning
0117013
Warning
0117014
Warning
0117800
Warning
Preheat MA is
not calibrated
0118001
Warning
0118800
Warning
Xray leakage is
detected when
there is no
exposure
Exposure is
disabled
because the
room door is
opened
Message
Diagnosis Reference
1. MCB maybe abnormal

2.mA feedback is abnormal,
recheck mA accuracy.
System execution
for service.
N/A
Room door open. Exposure is

disabled.\nPlease close the
door to enable exposure.
N/A

Maybe Monoblock
grounding issue.
6-15
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Exposure is
automatically
terminated as
the limit of
9'30" for one
shot is reached
Accumulated
exposure
display time is
longer than
99.9 minutes.
Mainframe
cant display
rightly
accumulated
exposure time.
9'30" exposure
time limit will
be reached in
30"
Priority II
message buffer
overflow
0118801
Warning
0118802
Warning
0118803
Warning
0119500
Warning
STOP0032
768
Warning
WKS error
before MF boot
up
0205501
Error
Allocate
memory failed
0205502
Error
0205503
0205504
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Limit of maximum 9'30" for one

shot reached. Exposure is
terminated.
N/A
Accumulated fluoro time

longer than 99.9 minutes. This
exceeds mainframe fluoro time
display capacity.\nPlease press
and hold Alarm key to reset the
accumulated exposure time.
N/A
Limit of maximum 9'30" for one

shot will be reached in 30s.
Exposure will be terminated
then.
Just display on Mainframe
Control Panel
N/A
Check memory using state
Allocate shared
memory
segment failed
Run out of memory.\nPlease

Memory exception.\nPlease
Error
Attach shared
memory
segment failed
Memory exception.\nPlease
Error
Initialize and
open a named
semaphore
failed
Semaphore exception.\nPlease
MCU abnormal, MCB may

be abnormal.
There is calibration data in
MCB, but WKS didn't
configure product model
Imaging
6-16
Check if there exists some

unwanted share memory in
the system, or check if
software is installed
correctly.
correctly.
unwanted semaphore in
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
Diagnosis Reference
correctly.
0205505
Error
Post a
semaphore
failed
0205506
Warning
FIFO is full
0205507
Warning
Load IP
configuration
file failed
0205508
Warning
Load setup
configuration
file failed
0205509
Error
Init critical
section failed
0205510
Error
Lock critical
section failed
0205511
Error
Unlock critical
section failed
0205512
Warning
Init Xkey lock

failed
0205513
Warning
Set Xkey lock

failed
Image FIFO full. The mainframe

IP configuration exception.
Image quality may be
affected.\nPlease restart the
Setup configuration exception.
Some system setting may be
missed.\nPlease restart the
Image processing LEDs on
keyboard display exception.
The display may be
abnormal.\n Please ensure no
key is pressed on keyboard,
then press Auto B/C key and
Negate key. If this issue
Image processing LEDs on
keyboard display exception.
The display may be
abnormal.\n Please ensure no
key is pressed on keyboard,
then press Auto B/C key and
Check if the semaphore is

valid, or check if the
maximum allowable value
for the semaphore will be
exceeded.
Check CPU affairenite and
thread priority. Complied
SW version (Debug or
Release)
Check if IP configuration file
crashed
Check if Setup configuration

file crashed
System unknown error

Check system IO state and
keyboard connection
Check system IO state, and

keyboard connection
6-17
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Negate key. If this issue

0205514
Error
Create thread
failed
0205515
Error
Start thread
failed
0205517
Error
Register CORBA
servant failed
0205518
Error
Register CORBA
sync notify
servant failed
0205519
Warning
Unregister
CORBA servant
failed
0205520
Error
Subscribe sync
event failed
0205521
Error
Unsubscribe
sync event
failed
0205522
Error
Resolve CORBA
object in name
service failed
0205523
Error
Invoke CORBA
interface failed
0205524
Warning
Read IQ param
failed, the value
is over limit
6-18
Execution thread
exception.\nPlease restart the
Execution thread
Workstation communication
closing exception.\nPlease
Image processing parameter
over limit. Image quality may
be affected.\nPlease restart
Make sure if omniNames

service failed, any module
initialization failed
make sure if omniNames
service failed,
CorbaEventChannel
service failed, check
omniOrb log file
service failed,
CorbaEventChannel
service failed,
CorbaEventChannel
crashed
crashed
check IQ config file
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Write IQ
parameters
failed
Message
0205525
Warning
0201501
Warning
Start callback
failure
0201502
Warning
End callback
failure
Image acquisition exception.

System cant take exposure.
The mainframe
0201503
Warning
Init camera
buffer failed

The mainframe
0201504
Warning
Open camera
failed

The mainframe
Image processing parameter

save failure. Image quality may
be affected.\nPlease restart
The mainframe
Diagnosis Reference
check IQ config file
Start capture failed.

1. Gige camera may be
abnormal
2. If LED on ethnet interface
is not flicker, please infix the
net line into ethnet interface
again or change another
net line.
3. If all above methods cant
fix the exception, please reinstall software.
End capture failed.
1. Gige camera may be
abnormal
net line.
End capture failed.
1. If Gige camera is not
working correctly, please
change camera.
net line.
End capture failed.
change camera.
6-19
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
0201505
Warning
Load driver
configuration
file failed
Camera driver exception.

The mainframe
0201506
Warning
Get driver
thread failed
Camera driver exception.

The mainframe
0201507
Warning
Set capture
thread priority
failed

The mainframe
0201508
Warning
Set capture
thread CPU
affinity failed

The mainframe
6-20
Diagnosis Reference
net line.
End capture failed.
change camera.
net line.
End capture failed.
change camera.
net line.
End capture failed.
change camera.
net line.
End capture failed.
change camera.
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
0201509
Warning
Camera
network lost
Camera disconnected. System

cant start exposure. The
0201510
Warning
Init camera
callback failed

The mainframe
0201511
Warning
Camera
callback time
out
Camera disconnected. System

cant start exposure. The
0202501
Error
Allocate
memory failed

The mainframe
Diagnosis Reference
net line.
End capture failed.
change camera.
net line.
End capture failed.
change camera.
net line.
Check network connect; reinstall software.
End capture failed.

change camera.
net line.
6-21
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
0202502
Warning
Read shading
template failed
0202503
Warning
Write shading
template failed
0202504
Warning
Load shading
calibration
failure
0203501
Error
Allocate
memory failed
0204501
Error
Open XDisplay
failed
0204502
Error
Create display
context failed
0204503
Error
Create display
window failed
0204505
Warning
Load font
resource failed
0204506
Warning
Load icon file

failed
0204507
Error
Allocate
memory failed
6-22
Message
Shading parameter loading

failure. Image quality may be
impacted.\nPlease restart the
Shading parameter saves
exception. The parameter was
not saved.\nPlease re-calibrate
shading.
Load shading calibration data
failure. Image quality may be
affected.\nPlease restart the
Failed to find the display
device. Images cant be
displayed.\nPlease restart the
Display driver exception. Image
cant be displayed.\nPlease
Display driver exception. Image
cant be displayed.\nPlease
Font not installed correctly.
Text on left monitor may be
abnormal.\nPlease restart the
System Icon files loading
failure. Some icons may be
Diagnosis Reference
Template file are not
deployed corrected.
Disk is full or directory has

no permission to write.
make sure monitor

connection, if display driver
installed correctly
make sure display driver
installed correctly
make sure display driver
installed correctly
make sure Torch font
installed correctly
check if icon file crashed
check memory using state
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Application
0306501
Warning
Load
connectivity
XML failed
Connectivity configuration
loading failure. Some
configuration may be
1. Restart the system.

2. If not work, re-install
Workstation software.
0306502
Warning
Get text
resource failed
Get text resource failure.

Application display may be

0306503
Warning
Enconter
undefined
exception
Undefined exception.\nPlease

3. If not work, re-install OS.
0306504
Warning
Init
AbandonReaso
n.xml file failed
Abandon Reason loading

failure. Abandon Exam
function will be

0306505
Warning
Load abandon
reason list
failed
Abandon Reason loading

failure. Abandon Exam
function will be

0306506
Warning
Load DICOM
printer list
failed
loading failure. DICOM printer
list missed.\nPlease restart the

0306507
Warning
Load setup
configuration
file failed
Setup configuration loading

failure. Some setting may be

0306508
Warning
Load exam list

option failed

failure. Exam list display setting
6-23
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
Diagnosis Reference
0306509
Warning
Load default
MPPS server
failed
loading failure. Default MPPS
server setting missed.\nPlease

0306510
Warning
Load DICOM
storage server
failed
loading failure. Storage server
setting missed.\nPlease restart

0306511
Warning
Read local AE
title failed
loading failure. Local AE title

0306513
Warning
Read MWL
server list failed
loading failure. Worklist server

0306514
Warning
Read MWL
server query
filter failed
loading failure. Worklist query
filter setting missed.\nPlease

0306515
Warning
Load dose
summary icon
failed
Dose summary icon loading

failure. Display may be

0306516
Error
ImageDirectory
module register
OSGI service
exception

0306517
Error
Call
DatabaseMana
gement service
failed

6-24
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0306518
Error
0306519
Error
0306520
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Call
ImageStorage
service failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference

Call
CurrentExam
service failed

Error
Call
MediaManage
ment service
failed

0306521
Error
Subscribe event
failed

0306522
Error
Bind name
service object
failed

0306523
Warning
Failed to load
Exposure config
file
Exposure configuration loading

exception. Some configuration
may be missed.\nPlease

0306524
Warning
Get dose
summary
modality type
failed
Get Dose summary modality

setting failed.\nPlease restart

0306525
Warning
Setup CD/DVD
for importing
image failed
Import images from CD/DVD

for service.

0306026
Warning
Get string failed
Loading message fail.\nPlease

0306527
Error
ImageDirectory
module get
OSGI service
exception
6-25
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0306528
Warning
0306529
Error
ImageDirectory
module
unregister OSGI
service
exception
0304501
Warning
Start exam
exception
Open Exam Management

failure.\nPlease restart the
0304510
Warning
Init
XmlFileParseUtil
ity for
ConnectivitySet
up.xml failed

0304511
Warning
Set current
exam to
Imaging Engine
failed
Set current exam


0304512
Warning
Delete image
by exam tco
failed
Delete exam
for service.

0304513
Warning
Get text
resource failed


0304514
Warning
Load
connectivity
configuration
file fail

0304516
Warning
Load default
storage server
failed
Connectivity configuration file

loading exception. Default
storage server setting is

6-26
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Stop
application
exception
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Close ImageDirectory
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
Diagnosis Reference

0304517
Warning
Init exam list

option failed

failure. Exam list display setting
0304518
Warning
Init height &

weight unit
failed

failure. Weight/Height units

0304519
Warning
Init default
MPPS server
failed
loading failure. Default MPPS
server setting missed.\nPlease

0304520
Warning
Init MWL server

list failed
loading failure. Worklist server

0304521
Warning
Load anatomic
region
configuration
file failed
Anatomic Regions list


0304523
Warning
Init date & time

format failed

failure. Date/Time format
setting missed.\nPlease restart
0304524
Warning
Get string failed

0304525
Warning
Stop
ExamManagem
ent failed
Stop ExamManagement
failed.\nPlease restart the
6-27
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0304526
Error
0304527
Error
ExamManagem
ent module get
OSGI service
exception
0304528
Error
ExamManagem
ent module
unregister OSGI
service
exception
0304529
Warning
Stop
application
exception
Close ExamManagement
0312501
Warning
Encounter
undefined
exception

0312502
Error
Get system
engine servant
failed

0312503
Error
Subscribe event
failed

0312504
Error
MiniImageDirec
tory module
register CORBA
servant
exception

0312505
Error
Unsubscribe
sync event
failed

6-28
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
ExamManagem
ent module
register OSGI
service
exception
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0312506
Error
0312507
Error
0312508
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Subscribe
CORBA event
failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference

Unsubscribe
CORBA event
failed

Warning
MiniImageDirec
tory module get
OSGI service
exception

0312509
Warning
Get image
management
servant failed

0312510
Error
MiniImageDirec
tory module
register OSGI
service
exception
0312511
Error
MiniImageDirec
tory module
unregister OSGI
service
exception
0312512
Error
MiniImageDirec
tory module
unregister
CORBA servant
exception
0301501
Warning
Get image and

overlay from IE
failed
exception. Cant get image and
overlay from the left
monitor.\nPlease restart the

0301502
Warning
Set annotation
to IE failed
exception. Cant set annotation
data to the left

6-29
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
Diagnosis Reference
0301503
Warning
Set crop to IE
failed
exception. Cant set crop to the
left monitor.\nPlease restart

0301504
Error
Annotation
module register
servant
exception

0301505
Error
Annotation
module
subscribe sync
event exception

0301506
Error
Annotation
module
unsubscribe
sync event
exception

0301507
Error
Annotation
module
unregister
servant
exception

0301508
Warning
Init annotation
controller failed
Annotation init

0301509
Warning
Parse image or
overlay data
failed
Parse image or overlay

exception. Cant display the
image or overlay.\nPlease

0301510
Warning
Stop
application
exception
Close Annotation

6-30
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Start
application
exception
Message
Diagnosis Reference
0301511
Warning
0301512
Warning
Stop
application
exception
Close Annotation
0301513
Error
Annotation
module get
OSGI service
exception
0307501
Warning
Get image and

overlay from IE
failed
overlay from the left

0307502
Warning
Get
measurement
information
from IE failed
exception. Cant get
measurement parameters
from the left monitor.\nPlease

0307503
Warning
Set
measurement
to IE failed
exception. Cant set
measurement data to the left

0307504
Warning
Set
measurement
unit to IE failed
exception. Cant set
measurement unit to the left

0307505
Warning
Set calibration
to IE failed
exception. Cant set
measurement calibration data
to the left monitor.\nPlease

Open Annotation
6-31
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0307506
Warning
0307507
Error
0307508
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Do calibration
exception
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Calibration exception.\nPlease
try again. If this issue persists,

Measurement
module register
servant
exception

Error
Measurement
module
subscribe sync
event exception

0307509
Error
Measurement
module
unsubscribe
sync event
exception

0307510
Error
Measurement
module
unregister
servant
exception

0307511
Warning
Init
measurement
controller failed
Measurement init

0307512
Warning
Parse image or
overlay
exception
Parse image or overlay

exception. Cant display the
image or overlay.\nPlease

0307513
Warning
Stop bundle
exception
Close Measurement

0307514
Warning
Start
measurement
exception
Open Measurement
6-32
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Stop
measurement
exception
Message
Diagnosis Reference
0307515
Warning
0307516
Warning
Get string failed

0307517
Warning
Get resource
bundle failed

0307518
Error
Measurement
module get
OSGI service
exception
0307519
Warning
Stop
application
exception
Close Measurement
0310501
Warning
Get image and

zoom
information
from IE failed
zoom roam data from the left

0310502
Warning
Set zoom to IE
failed
exception. Cant set zoom
roam data to the left

0310503
Error
ZoomRoam
module register
servant
exception

0310504
Error
ZoomRoam
module
subscribe sync
event exception

Close Measurement
6-33
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0310505
Error
0310506
Warning
0310507
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
ZoomRoam
module
unsubscribe
sync event
exception
Message
Diagnosis Reference

ZoomRoam
module
unregister
servant
exception

Warning
Init zoom
controller
exception
Zoom Roam init


0310508
Warning
Parse data
exception
Parse Zoom Roam data

exception. Display may be

0310509
Warning
Stop
application
exception
Close Zoom Roam


0310510
Warning
Start
zoomroam
exception
Open Zoom Roam

0310511
Warning
Stop zoomroam Close Zoom Roam

exception
0310512
Warning
Get string failed

0310513
Error
ZoomRoam
module get
OSGI service
exception
6-34
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Get resource
bundle failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference
0310514
Warning
0311501
Warning
Read
configuration
file failed
Configuration loading
system.
Re install software or import

configure file
0311502
Warning
Write
configuration
file failed
Configuration save failure.

Some configuration may be
lost.\nPlease restart the
system.
Re install software or import

configure file
0311503
Error
Administration
module register
servant
exception
system.
Re install software
0311504
Error
CORBA
communication
failed
system.
Re install software
0311505
Error
Administration
module
subscribe sync
event exception
system.
Re install software
0311507
Error
Thread
operation failed
restart the system.
Re install software
0311508
Error
Administration
module register
OSGI service
exception
system.
Re install software
0311509
Error
OSGI
communication
failed
system.
Re install software
0311510
Error
Get authority
failed
Load account data

system.
Re install software

6-35
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0311511
Warning
0311512
Warning
0311514
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Get filter status
failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Cant get the filter option's

status.\nPlease restart the
system.
Re install software
Get mainframe
status failed
Cant get the mainframe

connection status.\nPlease
restart the system.
Re install software
Error
Register CORBA
notify failed
system.
Re install software
0311519
Warning
File operation
exception
File operation
exception.\nPlease retry. If this
issue persists, please restart
the system.
Re install software
0311520
Warning
Execute
command
failed
System execution
for service.
Re install software
0311521
Warning
Delete image
from database
failed
Delete image from database

system.
Re install software
0311522
Warning
Check license
failed
Check product license

system.
Re install software
0311523
Warning
Set product
name failed
Configure product failure. The

product configuration will not
be saved.\nPlease restart the
system.
Re install software
0311524
Warning
Export
configuration
file failed
Export configuration file

failure.\nPlease check if the
USB disk is writable and has
enough space, or change a
disk.
Re install software
0311525
Warning
Import
configuration
file failed
Import configuration file

system.
Re install software
6-36
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0311526
Warning
0311528
Warning
0311530
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Export log files
failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Export log files failure.\nPlease

check if the USB disk is writable
and has enough space, or
change a disk.
Re install software
Delete option
failed
Delete option failure.\nPlease

retry. If this issue persistes,
please restart the system.
Re install software
Warning
Import license
file failed
Import license file

failure.\nPlease retry. If this
issue persists, please change a
USB disk.
Re install software
0311531
Warning
Export license
file failed
Export license file

disk.
Re install software
0311532
Warning
Read log failed
Open log failure.\nPlease retry.

If this issue persists, restart the
system.
Re install software
0311534
Warning
Copy file failed
Copy file failure.\nPlease retry.

If this issue persists, please
restart the system.
Re install software
0311535
Warning
Boot up
terminal failed
Open terminal failure.\nPlease

restart the system.
Re install software
0311536
Warning
Get un-finalized
image failed
Search unfinalized image

system.
Re install software
0311537
Warning
Perform
calibration
failed
Calibration failure.\nPlease
retry. If this issue persists,
Re install software
0311539
Warning
Calculated
Dose or DAP
coefficient
failed
Dose or DAP coefficient

calculation exception. Please
0311540
Warning
Compress
folder failed
Compress file failure.\nPlease

6-37
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0311541
Warning
0311542
Warning
Get resource
bundle failed

0311543
Error
Administration
module get
OSGI service
exception
0311544
Error
Administration
module
unregister OSGI
service
exception
0311545
Error
Administration
module
unregister
servant
exception
0311546
Error
Administration
module
unsubscribe
sync event
exception
0309500
Warning
Setup.xml does
not exist

check if configuration file

crashed
0309501
Warning
Setup
Default.xml
does not exist
Default Setup configuration

loading failure.\nPlease restart
check if default
configuration file crashed
0309502
Warning
ConnectivitySet
up.xml is not
exist
loading failure. Please restart
check if Dicom
6-38
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Get string failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference

Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Message
Description
(In system Log)
ConnectivitySet Default connectivity
upDefault.xml is configuration loading
not exist
Diagnosis Reference
0309503
Warning
0309504
Warning
Administration.
xml is not exist
Administration configuration
check if admin
0309505
Warning
ExposureContro Exposure control configuration

l.xml is not exist file loading failure.\nPlease
check if exposure
0309506
Warning
SwBuild.xml is
not exist
Software version access


0309507
Warning
SerialNumber.x
ml is not exist
Serial number access


0309508
Warning
Start setup
exception
Open Setup exception.\nPlease

system unknown error
0309509
Warning
Stop setup
exception
Close Setup exception.\nPlease

0309510
Warning
Read
configuration
file failed

crashed
0309511
Warning
Init tab page

controller failed
Runtime exception.\nPlease
0309512
Warning
Read serial
number from
bios failed
Workstation hardware version

access exception. Hardware
information cant be
displayed.\nPlease restart the

check if default Dicom

6-39
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
Diagnosis Reference
0309513
Error
Register CORBA
service failed

0309514
Error
Unregister
CORBA service
failed

omniOrb log file
0309515
Error
CORBA sync
notify failed

service failed,
CorbaEventChannel
0309516
Error
Subscribe sync
event failed

service failed,
CorbaEventChannel
0309517
Error
Unsubscribe
sync event
failed

service failed,
CorbaEventChannel
0309518
Error
CORBA async
notify failed

and notifd service failed,
CorbaEventChannel
0309519
Error
Subscribe
async event
failed

CorbaEventChannel
0309520
Error
Unsubscribe
async event
failed

CorbaEventChannel
0309521
Error
CORBA
communication
failed

crashed
6-40
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0309522
Warning
0309523
Warning
0309524
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Parse
configuration
file failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Configuraiton loading
exception. Some configuration
may be missed.\nPlease

(Admin/Exposure
contorl..)crashed
Export
configuration
file failed, no
enough space
or no
permission
Export configuration
disk.
Warning
Export log file

failed, no
enough space
or no
permission
Export log files failure.\nPlease

check if the USB disk is writable
and has enough space, or
change a disk.
0309525
Warning
Create folder
failed, no
enough space
or no
permission
Export log files

exception.\nPlease retry. If this
issue persists, please restart
the system.
IO error or disk error
0309526
Warning
Delete folder
failed
Operation exception.\nPlease
retry. If this issues, please
restart the system.
IO error or disk error
0309527
Warning
Network
change failed
Network monitoring
0309528
Warning
Execute Ping
failed
Ping failed.\nPlease check

network setting and ensure
network available. And retry.
0309529
Warning
Compress
Folder for Log
Export failed
Export log failure.\nPlease

0309530
Warning
Get string failed

6-41
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0309531
Warning
0309532
Error
Setup module
get OSGI
service
exception
0309533
Warning
Stop
application
exception
Close Setup exception.\nPlease

0309534
Warning
Multi language
package is not
installed
Multi language package is not

installed.\nPlease restart the
0309535
Warning
Multi language
package does
not support
current
language
setting
Multi language package does

not support current language
setting.\nPlease restart the
0308501
Get string failed

0308502
Warning
Get resource
bundle failed

0308503
Warning
Set mode to
Mcb failed
0308504
Error
ModeSetup
module register
OSGI service
exception
0308505
Error
ModeSetup
module get
OSGI service
exception
6-42
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Get resource
bundle failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
ModeSetup
module
unregister OSGI
service
exception
Message
0308506
Error
0308507
Warning
Stop
application
exception
Close Modesetup
0313501
Get string failed

0313502
Warning
Get resource
bundle failed

0313503
Error
QueryRetrieve
module get
OSGI service
exception
0313504
Warning
Stop
application
exception
Close QueryRetrieve
Diagnosis Reference
Infrastructure
0406501
Error
Application
configuration
file is empty
Application configuration
loading exception.\nPlease

Re-install workstation
software.
0406502
Error
Start
application
failed
Application start

0406503
Warning
Stop
application
failed
Application stop failed.\nPlease


6-43
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0406504
Error
0406505
Error
0406506
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Get bundle
failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Module access failed.\nPlease


Desktop
module Invoke
corba service
exception
System start failed.\nPlease


Error
Desktop
module register
servant
exception

0406507
Error
Init locale
property failed
UI locale exception.\nPlease

0406508
Warning
Get text
resource failed


0406509
Warning
Activate screen
saver failed
Screen saver activiation


0406510
Warning
Simulate key
input failed
Screen saver

0406511
Warning
Refresh screen
saver failed
Refresh screen saver


0406512
Warning
Load setup
configuration
file failed

exception. Some setup may be

6-44
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0406513
Warning
0406514
Warning
0406515
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Write screen
saver
configuration
file failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Screen saver configuration

save failed. The screen saver
configuration will be
lost.\nPlease restart the

Load security
configuration
file failed
Security configuration loading


Warning
Update security
configuration
file failed
Update security configuration

file failed. Some seeting may
be lost.\nPlease restart the

0406516
Error
Desktop
module register
OSGI service
exception

0406517
Error
Desktop
module
unregister
servant
exception

0406518
Error
Desktop
module
subscribe sync
event exception

0406519
Error
Desktop
module
unsubscribe
sync event
exception

0406521
Error
Load
application
configuration
file failed
Application configuration

0406522
Warning
Load mode
setup
configuration
file failed
Mode Setup configuration


6-45
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0406523
Error
0406525
Warning
0406526
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Desktop
module resolve
object
exception
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Workstation communicaiton

OSGI
encryption
failed
Account encryption exception.

Account password cant be
authenticated.\nPlease restart

Warning
Dose exceeds
customized
threshold
Dose exceeded the threshold.
0406527
Warning
Load
administration
configuration
file failed
loading exception. Some

0406529
Warning
Encounter
undefined
exception

0406531
Warning
Restart screen
saver failed
Restart screen saver


0406532
Warning
Load
Product.xml
failed
Product configuration loading

exception.\nSome

0406533
Warning
Get string failed

0406534
Error
Desktop
module get
OSGI service
exception
6-46
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Desktop
module
unregister OSGI
service
exception
Message
Diagnosis Reference
0406535
Error
0411501
Error
Allocate
memory failed
System run out of

memory.\nPlease restart the
0411502
Error
Allocate shared
memory
segment failed
System shared memory

There may exist some

the system, or the caller
have no permission.
0411503
Error
Attach shared
memory
segment failed
System shared memory

Attaches the shared

memory segment identified
by shmid to the address
space of the calling process
failed.
0411504
Error
Init and open a

named
semaphore
failed
The open file numbers

limited by the system or the
process may be reached, or
the caller have no
permission.
0411505
Error
Post a
semaphore
failed
Invalid semaphore or the

for a semaphore would be
exceeded.
0411506
Error
Init critical
section failed
Critical section
0411507
Error
Lock critical
section failed
Critical section
0411508
Error
Unlock critical
section failed
Critical section
6-47
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0411510
Error
0411512
Warning
0411513
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Execution thread
Cancel thread
failed
Execution thread
Warning
Open image file

failed
Image file open

File crashed or no
permission
0411514
Warning
Read data from

image file failed
Image file read failure.\nPlease

File crashed or no
permission
0411515
Warning
Write image
data to file
failed
Image file write

File crashed or no
permission
0411516
Warning
Close image
file failed
Image file close

File crashed or no
permission
0411517
Warning
Delete image
file failed
Image file delete

No permission
0411518
Warning
Create image
file failed
Image file create

No permission or no
enough space on disk
0411519
Warning
Move image file

failed
Image file move

File crashed or no
permission
6-48
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Create thread
failed
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0411520
Error
0411522
Error
0411527
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
IM module
register servant
exception
Message
Diagnosis Reference

IM module
unregister
servant
exception

omniOrb log file
Error
IM module
resolve object
exception

crashed
0411528
Error
IM module
Invoke corba
service
exception

crashed
0411529
Warning
FIFO is full
Image FIFO full. Image display

refreshing may be
slow.\nPlease restart the
Check CPU affairenite and

thread priority. Complied
SW version (Debug or
Release)
0411531
Warning
Create
directory failed
System file operation

file crashed or no
permission
0411532
Error
IM module
syncNotify
event exception
0411533
Error
IM module
asyncNotify
event exception
0411801
Warning
System's image
capacity reach
limit
The image cant be saved.

Image storage capacity limit of
100,000 images
reached.\nPlease delete
useless or out-of-date images
to make disk space for new
images.
remove some images
6-49
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0411802
Warning
0403501
Error
DTR sets locale

failed
System start failure. Set locale

failed. Please restart the
0403502
Error
DTR reports
ready failed
System start failed.\nPlease

0403503
Warning
DTR parse
retrieved image
failed
Parse retrieved image

failure.\nPlease try again. If this
service.
0403504
Warning
DTR gets exam

information
failed
Parse exam information of raw

images failure.\nPlease try
again. If this issue persists,
0403505
Warning
DTR creates
RDSR object
failed
Create DICOM RDSR

service.
0403506
Warning
DTR creates
DICOM file
setup failed
Create DICOM file

for service.
0403507
Warning
DTR creates
DICOM file start
failed
Create DICOM file

for service.
0403508
Warning
DTR imports
raw image
setup failed
Import raw image

for service.
6-50
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Exam's image
capacity reach
limit
Message
9999 images for each exam
reached. No more images can
be saved under the
exam.\nPlease delete some
useless images if you want to
save new images of the exam.
Diagnosis Reference
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
DTR imports
raw image start
exception
Message
0403509
Warning
0403511
Warning
DTR imports
raw image
process failed
Import raw image

for service.
0403512
Warning
DTR creates
DICOM file
process failed
Create DICOM file

for service.
0403513
Warning
DTR creates
DICOMDIR
process failed
Create DICOMDIR file

for service.
0403514
Warning
DTR creates
DICOMDIR
setup failed

for service.
0403515
Warning
DTR creates
DICOMDIR start
failed

for service.
0403516
Warning
DTR creates
DICOMDIR
teardown
exception

for service.
0403517
Warning
DTR creates
DICOM file
teardown
exception
Create DICOM file

for service.
0403518
Warning
DTR imports
raw image
teardown
exception
Import raw image

for service.
Diagnosis Reference
Import raw image

for service.
6-51
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0403519
Error
0403520
Error
DTR module
Invoke corba
service
exception
0403521
Error
DTR module
register servant
exception
0403522
Error
DTR module
unregister
servant
exception
0405501
Warning
SCU prints
image failed
DICOM print failure.\nPlease

make sure the network and
DICOM printer configuration
are correct, and the printer is
available. And try again. If this
service.
Check DICM configuration.
0405502
Warning
SCU performs
echo operation
failed
Verify the DICOM server

failure.\nPlease make sure the
network and DICOM server
configuration are correct, and
the server is available. And try
0405503
Warning
SCU performs
MPPS operation
failed
Report MPPS failure.\nPlease

MPPS server configuration are
correct, and the server is
service.
0405504
Warning
SCU performs
MWL operation
failed
Worklist query failure.\nPlease

worklist server configuration
are correct, and the server is
6-52
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
DTR module
resolve object
exception
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
Diagnosis Reference

service.
0405505
Warning
SCU performs
query operation
failed
DICOM query failure.\nPlease

Q&R server configuration are
service.
0405506
Warning
SCU performs
retrieve
operation failed
DICOM retrieve failure.\nPlease

Q&R server configuration are
service.
0405507
Warning
SCU performs
storage
commitment
failed
DICOM storage commitment

failure.\nPlease make sure the
network and storage
commitment server
configuration are correct, and
the server is available. And try
0405508
Warning
SCU performs
storage
operation failed
DICOM storage failure.\nPlease

storage server configuration
are correct, and the server is
service.
0405509
Error
SCU sets locale

failed

0405510
Error
SCU reports
ready failed
System start failure.\nPlease


crashed
0405701
Error
SCU module
resolve object
exception

crashed
6-53
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
Diagnosis Reference
please call for service
0405702
Error
SCU module
Invoke corba
service
exception

crashed
0405703
Error
SCU creates
thread failed
Execution thread
0405704
Warning
SCU cancels
thread failed
Cancel execution thread

0405705
Error
SCU allocates
memory failed
System run out of

0405706
Error
SCU module
register servant
exception

0405707
Warning
SCU module
register servant
exception

crashed
0405708
Error
SCU inits a
semaphore
failed
0405709
Error
SCU module
unregister
servant
exception
0407501
Error
MM module
resolve object
exception
6-54

initialization failed.
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0407502
Error
0407503
Warning
0407504
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
MM module
Invoke corba
service
exception
Message
Diagnosis Reference

omniOrb log file.
Cancel thread
failed
Cancel execution thread

System error: cant cancel a

thread.
Error
MM module
register servant
exception

omniOrb log file.
0407505
Error
Init semaphore
failed
Check if the semaphore is

valid, or check if the
for the semaphore will be
exceeded.
0407506
Error
Set locale failed

failed. Please restart the
System error. Call to

setlocal() function failed.
0407507
Error
Allocate
memory failed
System run out of

Check memory using state.
0407508
Warning
Enumerate
devices failed
Enumerate devices
System error: cant

enumerate devices.
0407512
Warning
Run makeisofs
script failed
Create CD/DVD file

exception.\nPlease retry or
insert another disk. If this issue
Make sure the makeisofs

script is the exact version
that is shipped with
product.
0407514
Warning
Run synccopy
script failed
Copy to USB disk

exception.\nPlease check the
USB disk or replace with
another disk. If this issue
Make sure the synccopy

script is the exact version
that is shipped with
product.
6-55
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0407516
Error
0407517
Error
0407519
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Start
application
failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference
System module init

Make sure there is enough

memory and the udev
library is correctly installed.
Report ready
failed
System start failed,

MediaManagement report
ready failed. Please restart the
Application cant be booted,

contact service.
Warning
Run command
failed
System command execution

failed.\nPlease try again. If this
service.
System error. Call to system

function failed.
0407521
Warning
Print head
temperature
exception
Print head temperature

local printer and retry. If this
service.
Check the temperature for

the printer.
0407522
Warning
Printer paper
feed error
Paper feed error.\nPlease take

the paper out of printer and
put it in again. If this issue
Get the paper out of printer

and put it in.
0407523
Warning
Printer is not
initialized
Printer is not ready.\nPlease

make sure the printer is wellconnected and already turned
on. And then try again. If this
service.
Make sure the printer has

been initialized.
0407524
Error
MM module
unregister
servant
exception
0407525
Error
MM module
asyncNotify
event exception
0407800
Warning
Export images
to CD/DVD
failed
Export to CD/DVD failure. Disk

is write protected or there is no
enough space.\nPlease replace
the disk and try again.\nIf this
6-56
Make sure the disc is

writable and there is
enough space.
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
Diagnosis Reference
service.
0407801
Warning
Export images
to USB failed
Export to USB failure.\nPlease

make sure the disk is well
plugged, not write protected,
and has enough space. And
then try again.\nIf this issue
Make sure the USB disk is

well connected and is
writable, do have enough
space.
0407802
Warning
Print image
failed
Print image failure.\nPlease

make sure the printer is ready
for print and try again.\nIf this
service.
Print error: the print job

cant be finished, please
check the log file for more.
0407803
Warning
Import data
from the disc
failed
Import data from the disk

failure.\nPlease retry or insert
another disk. If this issue
Please insert another disc.
0402502
Warning
Insert exam
failed
Insert exam failure.\nPlease try

Please call for service.
0402504
Warning
Insert image
failed
Insert image failure.\nPlease

try again. If this issue persists,
0402505
Warning
Update exam
failed
Update exam information

issue persists, Please call for
service.
0402507
Warning
Update image
failed
Update image information

service.
0402509
Warning
DB undefined
exception is
caught
Undefined exception
encountered.\nPlease try
6-57
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0402510
Warning
0402511
Warning
Delete row
from DB failed
Delete information from DB

service.
0402512
Warning
Update row in
DB failed
Update information
service.
0402513
Warning
Search exam
row in DB failed
Query exam information from

DB failure.\nPlease try again. If
this issue persists, Please call
for service.
0402515
Warning
Search image
row in DB failed
Query image information from

DB failure.\nPlease try again. If
this issue persists, Please call
for service.
0402517
Warning
Insert row
failed
Insert information
service.
0402518
Error
DatabaseMana
gement module
register servant
exception
0402519
Error
DatabaseMana
gement module
unregister
servant
exception
0402520
Error
DatabaseMana
gement module
resolve object
exception
0402521
Error
DatabaseMana
gement module
Invoke corba
service
6-58
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Search row in
DB failed
Message
Query information from DB
service.
Diagnosis Reference
For example: updateExam()
1. getExam(examId);--> not
found;
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
exception
Message
Diagnosis Reference
0402522
Error
DatabaseMana
gement module
register OSGI
service
exception
0402523
Error
DatabaseMana
gement module
get OSGI
service
exception
0402524
Error
DatabaseMana
gement module
unregister OSGI
service
exception
0412501
Warning
Init hot key

grabber failed
Function key init failure.

Function keys cant be
used.\nPlease restart the
1. Keyboard error
2. OS error 3. Software error
(So file missing)
0412502
Error
SystemControl
module register
OSGI service
exception
Software error
0412503
Error
CORBA fatal
error
1. Software internal error
Load or parse
setup
configuration
file failed

exception. Some setup
1. Configure file miss
Load or parse
administration
configuration
file failed
0412504
0412505
Warning
Warning
2. Corba server error.
2. Configure file format

error

error
6-59
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0412506
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Load or parse
version
configuration
file failed
Message
Software version access
0412507
Warning
No handler for
the message
Unexpected
message.\nPleasre restart the
please call for the service.
0412510
Warning
Mainframe and
workstation
softawre
incompatible
Mainframe software
incompatible. Mainframe is
stopped.\nPlease make sure
connecting the right
mainframe. If the mainframe is
correct, please call service to
upgrade mainframe and/or
workstation software.
0412512
Warning
Load or parse
connectivity
setup
configuration
file failed
0412513
Error
SystemControl
module get
OSGI service
exception
0412514
Error
SystemControl
module
unregister OSGI
service
exception
0412800
Warning
Serial numbers
of MCB and
WKS are not
compatible
Mainframe has different serial

number from Workstation.
Mixing use of workstation with
other system's mainframe is
not supported.\nPlease make
sure workstation and
mainframe is match.
0412801
Warning
Static image
storage space
is full

100,000 images reached.
Cant start Digital Spot
exposure.\nPlease delete
useless or out-of-date images
6-60
Diagnosis Reference
error
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message
Diagnosis Reference
to free disk space.
0412804
Warning
Product models
of MF and WKS
are different
Workstation product model is

different from mainframe.
Mixing use of workstation with
different product model
mainframe is not
supported.\nPlease make sure
workstation and mainframe is
match.
0412805
Error
Workstation
product model
not configured
Product is not
configured.\nPlease call
service to configure product
model with product license.
0412806
Warning
Workstation
product model
configured by
MFG
System does not have product

license. System cant work with
full functions.\nPlease call
service to configure product
with product license.
0412807
Warning
Get string failed

0412808
Warning
Get resource
bundle failed

0401500
Error
Allocate
Memory failed
System run out of

Re install software
0401501
Warning
Write PIPE
failed
Communication
Re install software
0401502
Warning
Read PIPE failed Communication

Re install software
6-61
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0401503
Error
0401504
Error
0401505
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Set PIPE failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Communication ini
Re install software
CORBA
communication
failed
Re install software
Error
Sync operation
failed
Re install software
0401506
Error
Thread
operation failed
Execution thread
Re install software
0401001
Error
Open serial port

failed
Workstation and mainframe

communication
0401002
Warning
Write serial port

failed

communication
0401003
Warning
Read serial port

failed

communication
0401004
Error
Set serial port

failed

communication
0401005
Warning
Communication
Lost

communication lost.\nPlease
6-62
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0408500
Error
0408501
Warning
0408502
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Allocate
memory failed
Message
Diagnosis Reference
System run out of

WKS software work

abnormal
1.Reboot system
2.Reinstall system
System cant get peripheral

device information.\nIf this
service.
WKS software work

abnormal
Read PIPE failed System cant get peripheral

device information.\nIf this
service.
WKS software work

abnormal
Write PIPE
failed
1.Reboot system
2.Reinstall system
1.Reboot system
2.Reinstall system
0408503
Error
Set PIPE failed
Module init failure.\nIf this

service.
0408504
Warning
Read XML file

failed
Setup configuration laoding

failure. Some setup
Read setup configuration

file failure
1.Try to import setup
configuration file
2.Reinstall WKS software
3.Replace hardware disk
0408505
Error
CORBA
communication
failed
WKS software work

abnormal
1.Reboot system
2.Reinstall system
0408506
Error
Thread
operation failed
Execution thread
WKS software work

abnormal
1.Reboot system
2.Reinstall system
0408507
Error
Thread sync
operation failed
Exectuion exception.\nPlease
WKS software work

abnormal
1.Reboot system
2.Reinstall system
0408508
Warning
Read default
XML file failed
Default Setup configuration

WKS software work

abnormal
1.Reboot system
2.Reinstall system
6-63
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Message
Description
(In system Log)
System connect System cant detect
UPS failed
UPS.\nPlease shut down
system to avoid data loss. If
for service.
Diagnosis Reference
0408509
Warning
0408510
Warning
UPS return
nothing or
wrong data
System cant detect

this issue persists. please call
for service.
UPS and WKS is abnormal.
1. PC USB for UPS may be
abnormal
2.Connection between PC
and UPS may be abnormal
3. UPS may be abnormal.
4. Reinstall WKS software
0408511
Warning
Catch
exception
during UPS
communication
System cant detect

this issue persists. please call
for service.
WKS S/W is abnormal

1. WKS software may be
abnormal.
2. WKS software and OS
may be abnormal.
0408001
Warning
UPS battery low
UPS battery low.\nPlease

keeps AC power plugged in to
avoid data loss. If this issue
1. Battery of UPS need

recharged
0408002
Error
System AC
power lost
AC power lost. System will

shutdown in 4".\nPlease save
data in time to avoid data loss.
Main power input may be

abnormal.
0408003
Warning
SIB connection
lost
Peripharal inferface exception.

Power Off and Room Interface
functions may be
system. If this issue persists.
SIB and PC is abnormal.
1. Serial port of WKS may be
abnormal
2. Serial port of SIB may be
abnormal
3. Connection between SIB
and PDU may be abnormal.
0408004
Warning
PDU
connection lost
Power distribution unit control

exception.\nIf this issue
SIB and PDU is abnormal.
1. SIB may be abnormal
2.connection between SIB
and PDU may be abnormal
3. PDU may be abnormal.
6-64
abnormal
2. Connection between PC
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
0408005
Warning
0408006
Warning
0408007
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
SIB PDU ready
line
disconnected
Message
Diagnosis Reference
Power distribution unit control

SIB and PDU is abnormal.
1. SIB may be abnormal
2.connection between SIB
and PDU may be abnormal
4. WKS software may be
abnormal
Secondary
voltage
overload
Secondary voltage overload. It

may result in exposure
1. Main transformer
primary input power supply
may be abnormal.
2. Output of main
transformer may be
abnormal.
3. Adjust R52 follow SM
chapter 4.9
Warning
Secondary
voltage
underload
Secondary voltage underload.

It may result in exposure
1. Main transformer
primary input power supply
may be abnormal.
2. 28V output of main
transformer may be
abnormal.
3. Adjust R52 follow SM
chapter 4.9
0408008
Warning
PDU not detect

IPC 12V
Power monitoring
1. 12V output of WKS may

be abnormal.
2. 12 V input for PDU may
be abnormal.
0408009
Error
Open serial port

failed
Workstation and peripheral

interface communicaiton
Serial port of WKS abnormal

1. WKS serial port for UPS
may be abnormal.
0408010
Warning
Write serial port

failed


may be abnormal.
0408011
Warning
Read serial port

failed


may be abnormal.
6-65
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
Message

may be abnormal.
0408012
Error
Set serial port

failed

0408015
Warning
No battery in
UPS
No battery in UPS.\nPlease
keep AC plugged in to avoid
data loss. If this issue persists.
0408016
Warning
Cant detect
UPS
System cant detect

UPS.\nPlease keep AC plugged
in to avoid data loss. If this
issue persists. Please call for
service.
UPS needs to
be replaced for
aging of battery
UPS battery aged.\nPlease call

service to replace the battery.
0408018
0408019
Warning
UPS battery
overloads
UPS battery
overloaded.\nPlease restart
the system to avoid data loss.
If this issue persists, please call
for service.
0409501
Error
OSGI boot up
failed
Application modules boot up

0409502
Error
C module boot
up failed
System modules boot up

0409503
Error
CORBA
communication
failed
6-66
Diagnosis Reference
abnormal
2.connection between PC
4. Reinstall WKS software
1, PC power supply may be

abnormal
Troubleshooting
Exception
ID
Error
Warning
Exception
Description
(In system Log)
TRU module
resolve object
exception
Message
0404501
Error
0404502
Error
TRU module
Invoke corba
service
exception
0404503
Error
TRU module
register OSGI
service
exception
0404504
Error
TRU module get

OSGI service
exception
0404505
Error
TRU module
unregister OSGI
service
exception
Diagnosis Reference
6-67
6.4. Troubleshooting Guide

6.4.1.
Workstation and Control Panel Boot up Display
Workstation screen:
1. BIOS
2. Linux
3. App
Control Panel:
1. MCB Ready
6.4.2.
Shut down Workstation and Control Panel Display
WKS
Normal Boot up time is about 120 and Shut down time is about 25.
6-68
3. Done
2. MCB & WKS Comm. and

Exchange information
MCB
Troubleshooting
6.4.3.
Troubleshooting Tree
Below are troubleshooting tree for:

1.
2.
3.
Boot up failure
X-ray Failure
No Image Failure
Refer to Diagnostic
instruction and
Recommend action of 6.3.3
1. Boot up Failure
Check room
main power
switch
No responds
when press
power On/Off
button?
Y
Power off and

check filter
connection
Jack power
on?
Error displayed
on right monitor?
Check the power

filter and wire
connection
Insert power
plug
Breaker on?
Output of DC
power supply?
Replace DC power
supply
MX12 connect
Motherboard is
OK?
Reconnect MX12
Replace Fuse
Replace
motherboard
Turn
Breaker On
Power On
Indicator on?
Check wire
connection or
Replace Power
On/Off Button
Input of DC
power supply?
Y
N
WKS boot up but

MF no responds?
Power plug
insert?
MF control panel
in processing but
WKS bootup
failure
Power On/Off
button light on?
Fuse on MB is
OK?
Check wire
connection or
Replace Power
On/Off Button
LED of MF
display board
on?
Y
N
Power on
monitor
Monitor on?
Replace MCB
Monitor power?
Y
Y
Check DVI cable
connect
Replace computer
power supply
Check the filter and
wire connection
In BIOS self check

interface?
Computer power
input?
According BIOS
check result
maintain computer
N
Fan of computer
supply running?
Y
Replace computer
MB
Check the LED on

Computer MB
Y
Replace Computer
display board
6-69
2. X-Ray Failure
Adjust R50 on KVCB to

make the voltage of
TP15 on KVCB equal to
KV value / 20
Warning error?
Chart 1
Error handling
Chart 3
mA failure
The TP15 voltage on KVCB is

equal to KV value / 20 when
exposure?
Manual mode,
KV right?
Chart 2
KV failure
Done
Y
Check TP5 voltage
on MCB = KV value /
20?
Chart 1
Error Handling
Replace MCB
Replace KVCB
Y
Error 0104004 KV low
and DS4 on KVCB is
on?
DS9 on KVCB on?
JP1 on monobloc
seal board well
connected?
Check fuse on J2 pin

16
Reconnect JP1
Reconnect MX5
Error 0104003 KV high

and DS5 on KVCB is
on?
MX5 on MB well
connected?
N
Error 0117004 filament
over current and DS6 on
KVCB is on?
Replace IGBT, still

over current?
Replace
monobloc, still
over current?
Replace KVCB
Done
Done
Done
Error 0104005 KV
unbalance and DS7 on
KVCB is on?
Restart system and

expose again, still KV
unbalance?
Error 0104001 DC error

and DS8 on KVCB is on?
Voltage out of scope,

unable to comply
Replace KVCB
Restart system
The input voltage is

within 10%
toelrance?
The voltage on the

capacity 3300uF is
within 320V +/- 20V?
Replace IGBT,
expose and DS2 still
on?
Done
Error 0104002 IGBT

error and DS2 on KVCB
is on?
Refer to error code in

SM
Replace KVCB
6-70
The voltage on the

capacity is less than
20V?
Replace monobloc
Change DC bus fuse
Troubleshooting
6-71
6-72
Chapter7.
Replacement
7.1. FRU list

Comments
Item
PN
Description
Qty
Mainframe C-arm
1
5085004 ASM, GENERATOR
1
2
5417680 ASM, COLLIMATOR KIT
1
3
5075929 ASM, 9' Image Intensifier for 715/785
1 Brivo OEC 715/785
4
5075930 ASM, 9' Image Intensifier for 865
1 Brivo OEC 865
5
5075006 Component, GigE Camera AM1565, Surgery
1 Brivo OEC 715/785
6
5085003 Component, GigE Camera AM1565B, Surgery
1 Brivo OEC 865
7
5075505 Component, grid for 715,785
1 Brivo OEC 715/785
8
5330066 Component, Grid, EVR
1 Brivo OEC 865
9
5085160 Plastic, 9 inch II cover
1
10
5075009 Component, I.I Power Supply
1
Mainframe Base
11
5085603 PWA, COLLIMATOR CONTROL BOARD
1
12
5085600 PWA, MAINFRAME CONTROLLOR BOARD
1
13
5085604 PWA, FILAMENT DRIVE BOARD
1
14
5085610 PWA, KV CONTROL BOARD
1
15
5085601 PWA, MOTHER BOARD, EVR
1
16
5329281 MISC, RESONANT CAPACITOR,EVR
1
17
5085800 MISC, POWER SUPPLY MPQ-200F
1
18
5085801 MISC, POWER SUPPLY RPT-75D
1
19
5329275 MISC, RECTIFIER BRIDGE, EVR
1
20
5085805 MISC, DRIVE POWER TRANSFORMER, EVR
1
21
5331600 MISC, C_ARM POWER FILTER, EVR
1
22
5329278 MISC, DC BUS CAPACITOR
2
23
5329279 MISC, DC BUS FUSE
1
24
5085096 ASM, FOOTSWITCH ASM
1 Standard configuration
25
5085113 ASM, HAND SWITCH ASSY
1
26
5085408 ASM, IGBT INVERTER MODULE,EVR
1
27
5085607 PWA, UPDOWN BOARD
1
28
5075901 FRU, C-ARM UP and DOWN BUTTON KIT
1
29
5075902 FRU, MAINFRAME FRONT WHEEL KIT
1
30
5075903 FRU, MAINFRAME BODY COVERS KIT
1
31
5075904 FRU, MAINFRAME BACK WHEEL PLATE KIT
1
32
5075905 FRU, C-ARM HANDLES KIT
1
33
5333084 FRU, MAINFRAME STEERING HANDLE KIT
1
34
5333085 FRU, CROSS-ARM BRAKE HANDLE KIT
1
35
5075906 FRU, WIG-WAG BRAKE HANDLE KIT
1
36
5333087 FRU, ORBITAL OR ROTATIONAL BRAKE HANDLES KIT 1
37
5075907 FRU, MAINFRAME CONTROL PANEL KIT
1
38
5075921 FRU, LINEAR ACTUATOR KIT
1
Workstation
39
5085606 PWA, POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT
1
40
5085605 PWA, SYSTEM INTERFACE BOARD
1
41
5075503 Component, 19 Inch Color LCD Monitor, Surgery
2 Brivo OEC 715
7-2
Replacement
Comments
Item
PN
Description
Qty
42
5085503 COMPONENT, LEFT MONITOR
1 Brivo OEC 865
43
5085505 COMPONENT, RIGHT MONITOR
1 Brivo OEC 865
44 5085512 Power Supply, Surgery
1
45 5085508 COMPUTER, MEMORY BANK
1
46 5075506 Workstation, Mainboard Assembly, Surgery
1
47 5085507 COMPUTER, DISPLAY CARD
1
48 5085509 COMPUTER, HARDDISK
1
49 5085514 COMPUTER, MOUSE
1
50
5075513 UPS, Surgery
1
51
5085803 MISC, MAIN TRANSFORMER
1
52
5085804 MISC, START UP TRANSFORMER
1
53
5331638 MISC, EXPOSURE INDICATOR, EVR
1
54
5330849 MISC, EMERGENCY SWITCH, EVR
1
00Brivo OEC 865
PUSHER~ CABLE~ 5 INCH CASTER~ 9600
55
1
877298-01
56
5075908 FRU, WKS CONTROL PANEL KIT
1
00Brivo OEC 865
CASTER SWIVEL 5 INCH
57
1
900695-01
00Brivo OEC 865
CASTER~ LOCK~ 5 INCH
58
1
900696-01
59
5075909 FRU, 715 WORKSTATION FRONT COVER KIT
1 Brivo OEC 715
60
1 Brivo OEC 785
61
1 Brivo OEC 865
62
5075912 FRU, WORKSTATION SIDE COVERS KIT
1
63
5075913 FRU, WORKSTATION TOP COVERS KIT
1
64
5075914 FRU, WORKSTATION HANDLE KIT
1
65
5075915 FRU, WORKSTATION BASE COVER KIT
1 Brivo OEC 865
66
5075926 FRU, WORKSTATION BASE COVER KIT 715 and 785
1 Brivo OEC 715/785
67
5343601 ASM UNIVERSAL TRUCKLE WITH BRAKE EVR
1 Brivo OEC 715/785
Cables
68
5085708 Cable, INTERCONNECT WKS
1
69
5085700 CABLE, BUNDLE ASM
1
70
5085431 ASM, INTERCONNECT CABLE AND SUPPORT
1
Service Tool, Option and Others
71
5075816 ASM, MONOBLOCK COVER WITH LASER AIMER KIT
1 Option
ASM, MONOBLOCK COVER WITHOUT LASER AIMER
72
5075917
1
KIT
73
5075918 FRU, REMOVE FILTER AND SENSOR KIT
1 Option
74
5075928 Workstation Software
1
75
5085900 COMPUTER, WiFi Connector Kit
1 Option
76
5075919 FRU, FUSE KIT
1
77
5085115 ASM, FOOT SWITCH ASSY
1 Option with dual pedal
78
5085099 Collector, REMOVABLE GRID A
1 Option
79
5075922 FRU, Button and Switch KIT
1
80
5330055 Component, LCD monitor, EVR
1 Option, Brivo OEC 785
81
5085511 COMPUTER, DVD RW DRIVER
1 Option
82
5085609 PWA, EXTEND BOARD
1 Service Tool
7-3
Item
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
PN
533047301
00878105-02
5331605
5085809
5085838
5407037
5407042
5407045
5407039
5408318
5407035
5407036
5407050
96
5332898
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
5407033
5407032
5407031
5408320
5407038
5407048
2418430
5330067
5085235
5075923
5075511
83
84
NOTE
Description
Comments
Qty
LASER AIMER in Image intensifier SIDE
9 BEAM ALIGNMENT TOOL ASSEMBLY
MISC, BREAKER FOR 220V, EVR

MISC, BREAKER FOR 110V
MISC, WKS CIRCUIT BREAKER PRIMARY
Cable with plug_AFSNIT 107-2-D1
Cable with plug_AS/NZS 3112
Cable with plug_IRAM 2073
Cable with plug_NBR 14136
Cable with plug_NEMA 5-15P
Cable with plug_NEMA 5-20P
Cable with plug_L6-20P
Cable with plug_SI-32
Component, Video distributor for external DVI video
output, EVR
Cable, Power Cable with BS1363A, EVR
Cable, Power Cable with BS546, EVR
Cable, Power Cable with CEE77, EVR
Cable, Power Cable with GB1002, EVR
Cable, 110V Power Cable with NEMA5-15, EVR
Cable, Power Cable with SEV1011, EVR
Component, UP-D897 Printer, EVR
Component, UP-990AD Thermal Printer, EVR
SKIN SPACERS
Collector, Firmware Upgrade Kit
APP Software Installation DVD-RW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Option
Service Tool
220V power input
110V power input
110V power input
Option
Option
Option
Option
Service Tool
Service Tool
For the 5 parts as below, field engineer must ship the failed parts to Surgery engineering in
China for autopsy in the first year after M3.
Contact:
Cheng Jianan
GE HUALUN Medical Systems Co. Ltd
No. 1 Yongchang North Road,
Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area
Beijing, P.R. China 100176
Tel: 8610-58068888-70483
7-4
Item
Part Number
5085600
Part Description
PWA, MAINFRAME CONTROLLOR BOARD
Replacement
NOTE
5085610
PWA, KV CONTROL BOARD
5085004
ASM,GENERATOR
5075006
Component, GigE Camera AM1565, Surgery
5085003
Component, GigE Camera AM1565B, Surgery
After the replacement of the 5 parts below, please fill in the product locator card and mail
it to local service operation office.
Part Description
Comments
Item
Part Number
5085004
ASM,GENERATOR
5075929
FRU,9 Image Intensifier for 715,785
The product locator card is

for the low tie part 5075001
5075930
FRU,9' Image Intensifier for 865
The product locator card is

for the low tie part 5075008
5417680
ASM, COLLIMATOR KIT
5075816
NOTE
The FRU list contains 4 special tools to be used in Software installation calibration or
troubleshooting.
Item
Part Number
Part Description
5085609
PWA, EXTEND BOARD
5075511
5075923
Collector, Firmware Upgrade Kit
00-878105-02
9 BEAM ALIGHMENT TOOL ASSEMBLY
7-5
7.2. Locations of FRU
9
5, 6
10
32
3, 4
7, 8
54
37
73
26
11
12
13
30
1
30
31
7-6
14
Replacement
7-7
7.3. Replacement
WARNING
Electrical circuits inside the equipment use voltages that are capable of Causing serious
injury or death from electrical shock. Use appropriate precautions.
WARNING
Please use specified fuse.
WARNING
If the system has power applied, power off the machine and unplug the AC power cord
from the wall outlet.
7.3.1.
NOTE
General Screws Fastening torque Reference

If no specification in parts replacement procedure, take below general screws fastening
torque as reference.
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw:

Material: Steel; Property: 8.8; Finish: Zinc Plated; Torque Unit: Nm;
Tighten Torque Value For Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw
Thread Specification
Torque Value
Notes
M2
M2.5
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
0.3
0.6
1
2.3
4.6
7.9
19.2
38.4
66.4
If the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Ally, the tighten torque is the 80% of
the steel tighten torque; if the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Casting,
the tighten torque is the 50% of the steel tighten torque
Cross Recessed Countersunk Head Screws:

Material: Steel; Property: 4.8 & 8.8; Finish: Zinc Plated; Torque Unit: Nm;
Tighten Torque Value For Cross Recessed Countersunk Head Screws
Torque Property 4.8
Value
Property 8.8
Notes
7-8
M2.5
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
0.3
0.4
1
2
3.4
8.4
16.8
0.6
1
2.3
4.6
7.9
19.2
38.4
If the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Ally, the tighten torque is the 80% of
the steel tighten torque; if the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Casting, the
tighten torque is the 50% of the steel tighten torque
Replacement
Pozidriv Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw:

Material: Steel; Property: 4.8&8.8; Finish: Zinc Plated; Torque Unit: Nm;
Tighten Torque Value For Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw
Torque Property 4.8
Value
Property 8.8
M2.5
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
0.3
0.4
1
2
3.4
8.4
16.8
0.6
38.4
1
2.3
4.6
7.9
19.2
If the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Ally, the tighten torque is the
80% of the steel tighten torque; if the material of the thread hole is Aluminum
Casting, the tighten torque is the 50% of the steel tighten torque
Notes
Cross Recessed Pan Head Tapping Screw:

Material: Steel case hardened; Property: min 450 HV (>>45 HRC); Torque Unit: Nm;
Tighten Torque Value For Cross Recessed Pan Head Tapping Screw
Torque Value
Notes
ST2.2
ST2.9
ST3.5
ST3.9
ST4.2
ST4.8
ST5.5
ST6.3
0.4
1.2
2.2
2.7
3.5
5.0
8.0
11.0
If the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Ally, the tighten torque is the 80%
of the steel tighten torque; if the material of the thread hole is Aluminum
Socket Set Screw:

Material: Steel case hardened; Property: 45H; Torque Unit: Nm;
Tighten Torque Value For Cross Recessed Pan Head Tapping Screw
Torque Value
Notes
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
0.4
0.8
2.4
4.0
8.0
16.0
36.0
72.0
If the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Ally, the tighten torque is the
80% of the steel tighten torque; if the material of the thread hole is Aluminum
Austenitic Stainless Steels A2:

Austenitic Stainless Steels A2
Torque Property A2- 50
Value
Property A2-70
M1.6
0.1
0.2
M2
0.2
0.2
M3
0.8
0.9
M4
1.0
2.1
M5
1.9
4.1
M6
3.3
7.0
M8
8.1
17.1
M10
16.2
35.2
M12
27.8
59.2
M14
44.8
95.2
7-9
7.3.2.
NOTE
Calibration Matrix
For the parts below, the calibration procedure or some following action should be done after the replacement. For detail
information, please refer to the replacement procedure.
Power Tolerance Check
Laser aimer Calibration
Monitor Brightness and

contrast adjust if needed
Reinstall OS and APP SW
DAP Calibration
Image Resolution check
Shading Calibration
ABS Tracking Check&Cal.
Limiting Field Size Check
mAs Calibration
Camera Centering
mA Pre_Heat table Cali.
7-10
mA Calibration
5330055
5075503
5085503
5085505
5085606
Description
PWA, COLLIMATOR CONTROL BOARD
PWA, MAINFRAME CONTROLLOR BOARD
PWA, FILAMENT DRIVE BOARD
PWA, KV CONTROL BOARD
ASM,GENERATOR, (Monoblock)
ASM, COLLIMATOR KIT
COMPUTER, HARDDISK
Component, I.I Power Supply
Component, GigE Camera AM1565, Surgery
Component, GigE Camera AM1565B, Surgery
FRU,9 Image Intensifier for 715,785
FRU,9' Image Intensifier for 865
CABLE, BUNDLE CABLE
ASM, LASER AIMER, 9 INCH ENGLISH WITH ALL LANGUAGES
SUPPLEMENT
Component, LCD monitor, EVR
Component, 19 Inch Color LCD Monitor, Surgery
COMPONENT, LEFT MONITOR
COMPONENT, RIGHT MONITOR
PWA, POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT
KV Calibration
X-ray Generator Warm
PN
5085603
5085600
5085604
5085610
5085004
5417680
5085509
5075009
5075006
5085003
5075929
5075930
5085700
5075816
5330473-01
Replacement
7.3.3.
Calibration Tool Matrix
Standard tools are not included in below matrix, for example: screw driver, TORX screw driver (for Brivo OEC 865 Camera Iris and Focus
calibration), Allen key metric and inch (Brivo OEC 865 Camera Iris and Focus calibration).
Power Tolerance Check
Laser aimer Calibration

Monitor Brightness and
contrast adjust if needed
Reinstall OS and APP SW
DAP Accuracy Ver. and Cal.
Image Resolution check
Shading Calibration
ABS Tracking Check&Cal.
Limiting Field Size Check
Description
Dose Meter
Lead Apron
kV meter
Erasable marker (If needed)
mAs meter
9-inch BAFT Tool
PWA, Extend Board
Asm, 9 Inch Cassette Holder (if required)
Film
Camera Centering
KV Calibration
mAs Calibration
mA Pre_Heat table Cali.
mA Calibration
X-ray Generator Warm
PN
Standard Tool
Standard Tool
Standard Tool
Standard Tool
Standard Tool
Standard Tool
Standard Tool
Standard Tool
Standard Tool
Standard Tool
00-877682-01
00-878105-02
5085609
5085005
N/A
5075511
7-11
7.3.4. System Covers

WARNING
Never allow anyone to use the system when any C-Arm cover is removed. Use extreme
caution if you intend to troubleshoot the equipment with the covers off and power
applied. Failure to heed this warning may result death, personal injury, or equipment
damage.
C-Arm Covers
Remove the rear cover before removing the front cover.
Remove the Cross-arm bearing cover, X-ray Monoblock cover and Image Intensifier cover in any order.
NOTE
Set the brakes before attempting to remove C-Arm covers.
Follow these steps to remove the C-Arm covers:

1. Disconnect AC power plug from AC outlet.
2. Remove four cosmetic caps. Then loosen four screws that
secure C-Arm rear cover. Draw out rear cover away from CArm.
3. Remove the four screws secure C-Arm front cover. Avoid

electric shock with great care.
7-12
Replacement
4. Disconnect the footswitch from the footswitch socket, slowly

move front cover away from C-Arm.
5. Install the covers in reverse sequence (Front cover prior to rear cover).
NOTE
The torque to screw the C-Arm front cover is 2.5Nm. The torque to screw the rear cover is
5.8Nm.
Workstation Covers
Remove Workstation covers in the following sequence:
1. Rear Cover
2. Left and Right lower side covers
3. Front Cover
4. Left and right upper side covers
Follow below steps to remove the Workstation covers:
1. Loosen the 4 screws of the rear cover. Remove the rear cover.
7-13
2. Remove the 2 screws on each lower side cover. Remove lower cover on each side.
3. Remove 6 screws (2 screws on each side and 2 on top of the front cover. Disconnect the USB
extension cable (release the secure screw of USB port cover, then release the secure screw of USB
cable) and power on switch connected cable. Then remove the front cover.
7-14
Replacement
4. Remove all screws of the printer cabinet. Remove the printer cabinet.
5. Remove the screws and disassemble two Workstation handles.
7-15
6. Remove the screws on each side and remove the left and right upper side covers.
7. Replace the cover and install them in reverse sequence.
8. Replace Workstation front cover need refer old front cover to affix local language warning labels
in Multi-language Label Kit (5075934).
NOTE
The torque requirement to fasten the screws that secure the rear and side covers is
2.5Nm.The torque requirement to fasten the screws that secure the front cover is 5.8Nm.
NOTE
Replace Workstation front cover need order Workstation cover FRU (5075909 for 715,
5075910 for 785, 5075911 for 865) and Multi-language Label Kits (5075934).
Top Cover
Rear cover must be removed before upper cover can be removed.
NOTE
1. Remove all screws that secure the front top cover.
2. Disconnect the cable connected to the Workstation

membrane keyboard control board. Remove the
front top cover.
7-16
Replacement
3. Remove the screws that secure the membrane

keyboard. Remove the membrane keyboard in the
front top cover.
4. Reassemble the membrane keyboard in the new top cover.

5. Remove the screws that secure the rear top cover. Remove the rear top cover.
6. Replace the new top cover kits and install them in reverse sequence.
The torque of the screws that secure the top covers is 2.5Nm.
NOTE
Down Side Cover

1. Lift up the side of the Workstation carefully and keep the balance of the Workstation.
2. Remove the screws of the down side cover
and remove the down side cover.
3. When removing the downside cover below

the brake pedal, remove the screws of
brake pedal and remove the brake pedal
first.
7-17
7.3.5. Brake, Handle and Wheel

Lateral Rotation Brake and Orbital Movement Brake (5333087)
Lateral Rotation Brake and Orbital Movement brake have the same replacement procedure:
1.
Make sure the brake is set.
2.
Loosen the screw that secures the handle to C-Arm.
3.
Remove the handle.
4.
Install the new handle and fasten the screw. Pay attention to
keep the original assembling direction.
5.
Release the brake. Move the C-Arm and verify that C-Arm can be
locked by placing the brake in lock position.
Wig-Wag Brake (5075906)

1.
Release the wig-wag brake.
2.
Pull up the brake handle and fix the screw below by a

screwdriver, and then rotate the handle clockwise to the
maximum location.
3.
Rotate the brake handle counterclockwise to the

maximum, and drop the handle.
4.
Repeat step 2 and step 3 until remove the screw below.
5.
Replace a new wig-wag brake handle kit with a revers steps.
7-18
Replacement
Horizontal Movement (Cross-arm) Brake (5333085)

1.
Make sure the horizontal movement brake is set.
2.
Loosen 2 screws from horizontal brake

handle and Remove the handle.
3.
Remove the screws of the cross arm cover

and remove the cover.
4.
Loosen the screws of the plate cover of the

brake and remove the plate cover.
5.
Remove the screws and replace the brake

pad assembly.
6.
Reassemble the covers of the cross arm.
7.
Replace the new horizontal movement handle. Pay attention to keep the original assembling
direction.
8.
Place the handle in unlock position. Verify that you can push or pull the cross arm and lock the cross
arm by placing the brake handle in lock position.
7-19
C-Arm Steering Handle (5333084)

1.
Remove the cosmetic cover of steering handle.
2.
Remove the 2 screws of the steering handle.
3.
Remove the handle.
4.
Install the new handle and fasten the screws.

Pay attention to keep the original assembling
direction.
5.
Verify that the rear wheel can be steered by

the steering handle.
Workstation Handles (5075914)

Refer to section 7.3.1 Workstation covers to remove the Workstation handles.
Mainframe Front Wheel Kit (5075902)

1. Lift up the side of the C-Arm carefully and keep
the balance of the C-Arm. Loose the 4 screws
and remove mainframe front wheel.
2. Replace the new wheel. Move the C-Arm and
verify that the C-Arm can move freely.
Mainframe Back Wheel Plate Kit (5075904)

The FRU part for the rear wheel mainly provides the 2 plates and cable pushers.
1. Lift up the side of the C-Arm carefully and
keep the balance of the C-Arm. Remove the
label cover on the wheel plate. Then remove
the protection cover by releasing 3 secure
screws.
7-20
Replacement
2. Remove the circlip in the shaft.
3. Remove the plate of the wheel. Loose the

screws and then remove the cable pusher.
4. Replace the new parts in steering none brake position and reassemble all the other parts.
5. Move the C-Arm and verify that the C-Arm can move smoothly.
Wheels of Workstation
Brivo OEC 715/785 and Brivo OEC 865 use different Workstation wheels. Brivo OEC 715/785 use universal
wheels with brake. Brivo OEC 865 use central control wheel and non-central control wheels.
For Brivo OEC 715/785 (PN: 5343601)

1.
Lift up the side of the Workstation carefully and keep the balance of the Workstation.
2.
Remove the down side cover secure screws and remove the down side covers.
3.
Remove the workstation wheel by loose the nut.
7-21
4.
Assemble wheel as above reverse steps.
5.
Move the Workstation and verify that the Workstation can move smoothly.
For Brivo OEC 865

Central Control Wheels (00-900696-01)
1. Lift up the side of the Workstation carefully and keep the balance of the Workstation.
2. Loose the screws and remove the down side cover.
3. Put the Workstation brake pedal to position 1. Remove the screws of brake pedal and remove the
brake pedal.
7-22
Replacement
4. Loose the nut and remove the central control wheel.

5. Then replace the wheel with a new one.
NOTE
Pay attention to keep the direction and gear of the

new wheel is same as the original one.
6. Install the brake pedal as original position.

7. Place the brake pedal in shift 1/2/3 and verify the central control
wheels are functional in each shift. Place the brake pedal in each
shift and verify the related function, refer to Section 3.6.1.
Non-central Control Wheels (00-900695-01)

1. Lift up the side of the Workstation carefully and keep the
balance of the Workstation.
2. Remove the screws of the side cover and remove the side
cover.
3. Loose the nut and remove the Non-central control wheel.
4. In position 2, move the Workstation and verify that the

Workstation can be moved smoothly.
7-23
7.3.6. Monoblock
2. Disconnect the cables connected to
Monoblock.
3. Underlay the Monoblock to prevent it
from falling.
4. Loosen the 4 screws. Replace the
Monoblock and fasten the 4 screws.
NOTE
NOTE
Torque to 19.9Nm during installation

The thermal switch normal status is close. Disconnect connector in below/left picture and
test two pins shall be shortcut, measured by multimeter. Measure the resistance between
each pin and ground by multimeter, the result shall be open. If the result is shortcut, need
check whether the thermal switch cable is shortcut with ground or not.
Thermal Switch cable
5. Connect the cables to Monoblock. Boot up the system.

6. Refer to 7.3.2 and chapter 4 to perform calibrations and checks.
7. Shut down the system.
8. Recover the X-ray Monoblock assembly.
NOTE
NOTE
7-24
Fasten the screws with the torque to 0.56Nm.

If the Monoblock is not powered for more than 3 months, it should be warm first
according to section 4.5.
Replacement
7.3.7. Collimator
1. Position the C-Arm for easy access.
3. Release the 3 screws (Inch screws,
released by T15 screw driver) of
collimator lead ring.
4. Remove 4 collimator secure screws
5. Replace a new collimator, fasten

4 collimator secure screws and
reinstall the collimator lead ring
by fastening 3 screws removed in
step3.
6. Power on the system.
7. Select fluoroscopy mode and
make sure to enable Automatic
Technique.
8. During the exposure, press the
shutter close and open button to
check if the movement of the leaf
is smooth.
9. Close the shutter all the way to the limit to check if the movement of the leaf is smooth.
10. Refer to 7.3.2 and chapter 4 to perform calibrations and checks:
11. Fasten all screws and recover the collimator cover
NOTE
German regulatory required that the collimator has

to be visible on two sides of the image, which are not
opposite. For the system installed in German, adjust
collimator iris until the collimator meet the
requirement as below.
7-25
7.3.8. PWAs
Collimator Control Board (P/N: 5085603)
1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm console.
2. Release the screws of e-Box cover and remove it.
3. Take off the collimator control board and insert a new one.
4. Refer to 7.3.2 calibration matrix and chapter 4 to do calibration
and checks.
5. After calibration and check, shut down system and reinstall the
e-Box and Mainframe back covers.
Mainframe Control Board (P/N: 5085600)

1. Refer to 5.2.2 backup the product & software option files.
3. Release the screws of PCB box cover and remove it.
4. Remove the MCB board and insert a new one.
5. Refer to 5.2.2 to reconfigure the product & software options,
use the license file exported in step1.
6. Refer to 7.3.2 calibration matrix and chapter 4 to do
calibration and checks.
7. After calibration and check, shut down system and reinstall
the e-Box and Mainframe back covers.
7-26
Replacement
NOTE
Warning 0117800 may occur when Brivo OEC 715/785/865 system boot up with a new
MCB installed. Please do not shut down the system by pressing the confirm button.
Instead, hold down Press keys Ctrl +Shift+Alt+ to invoke the service tool first in
Administration interface. Then, refer to the chapter 4 and follow the instructions to finish
the calibrate process.
Filament Drive Board (P/N: 5085604)

2. Release the screws of e-Box cover
3. Remove Filament Diver Board and insert new one.
4. Refer to 7.3.2 calibration matrix and chapter 4 to do calibration
and checks.
5. After calibration and check, shut down system and reinstall the
e-Box and Mainframe back covers.
Mother board (P/N: 5085601)

2. Release the screws of e-Box cover and remove it.
3. Remove the collimator control board, mainframe control
board and Filament Drive Board.
4. Release the screws and remove the whole e-Box.
7-27
5. Unplug all cables connected to the motherboard.

6. Loose the screws and remove the mother board.
7. Remove 3 PWA insert error proofing bolts from defect
mother board and assemble them on new board.
8. Assemble the new mother board and connect the cables
according to the label of the cable and the mark on the
board.
9. Install the PCB box and insert the collimator control
board, mainframe control board and Filament Drive
Board. Install the PCB box cover and C-Arm console
cover.
10. Power on the system and take exposure. Verify that the
system works normally.
kV control board (P/N: 5085610)

1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm
console.
2. Unplug all cables connected to kV control
board (KJ1, KJ2, KJ3, KJ4, KJ5, KJ6, KJ7).
3. Release the four screws that secured the
board. Replace the new kV control board.
4. Connect all cables.
5. Refer to 7.3.2 calibration matrix and
chapter 4 to do calibration and checks.
6. After calibration and check, shut down
system and reinstall the Mainframe back
cover.
7-28
Replacement
IGBT inverter module (P/N: 5085408)

1. Turn off the system power.
2. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm
console.
3. Loose the four screws and remove
the shield cover.
CAUTION
Do not touch the IGBT inverter module, unless the power of DC Bus capacitor has been
completely removed and they have been discharged completely.
4. Disconnect all cables connected to IGBT

board and the cables to the fan.
5. Remain the screws on the board after
disconnect the cable. Be careful not to break
the pins.
6. Loose the screws that secured the IGBT
module and replace a new one.
7. Connect all cables to IGBT module.
8. Reassembly the shield cover and the rear
cover of console.
WARNING
Make sure that all cables are connected before you power on the system. Otherwise, the
IGBT assembly will be damaged.
9. Power on the system. Take exposure and verify the system works normally.
7-29
PWA, UPDOWN BOARD (P/N: 5085607)

1. Remove the rear cover and front cover of the C-Arm
console.
2. Disconnect all the cables of Updown Board.
3. Remove the screws that secure Updown board to
chassis.
4. Remove old Updown Board and replace a new one.
5. Plug the cables to corresponding connectors.
6. Reinstall the covers. Restart system and press lift
and down vertical column switches to verify
Updaown board is functional.
Power Distribution Unit Board (PDU) (P/N: 5085606)

1. Power off the system and disconnect Workstations
AC plug from the AC receptacle.
2. Remove the covers of the Workstation.
3. Remove the shield cover of PDU
4. Disconnect the cables from the PCB board.
5. Remove screws of PDU board.
6. Replace PDU board with a new one.
7. Put the insulation washer and new PDU board on
position and tighten the screws.
8. Plug the wires in the corresponding socket and bind
the cables.
9. The default power supply is AC 220V power input. If
your power supply is 110V, adjust the jumpers (J2
and J3). J2 is for 220V, J3 is for 110V. Refer to
chapter 3.5 for details.
10. Refer to chapter 4.9 to perform power input
tolerance check and calibration (if needed).
11. Reinstall the covers of console and restart system to confirm system can power on and take
exposure. Check all functions can work normally.
7-30
Replacement
System Interface Board (P/N: 5085605)

1. Power off system and refer to 7.3.4 remove Workstation back, side, front covers
2. Disconnect the cables related to system interface board
3. Release 4 secure screws under cabinet, and then pull out cabinet from Workstation frame.
4. Release 5 screws which secure System Interface Board and replace a new one.
Cabinet
5.
Connect cables and assemble the cabinet.
6.
Assemble Workstation front, side covers.
7.
Power on system and check the system can boot up functionally.
Mainframe Control Panel Kit (including membrane, display board and support board) (P/N:
5075907)
1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm.
2. Disconnect all cables connected to control panel.
3. Loose the screws that secure the control panel and remove the metal shield strips. Then remove
the control panel.
4. Replace a new control panel and connect the cables. Install the C-Arm cover.
5. Power on the system. Pressing the buttons and verify that relative indicator can light.
7-31
Workstation Control Panel Kit (5075908)

1. Remove all screws that secure the front upper cover.
2. Disconnect the cable connected with the

membrane keyboard. Remove the front upper cover.
3. Remove the screws that secure the membrane

keyboard.
4. Reinstall a new Workstation control panel kit.
5. Reassemble the membrane keyboard in the new
upper cover.
6. Remove the screws that secure the rear upper
cover. Remove the rear upper cover.
7. Replace the new upper cover kits and install them in
reverse sequence.
NOTE
7-32
The torque of the screws that secure the top covers is 2.5Nm.
Replacement
7.3.9.
Parts in Computer and Peripheral
Perform the procedures below to replace the parts of computer.

1. Power off the system and disconnect Workstations AC plug
from the AC receptacle.
2. Remove the rear cover, side covers and front cover of the
Workstation.
3. Unplug the cables from the computer. Loosen the screws of
the computer cover. Lift up and remove the cover.
4. Replace the FRU parts (such as the hard disk, display card, Memory Bank, mother board, image
grabber card and Chassis Power) in the computer.
7-33
Chassis Power
Hard Disk
Memory Bank
Display Card
Mother Board
SATA ports
Power on cable
(Connect to PDU)
NOTE
Cut off the binding tie before removing the memory bank. And replace a new one to
secure the memory bank after the replacement.
During replacement of the Hard Disk, connect system SATA cable to SATA1, DVD ROM SATA cable to other
SATA ports. After replacement of hard Disk, you should reinstall both OS and Application software. Refer
to section 5.3.
5. Power on the system. After login the Patient information screen, enter the patient information and
verify that you can enter normally. Create a new exam and take exposure. Verify the system can work
normally and the image will display on the left monitor.
6. If you have replaced the Hard Disk and backup the user data, you should also verify that the original
user data and images are remained in the system.
NOTE
CD/DVD Rom is an option part, so upgrade software need use USB CD/DVD Rom with Part
No# 5075511 on none CD/DVD Rom system.
Replacing Hard disk may need to get existing licence file for product configuration and
software options, if there is no backup.
Replacing computer mother board need request new licence file for product configuration
and software options.
7-34
Replacement
Peripheral
According to the drawing attached to the computer to install the mouse (connect to port4) and DVD RW
(connect to 24 and 25).
After replacing the mouse, power on the system and move the mouse. Verify that the mouse can
move freely.
After replacing the DVD R/W, power on the system and perform CD/DVD check according to section
3.7.1.
7-35
7.3.10. Exposure Indicator (5331638)

Perform the procedures below to replace exposure indicator:
1. For Brivo OEC 715/785: Release the 2 screws on the strip cover. Remove the strip cover.
For Brivo OEC 865: remove the Monitor back Cover.
Brivo OEC 715/785

2. Unplug the cable connected to the indicator. And
then remove the four screws on the sheet metal
support of the indicator.
3. Loose the three screws and then you can

remove the exposure indicator and replace it
with a new one. Assemble the sheet metal
support back onto monitors. Then assemble the
strip covers back.
4. Power on the system and take exposure. Verify

that the exposure indicator lights during
exposure.
7-36
Brivo OEC 865
Replacement
7.3.11. Monitors
CAUTION
To prevent monitor power lost, a binding is used to fix the monitor power plug (see the
picture in step6). The binding is provided with the monitor FRU. Make sure the binding is still
used after the monitor replacement.
Perform the procedures below to replace the monitors.

1. For Brivo OEC865 need remove monitor back
covers.
2. Loosen the screw and remove the monitor

receptacle access cover. Cut the tying strip on
power cable and pull out the two cables. Make
mark on cables to identify which monitor they
should connect to.
3. Remove the sheet metal support of the exposure indicator.
For Brivo OEC 715/785 need remove the strip cover of the exposure indicator wiring firstly.
Brivo OEC 715/785
Brivo OEC 865
4. Loosen the screws of the block that secure the

cables. And then loosen the screws on the
sheet metal support and remove it.
5. Release the four screws on the monitor and remove the monitor.
7-37
Brivo OEC715/785
Brivo OEC865
6. Install the new monitor and reset all parts and cables. Make sure the binding is still used after the
monitor replacement.
7. Power on the system. The left monitor of Workstation will display GE logo screen. The right monitor will
enter into the PATIENT INFORMATION Screen automatically. Perform the brightness and contrast
adjustment in section 4.8 if necessary.
7.3.12. CCD Camera

WARNING
CAUTION
Dangerous voltage levels are present when covers are removed from the C-Arm.
To prevent ESD damage to both the old and the new CCD Camera and CCU, make sure that
you are grounded with a properly functioning write strap before handling any ESD sensitive
electronic components.
1. Power off the system and position the C-Arm for easy access.
2. Remove the Image intensifier up cover.
3. Release the plug secure screws and unplug Camera cables.
4. Remove the upper counter balance.
5. Remove 3 camera secure screws and the old camera from the Image intensifier. Pay attention to
original mounting direction.
7-38
Replacement
Secure screws
Secure screws
Brivo OEC 715/785
Brivo OEC 865
6. Unwrap and prepare new camera to be assembled immediately in the next step.
NOTE
Be careful not to touch the camera lens or IMAGE INTENSIFIER output window and keep
both of them clear without any impurity.
7. Assemble the new Camera on the I.I, and tighten 3 camera fastening screws. Pay attention to the
mounting direction of camera on IMAGE INTENSIFIER as original.
8. Reinstalled upper counter balance.
9. Connect the Camera Head Cables and fix them.
10. Refer to 7.3.2 calibration matrix and chapter 4 to do calibration and checks.
11. After calibration and check, shut down system and reinstall covers removed in above steps.
7.3.13. Image Intensifier with power supply

Perform the procedures below to replace the Image Intensifier with power supply (P/N: 5075929 for Brivo
OEC 715/785, 5075930 for Brivo OEC 865).
1. Position the C-Arm for easy access. Remove the Image Intensifier cover. Disconnect all cables connect
CCD camera and Image intensifier Then remove CCD camera, all counter weight.
7-39
2. Loose the four fastening screws of Image Intensifier.
3. Take out both new and old Image intensifier power supply by releasing two secure screws, refer to
Image intensifier power supply replace procedure.
4. Install new Image intensifier on C-Arm.
NOTE
Be carefully when disassemble the

Image intensifier and make cables pass
through the Image intensifier housing to
avoid Image Intensifier drop.
Be careful not to touch the camera lens
or IMAGE INTENSIFIER output window
and keep both of them clear without any
impurity.
5. Reassemble Image intensifier power supply, CCD camera, counter weight and connect all cables.
NOTE
Ensure the cable tightly connect to the Image intensifier Power Supply. False connection
will lead to no image or image vibration in Fluoro.

7-40
Replacement
7.3.14. Image Intensifier Power supply

Theres another FRU for Image intensifier power supply (P/N: 5075009). During the replacement of the
power supply, replace the new power supply after step2.
1.
Remove Image intensifier cover, and then disconnect all cables connected to the power supply
and CCD Camera. Remove 2 secure screws of power supply on Image intensifier housing.
2.
Take out and replace a new power supply.
3.
Connect the cables and reassemble the Image intensifier cover.
4.
Refer to 7.3.2 calibration matrix and chapter 4 to do calibration and checks.
5.
After calibration and check, shut down system and reinstall covers removed in above steps.
NOTE
Ensure the cable tightly connect to the Image intensifier Power Supply. Virtual connection
will lead to no image or image vibration in Fluoro.
7-41
7.3.15. UPS (5075513)

1. Power off the system and
disconnect Workstations AC plug
from the AC receptacle.
2. Remove the rear cover, left and
right side covers of the Workstation.
3. Open the Power Distribution
package.
4. Disconnect the power cable
connected to UPS. Use the handle
to remove the UPS.
5. Release 6 secure screws of the
baffle, and then remove UPS.
6. Plug the UPS battery connector of new UPS.

7. Cut off the other end of the power supply cable and strip off 3 wire ends.
8. Reassemble the UPS and connect the cable.

9. Connect the interconnect cable to C-Arm. Plug the power cord into appropriate AC receptacle.
10. Power on the system. Verify that the system can power on normally. Power off the system. Verify
that the system can shut down without error.
11. Install all the covers of the Workstation.
7-42
Replacement
7.3.16. Misc. Parts

Rectifier Bridge (P/N: 5329275)
1. Power system
2. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm. Release the
three screws and open the package box. The
parts are on the back of the package.
3. Disconnect the cables connected to the rectifier
bridge.
4. Loose the screw and replace a new part.

5. Plug the cables to the relative jacks.
6. Reassemble all the parts.
system can work normally.
AC
_
+
AC
7-43
Drive Power transformer (P/N: 5085805)

2. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm.
3. Remove the kV control board according to 7.3.6.
4. Cut off the binding tie. Disconnect the wires of the
transformer, which are connected to J2.
5. Loose the screws and replace a new transformer. Connect the
wires and bind the wires with the binding tie to make a good
layout.
6. Reassemble all the parts.
system can work normally.
Main Transformer (P/N: 5085803)

1. Power off the system and disconnect Workstations AC plug from the AC receptacle.
2. Remove the rear cover, left and right side covers and front cover of the Workstation.
3. Move out the computer.
4. Cut off the binding tie. Disconnect the wires of the
transformer, which are connected to J1 and J2.
5. Loose the secure screws and remove the
transformer.
6. Replace a new one. Connect the wires and bind them
with binding tie to make a good wire layout.
7. Power on the system and take exposure. Verify that
the Workstation and C-Arm complete software boot
and initialization without error reported on their
displays. Select the film mode, take exposure with
80mAs, 110kVp. Verify that the system can work
normally.
7-44
Replacement
Start Up transformer (P/N: 5085804)

1. Remove the rear cover of Workstation. Release the three secure screws and open the package
box.
2. Cut off the binding tie. Disconnect the wires of the transformer, which are connected to PDU
board PJ12/PJ13.
3. Loose the secure screws and remove the transformer.

4. Replace a new one. Connect the wires and make a good wire layout.
5. Power on the system. Verify that the Workstation and C-Arm complete software boot and
initialization with no errors reported on their displays.
7-45
DC Power Supply (5085800/ 5085801)

1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm. Release the three screws and open the package box. The
parts are on the back of the package.
MISC, DC POWER
SUPPLY +5V, +12V
AND +24V (P/N:
5085801)
MISC, DC POWER
SUPPLY +5V,
+15V,-15V AND
+24V (P/N:
5085800)
2. Disconnect all cables connected to the power supply. Loose the screws and replace a new part.
3. Connect the cables according to the labels. Reassemble all parts.
DC bus capacitor (P/N: 5329278)

1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm. Release the three screws and open the package box. The
part is on the back of the package.
There are two capacitors here but only one in FRU kit. Please identify the trouble for the part to determine
the quantity of FRU parts.
7-46
Replacement
CAUTION
Do not touch the capacitors unless power has been completely removed and they have
been discharged.
2. Disconnect the cables. Release the secured screw and remove the capacitor.
3. Replace a new one. Reassemble all the parts.
4. Power on the system and take exposure. Verify that the system can work normally.
Resonant Capacitor (P/N: 5329281) and DC bus fuse (P/N: 5329279)

1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm. Release the three screws and open the package box.
2. Disconnect the cables connected to the resonant capacitor or DC bus fuse. Loose the screws and
replace a new one.
Resonant Capacitor
DC bus fuse
3. Power on the system and take exposure. Verify that the system can work normally.
7-47
Main Power on Breaker

Brivo OEC715/785/865 provides 110V breaker (P/N: 5085809) and 220V breaker (P/N: 5331605).
1. Remove the rear cover of the Workstation. Unplug the cable connected to the circuit breaker.
2. Loose the screws and remove the breaker. Then replace a new breaker.
3. Connect the cables to the breaker and reassemble the parts.

C-Arm Power Filter (P/N: 5331600)

There are 2 power filters in Brivo OEC715/785/865. One is behind the mainframe package box, the other
is in Workstation.
Power filter in Mainframe
1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm console
first.
2. Open the mainframe package box to access the
power filter.
3. Unplug the cable connected to the filter.
4. Loose the screws and remove the filter. Replace
a new part and connect the cable according to
the schematic on the filter.
5. Reassemble the new parts. Power on the
system.
6. Verify that the Workstation and C-Arm complete
software boot and initialization with no errors
7-48
Replacement
Power filter in Workstation

1. Remove the Workstation rear cover.
2. Unplug the cable connected to the filter.
3. Loose the screws and remove the filter. Replace
a new part and connect the cable according to
the schematic on the filter.
4. Reassemble the parts. Power on the system.
5. Verify that the Workstation and C-Arm complete
software boot and initialization with no errors
Button and Switch Kit (P/N: 5075922)

This kit includes 4 parts, Battery Power Switch (5085833), MISC, WKS POWER ON BUTTON (5085810), MISC,
C_ARM KEY SWITCH (5085817), Power on Indicator (P/N: 5085836)
Battery Power Switch (5085833):
1. Power off system, and unplug the power cord form
socket.
2. Remove the rear cover of the Workstation.
Connector
3. Unplug the wires connected to the Battery Power Switch

4. Release the secure ring of Battery Power Switch.
5. Remove Battery Power Switch and replace a new one.
6. Connect the AC cord to the socket.
7. Power on system, and then turn of the power on breaker,
press Battery Power Switch to verify UPS can be turned
off.
Fixed Ring
7-49
WKS Power on Button (5085810)

socket.
Lock Handle
2. Remove the rear and side covers of the Workstation.

3. Unplug the connector to connect WKS power on
button.
4. Release the secure ring and lock handle of WKS
power on button to Remove WKS Power Switch.
5. Replace a new one and connect the connector.
6. Assemble the Workstation front cover.
Secure Ring
Connector
7. Connect the AC cord to the socket. Verify that Power

on Button is available.
8. Assemble all other Workstation covers.
MISC, C-Arm Key Switch (5085817)

socket.
2. Remove the rear and side covers of the Workstation.
3. Unplug the wires connected to C-Arm Key Switch.
4. Release the secure ring of C-Arm Key Switch.
5. Remove C-Arm Key Switch and replace a new one.
6. Connect the AC cord to the socket. Verify that the
power on indicator will light.
Power on Indicator (P/N: 5085836)

socket.
2. Remove the rear cover of the Workstation.
7-50
Secure Ring
Replacement
3. Remove the 3 screws of the plate and remove the metal

plate to easily access to power on indicator.
4. Unplug the wires connected to the power on indicator.
5. Release the secure ring of power indicator.
6. Remove the indicator and replace a new one.
7. Connect the AC cord to the socket. Verify that the power
on indicator will light.
7-51
7.3.17. Interconnect WKS (5085708)

Interconnect Cable Workstation (PN#: 5085708):
Connector List:
Connector
To
To 5085781
To 5085708 (connector on 5085781)
PE
GND
PJ3
PJ6
Ethernet
Cable
Computer
RS-485
Computer
Replacement procedure:
1. Remove Workstation back, side, front covers refer to section 7.3.4.
2. Remove all cable pressures.
3. Cut all able ties, and unplug the all connecters.

4. Assemble the new cable and route it according to original.
NOTE
Keep new cable routed as original to ensure the package of workstation can be open and
closed smoothly.
5. Install all of the cable pressures.

6. Recheck all connectors are correctly connected and cables are well routed.
7. Power on the system, and take a shot.
8. If system works well, turn off system and assemble all covers.
7-52
Replacement
Interconnect Cable Mainframe: (PN#: 5085431)

Connector List:
Connector
Emergency Switch MF_AC_28V_N
Emergency Switch MF_AC_28V_L
To
Emergency Switch
J5
To exposure indicator
MBD MX7
To Mainframe Mother Board
AC220V_L
J4
AC220V_N
J4
PE
GND
N/A (Y/G Cable)
GND
1. Remove Mainframe back, front covers refer to section 7.
2. Cut all of cable ties and unplug the connectors
Interconnect Cable Workstation
Emergency Switch
AC220V
3. Remove the four screws securing the casting, and then remove the four screws securing the inner
socket to take out the head of GigE Ethernet cable.
7-53
4. Replace a new cable and remove the four screws securing the inner socket to assemble the head of
GigE Ethernet cable.
5. Fasten the four screws securing the inner socket and securing screws of casting.
6. Connect all of cables and route all cables as original.
NOTE
Keep new cable routed as original to ensure the package of mainframe can be open and
closed smoothly.
7. Recheck all connectors are correctly connected and cables are well routed.
8. Power on the system, and take a shot.
9. If system works well, turn off system and assemble all covers.
7.3.18. Bundle cable: (5085700)

Connector List (Mainframe Base Side):
Connector
To
GigE Plug
Interconnect Cable MF
MX2
MF Mother Board
GND
GND
MX8
MX10
MF Mother Board
MX6
MF Mother Board
Yellow
T1
Red
Cap
GND
GND
MX5
GND
GND
MX4
MF Mother Board
7-54
Replacement
Connector List (C-arm_I.I. Side):

Connector
To
5085725 (GigE Plug)
Camera
Camera
Camera
I.I. GND
To I.I. Power supply
I.I.
To I.I.
Connector List (C-arm_Monoblock Side):

Connector
To
Laser J7
Laser Aimer
Monoblock
Monoblock
Inverter
Monoblock
Seal signal
Monoblock
J10
Remove Filter Proximity SW
J11
Remove Filter Proximity SW
Monoblock GND
Monoblock
Collimator
Collimator
1. Move C-arm to a clear area.
2. Remove mainframe front and back covers, refer to above sections.
3. Open mainframe package.
4. Cut all of bundle cable related cable ties in Mainframe base
5. Disconnect all related cables.
6. Remove 3 securing screws to fix interconnect cable bracket.
7-55
7. Remove two cable sleeves.
8. Refer to section 7.3 remove Monoblock, collimator and Image Intensifier.

9. Remove the Monoblock support and pull out all cables via C-arm carefully.
NOTE
After removing Monoblock, collimator and Image

Intensifier, C-cam will in unbalance status. The
back of C-arm will lower than normal. Take care
anything would be pressured by C-arm. Find wood
block to support the mainframe is appreciated.
10. Let C-arm in Up/Down position and Down/Up position to make

the cable go through the C-arm.
7-56
Replacement
11. Install Monoblock support, monoblock, collimator and Image intensifier.
NOTE
After removing Monoblock, collimator and Image

Intensifier, C-cam will in unbalance status. The
back of C-arm will lower than normal. Take care
anything would be pressured by C-arm. Find wood
block to support the mainframe is appreciated.
12. Connect relative cables, install cable sleeves, cable supports,

route all cables, install all other parts which were removed on
above steps.
13. Power on system to ensure system boot up successfully.
7-57
7.3.19. Fuse kit (5075919)

The kit contains 6 kinds of fuse. You can choose the fuse to replace according to the requirement.
P/N
Qty
46-267217P29
1.0
46-267217P30
1.0
5331602
1.0
5439918
1.0
5457478
5.0
5459754
3.0
7-58
Description
PROTECTION FUSE, 1A, 5
x 20 mm , TIME DELAY,
250V, 2AG
PROTECTION
FUSE,
3.15A, 5 x 20 mm , TIME
DELAY, 250V, 2AG
Where Used
50856
05
PWA, SYSTEM INTERFACE

BOARD
F2
50856
05
PWA, SYSTEM INTERFACE

BOARD
F1
MISC, FUSE MODEL 6.3A,

EVR
N/A
FUSE
250V
5X20mm
FUSE
1.25A
5X20MM
FUSE
2.5A
5X20MM
50856
06
50856
01
50856
01
0.5A
250V
250V
Installed in Fuse soket

model on Workstation UTYPETRACK
PWA, POWER
DISTRIBUTION UNIT
F1, F6, F8
PWA, MOTHER BOARD
F3, F4, F5, F7, F8
PWA, MOTHER BOARD
F1, F2, F6
Replacement
7.3.20. Linear Actuator (5075921)

1. Remove the C-Arm console covers. Rotate the
C-Arm to the horizontal position. Lock the
orbital, wig-wag and lateral brakes.
2. Loosen 2 screws from horizontal brake handle

and remove the handle.
3. Remove the screws of the cross arm cover

and remove the cover.
4. Loose the screws and remove the rear plate. Remove the pin in the shaft.
5. Put something (Wood strip or other kind of support) under console to prevent the whole base to tilt
7-59
backward.
6. Loosen the screws on cable holder and
release the cable. Draw out the C-Arm and
Cross-arm assembly slowly.
7. Use something (for example, wood bar) to

block up the C-Arm. And put something on
ground and on left of base (for example,
cardboard). Overturn the C-Arm console to left
side.
8. Remove the bottom cover under the linear actuator. And then remove the lower shaft.
9. Unplug the J4 from the up down drive board. Cut off the 2 wires. Cut off the binding tie and then draw
out the cable from the hole.
7-60
Replacement
10. Open the package box. Remove the screws on the top end of external column, and remove the side
cover. Remove the plug on inner column. Screw a M4 screw into the screw hold on actuator upper pin
and draw the shaft out.
Upper shaft structure:
Upper Shaft
Lower Shaft
Screw M4 screw in here and

pull out upper shaft
7-61
11. Draw out the linear actuator from the bottom.
NOTE
The actuator is assembled by two cross shafts (Upper shaft and Lower Shaft). To install
the actuator must let the length of new actuator is same as the replaced one.
12. Replace a new linear actuator and reassemble the parts. Plug the wire into the connector. And then
insert the connector to J4 of the up down drive board.
13. Insert the pin with M4 screw into the hole and check if the pin is in the axis of the linear actuator.
Release the M4 screw and tighten the plug on the hole. Lock the pin on the bottom of the linear
actuator and put the cover back.
14. Turn back the base assembly and reassemble all the parts.
15. Connect the interconnect cable and power on the system. Press the up and down key on control
panel and verify that the C-Arm can rise and drop freely.
7-62
Replacement
7.3.21. Switches
Hand switch (P/N: 5085113)
1. Remove the rear and front cover of the Mainframe.
Disconnect the cable from the Hand switch.
2. Cut the bundles that secured the Hand switch cable.
3. Remove the Hand switch and replace a new one.
4. Reinstall Mainframe front and rear covers.
5. Power on the system. Press the hand switch to take
exposure. Verify that the image will display on the left
monitor.
Footswitch (P/N: 5085096/ 5085115)

2. Insert the footswitch to the connector.
3. Power on system.
4. Press the footswitch to take exposure.
5. Verify that the image will be displayed on the left monitor.
6. For 5085115, press image save Button can save an image displayed on the left monitor.
7-63
Emergency Switch (P/N: 5330849)

1. Remove the rear and front cover of the C-Arm console.
2. Pull out the spring clip and release the emergency switch.
3. Disconnect the cable connected to mounting of the

emergency switch.
4. Loose the screws and remove the base and switch. Then
replace a new one.
5. Power on the system. Press the emergency switch, vertical
column operation will cease and X-rays will be disabled.
Rotate as arrow indication to release the emergency switch.
You can continue to use the system.
7-64
Replacement
7.3.22. Others
Please refer to chapter3 for the replacement of these FRU parts.
Part Number
Section Number
Part Description
5085235
ASM,SKIN SPACER
3.7.7
2418430
Component, UP-D897 Thermal Printer, EVR
3.7.4
5330067
Component, UP-990AD Thermal Printer, EVR
3.7.4
5075816
3.7.2
5332898
Component, Video distributor for external DVI video output, EVR
3.7.3
ASM, LASER AIMER, 9 INCH ENGLISH WITH ALL LANGUAGES SUPPLEMENT
3.7.2
5085115
ASM, DOUBLE FOOT SWITCH,EVR
3.7.8
5075505
Component, JPI grid for 715,785
3.7.6
5330066
Component, Grid, EVR
3.7.6
5330473-01
Please refer to below table to identify power cable and plug to related country:
Item
Country
FRU Part # Cable with plug
Part #_Plug
Plug Type
Voltage
Albania
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
Algeria
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
Argentina
5407045
N/A
IRAM 2073
220V
Australia
5407042
N/A
AS/NZS 3112
230V
Austria
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
Bahrain
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
230V
Bangladesh
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
230V
Belarus
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
Belgium
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
10
Bolivia
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
11
Bosnia
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
12
Brazil
5407039
N/A
NBR 14136
127V
13
Brazil
5449309
2415149
NBR 14136
220V
14
Brunei
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
240V
15
Burkina Faso
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
7-65
Item
Country
Part #_Plug
Plug Type
Voltage
16
Cambodia
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
230V
17
Cameroon
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
18
Chile
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
19
China
5408320
N/A
GB 1002
220V
20
Croatia
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
21
Colombia
5408318
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
110V
22
Costa Rica
5408318
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
120V
23
Cote dIvoire
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
24
Cyprus
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
240V
25
Czech Repulblic
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
26
Egypt
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
27
France
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
28
Germany
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
29
Greece
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
30
Guatemala
5408318
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
110V
31
Honduras
5408318
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
110V
32
HongKong
5407032
5399115
BS 546
220V
33
HongKong
5407033
BS 1363A
220V
34
HongKong
5408320
N/A
GB 1002
220V
35
Hungary
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
36
India
5407032
5399115
BS 546
230V
37
Indonesia
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
38
Indonesia
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
230V
39
Iraq
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
40
Iraq
5407032
5399115
BS 546
230V
41
Iraq
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
230V
42
Ireland
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
230V
43
Israel
5407050
N/A
SI-32
220V
44
Italy
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
45
Jamaica
5408318
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
110V
46
Japan
5407035
N/A
NEMA 5-20P
100V
47
Japan
5407036
N/A
L6-20P
200V
7-66
Replacement
Item
Country
Part #_Plug
Plug Type
Voltage
48
Jordan
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
49
Jordan
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
230V
50
Kazakhstan
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
51
Kuwait
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
220V
52
Laos
5407038
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
220V
53
Lebanon
5407032
5399115
BS 546
220V
54
Lebanon
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
220V
55
Libya
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
56
Libya
5407032
5399115
BS 546
220V
57
Luxembourg
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
58
Macedonia
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
59
Malaysia
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
240V
60
Malta
5407032
5399115
BS 546
230V
61
Malta
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
230V
62
Mexico
5408318
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
127V
63
Montenegro
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
64
Morocco
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
65
New Zealand
5407042
N/A
AS/NZS 3112
230V
66
Netherlands
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
67
Nigeria
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
230V
68
Oman
5407031
2415149
CEE7
240V
69
Oman
5407032
5399115
BS 546
240V
70
Pakistan
5407032
5399115
BS 546
230V
71
Panama
5408318
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
120V
72
Paraguay
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
73
Peru
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
74
Philippines
5407038
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
220V
75
Poland
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
76
Portugal
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
77
Qatar
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
240V
78
Romania
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
79
Russia
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
7-67
Item
Country
Part #_Plug
Plug Type
Voltage
80
Saudi Arabia
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
220V
81
Serbia
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
82
Singapore
5407032
5399115
BS 546
230V
83
Singapore
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
230V
84
Slovakia
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
85
South Africa
5407032
5399115
BS 546
220V
86
South Korea
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
87
Spain
5407031
2415149
CEE7
230V
88
Switzerland
5407048
5399117
SEV 1011
230V
89
Taiwan
5408318
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
110V
90
Thailand
5407038
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
220V
91
Trinidad & Tobago
5408318
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
115V
92
Tunisia
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
93
Turkey
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
94
Ukraine
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
95
United Arab Emirates
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
220V
96
United Kingdom
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
230V
97
Uruguay
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
98
Venezuela
5408318
N/A
NEMA 5-15P
120V
99
Vietnam
5407031
2415149
CEE7
220V
100
Vietnam
5407033
5399116
BS 1363A
220V
101
United States
5407035
N/A
NEMA 5-20P
120V
7-68
Chapter8.
Periodic Maintenance
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product Service Manual
8.1. Overview
This procedure describes how to conduct performance checks and maintenance procedures. Use the
procedure in conjunction with PM checklist in section 9.2. Follow the procedures in the order they appear
here and record all required information on the checklist.
Serious injury and property damage can result from incorrectly performed service procedures. Observe
all operating and safety procedures in this document.
Procedures should be performed by service personnel specifically trained by GE HUALUN
Medical Systems, Inc. to calibrate the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 C-Arm and Workstation.
WARNING
8.1.1.
Safety
Ingress of Fluids
WARNING
The system must never be operated or stored in locations where conductive fluids, like
water and saline solution, might spill on the equipment.
Always unplug the AC power cable from the wall outlet before cleaning the equipment. Do not allow
water, soap, or other liquids to drip into the equipment and cause short circuits, electric shock and fire
hazards.
Unauthorized Modifications
Under no circumstances should the safety interlock in the system be bypassed, jumped, or otherwise
disabled.
NOTE
All GE Healthcare systems comply with International Electro Technical Commission safety
standard IEC-60601. Do not connect any external device to the system that does not
meet the requirements of IEC-60601. Only devices provided or approved by GE HUALUN
Medical Systems, Inc. should be connected to the system.
Motorized Mechanical Operation

The Vertical Column is motorized and should be observed continuously during operation to avoid
pinching or colliding with people and object.
If covers are removed, use extreme care when operating motorized features. Do not carelessly place
objects on the equipment or bump or lean against the equipment. Do not wear loose clothing that may
be caught by mechanical mechanisms. Keep hands and fingers clear of motorized equipment while the
motors are in operation.
Electrical Shock
WARNING
WARNING
8-2
This system can generate lethal voltages. Practice safe electrical testing procedures
when performing periodic maintenance procedures.
After taking X-rays, the high voltage cables can retain a lethal charge, even if you power
down the system. Even though the contacts are recessed, high voltages can arc several
inches from their terminals if the cables are removed from the connector wells. Use
caution when disconnecting high voltage cables even when the power is turned off. If
you remove these connections, immediately discharge their contacts against the high
voltage tank case (ground).
X-radiation Exposure
The X-ray tube assembly produces X-radiation when energized. Never operate this device without X-ray
shielding in place. Use lead shielding and draping to protect personnel.
WARNING
Lead aprons, radiation monitors, and appropriate radiation shields must be utilized for
the protection of all personnel in the vicinity while performing tests. Living human
anatomy should never be used as a phantom or demonstration aid. Do not produce
radiation in hallways.
CAUTION
Many of the PCB's in this system contain components, which are sensitive to ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD). Observe ESD safety procedures.
8.1.2.
Tools and Test Equipment
In addition to standard service tools and test equipment, the following special tools and test equipment
are required to complete the PM procedure.
Standard Tool
Item
Tool
Lead Apron
kV meter
Dosimeter
Erasable marker (whiteboard marker)
10
mAs meter
11
Precision flat head screwdriver (3mm or less) to adjust camera iris, focus
12
Transparent adhesive tape, with cutter (or need scissor or knife to cut the tape)
Special Tool
Item
Tool
GE part number
00-877682-01
9-inch BAFT Tool
00-878105-02
PWA, extend board
5085609
8-3
8.2. PM Checklist
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 PM Checklist
Medical Facility Information
Hospital or Clinic Name:
Address:
State:
Postal Code/Zip:
Contact Phone:
Field Service Engineer Information

FSE name:
City:
Country:
Contact Person:
Department:
Employee SSO:
Installation Date:
System Configuration
Workstation Software Version:
Serial Number:
MCB Software Version:

System ID:
Safety Inspection
Antistatic Drag-wires
Electrical Plug and power cord
Footswitch cable and pins

Ground Continuity
Interconnect Cable and Connector
PC Maintenance
PC Clean
Yes
No
Replace Cell Battery (If needed)
Yes
No
System Function Checks

Power On Checks
Pass
C-Arm Checks
Key Switch:
C-Arm Controls:
Emergency Switch:
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Fail
Workstation Checks
Fail
Fail
Fail
Fail
Mechanical Movement :
Workstation Operation:
UPS Battery Performance Check:
System Status Backup:
Pass
Pass
Pass
Yes
Fail
Fail
Fail
No
X-ray Generator Accuracy Tests
KV Accuracy ( 7%)
Low Dose:
99kVp@2.0mA: ______,
Normal Fluoro:
66kVp@4.0mA:_______,
110kVp@1.0mA:________
HLF:
55kVp@4.0mA(Actual 6.0):_______, 110kVp@4.0mA(Actual 6.0):________
Digital spot:
55kVp@4.0mA:_______,
Radiography:
55 kVp@40mAs :______,
80kVp@4.0mA: ________,
80 kVp@40mAs: _______,
110kVp@4.0mA:________
110 kVp@20mAs: ______
Low Dose:
2.0mA@80kVp:______,
Normal Fluoro:
mA Accuracy ( 10%)
0.1mA@40kVp:_______,
4.0mA@110kVp:_______,
HLF:
4.0mA(Actual 6.0)@110kVp:_______,
4.0mA(Actual 4.5)@110KVp:_______, (Dose Group: Normal 50 and HLF 50)
8-4
Digital Spot:
3.2mA(Actual 6.4)@80kVp:_______,
4.0mA(Actual 10)@110kVp:______ ,( For 100V/110V/120V input)
4.0mA(Actual 16)@110KVp:______, (For 200V/220V/230V/240V input)
Radiography:
For power input: 100V/110V/120V:
40KVp@40mAs (Actual 10mA): ______, 110KVp@40mAs (Actual 10mA): ______,
For power input: 200V/220V/230V/240V
40KVp@40mAs (Actual 10mA): ______, 110KVp@40mAs (Actual 10mA): ______,
40kV, 40mAs:______,
110kV, 1mAs: _______,
110kV, 2mAs:_______,
110KV, 40mAs:_______,
mAs Accuracy(10%)
Image Quality Check

Image Intensifier Field Size Check
NORM210 10
Mag Mode
MAG1155 8
MAG2 115 8

Auto Technique Tracking and Image Resolution Check
Copper
Filters
(mm)
715/785
865
644
2
3
Specification(kVp)
Specification (LP/mm)
Adjustment
done?
Mag Mode
(Field Size)
718/785
865
624
Yes
No
NORM (9)
2.0
2.2
Yes
No
744
724
Yes
No
MAG1 (6)
2.6
3.0
Yes
No
824
804
Yes
No
MAG2 (4.5)
3.1
3.5
Yes
No
Shading Correction Check
Measured
(kVp)
Image Resolution
Pass
Measured
(LP/mm)
Adjustment
done?
Fail
Dose Check
Dose rate Check
DAP Accuracy Check
No adjustment necessary:
715/785
Measured as found:
_______mR/min
4.10.3mR/min
Pass
Fail (Need Calibration)
865
3.10.3mR/min
Measured if
adjusted:
_______ mR/min
DAP Calibration Done
Reporting
Install Equipment Covers
Yes
No
Reporting complete
Yes
No
Calibrated Tools List

Tool Name
Calibration Due Date
Tool Number
Comments
Periodic maintenance of the system is required to maintain the system lifecycle. The first periodic
maintenance shall be implemented after first 13 months use, then it is suggested to do once per year by
a GE qualified service engineer.
8-5
8.3.
Medical Facility Information:

Enter all information about the medical facility where the system is installed.
Field Service Engineer Information:
Enter Field Service Engineer name, Region ID number and Employee ID number.
System Configuration:
Complete each field in the System Configuration section. This section identifies specific information about
the system being maintained.
8.4.
Safety Inspection
Follow this procedure to inspect system components. Look for loose, damaged, or missing parts. Check
each component for proper operation.
WARNING
Electrical circuits inside the equipment use voltages that are capable of causing serious
injury or death from electrical shock. Use appropriate precautions.
If the system has power applied, power off the system and unplug the C-Arms AC power cord from AC
outlet. Remove C-arm and workstation covers as needed.
8.4.1.
Antistatic Drag Wires
Check the systems antistatic drag wires. There is one suspended below the workstation and one
underneath the C-Arm. Both wires must securely attach to the system and not be damaged or
encumbered by debris.
8.4.2.
Electrical Plug and power cord
Inspect the C-Arms AC power cord and AC line plug for damage and missing parts. Make sure all wiring
insulation is intact. Ensure that there are no broken or frayed wires. Make sure grounding pin is present
on AC line plug, and that all conductors on plug are secure and in good condition.
WARNING
8.4.3.
Some devices such as high voltage cables and electrolytic capacitors can retain a
dangerous static charge for long periods after power has been removed. Do not touch
these components unless power has been completely removed and they have discharged.
Interconnect cable and Connector
Check the interconnect cable for damage or other problems. Verify that connector on cable mates well
with the connector on C-Arm and that there are no bent or missing pins. Make sure the strain relief
attaches securely to both the interconnect cable and connector.
8.4.4.
Footswitch cable and pins
Inspect footswitch cable and verify that the cable, connector and pins are not damaged.
8-6
8.4.5.
Ground Continuity
Perform the ground continuity test described below.

WARNING
Do not perform this continuity test with the AC plug connected to a power receptacle.
Connect the Interconnect Cable to the C-Arm and verify continuity between the following:
From
To
Spec
Workstation
The right-top screw of WorkStation back cover
AC Power Plug Ground Pin
< 0.5
Any one of screws to fix Monitor
< 0.5
Any one of screws on the tube cover
< 0.5
Any one of screws to fix the Image Intensifier
< 0.5
Metal surface of central C-arm.

Comments: Close to the zero mark of orbital.
< 0.5
Metal surface of lock wrench of interconnector cable
< 0.5
Mainframe
NOTE
If there is special ground continuity regulation for in used system, FE shall follow local
regulation and perform the test by Ground Continuity test equipment.
Below is the special regulation for Ground Continuity:
The resistance measured from the ground pin on the power cord to any accessible
conductive surface in the system (e.g., the chasis) shall not exceed 0.3 Ohm per European
norm EN 62353, specification.
The resistance measured from the ground pin on the power cord to any accessible
conductive surface in the system (e.g., the chasis) shall not exceed 0.2 ohms per IEC
60601-1 or equivalent.
8-7
8.5. PC Clean and UPS Performance Check

8.5.1.
PC clean
1. Refer to section 7.3.4, remove the workstation back, side, front covers.
2. Remove PC cover.
3. Clean the PC outside and inside.

4. Fasten all PC internal card and cables.
5. Re-plug in cables connected to PC.
NOTE
8-8
Recommend to replace the cell battery regularly after being installed for 3/6/9 years, if
needed.
8.5.2.
UPS performance check:
1. Power on system, waiting for system boot up completely.

2. Double click UPS Display/Menu button, UPS battery capacity
will be displayed on screen. If the displayed capacity is less
than 3 min, the UPS need be replaced.
3. Login software service tool, in log viewer Tab, in Exception
Code input area input 0408018 then click search button. If
code 0408018 is recorded in log, the UPS also need be
replaced.
UPS Display/Menu Button
4. Reassemble computer cover.

5. Reassemble all workstation covers which were removed in
step1.
8-9
8.6. System Function checks

Check the following areas of the C-Arm and workstation for proper operation.
8.6.1.
WARNING
Perform Power On Checks

Observe safety procedures when operating motorized features.
Perform the following steps with the system powered up and normally booted.
1. Connect the integrated cable in the C-Arm connector and lock it. Connect the Footswitch cable to the
C-Arm.
2. Plug the AC power cord into the receptacle.
3. Press the system on key located on the C-Arm control panel. Verify that the workstation and C-Arm
complete their software boot and initialization with no errors reported on the workstation and C-Arm
displays.
8.6.2.
C-Arm Checks
Mechanical Movement Test:

Refer to section 3.6.2 for C-arm mechanical movement checks.
NOTE
If wigwag brake cant prevent Wig Wag motion effectively, or the lock and release
positions cant fit as the label indicating, perform below procedure to refresh the force of
wigwag brake.
38.5N<Force of wigwag brake <76.9N
Wigwag brake PM:
1. Pull up the handle far enough (about 3mm) that it clears the fixed shaft.
2. Turn the handle anticlockwise
3. Push down the handle.
8-10
NOTE
If lateral brake cant prevent lateral motion effectively, perform below procedure to
refresh the force of wigwag brake.
54N<Force of wigwag brake <90N
Lateral brake PM:

Set
Screw
Screw cap
Two screws inside
Set
Screw
Friction pad
1. Remove screw caps, cover and screws inside.
2. Fasten the screw to refresh the force of brake.
NOTE
If above step 1/2 can refresh the force, perform below procedure
Set screw inside

3. Loose the set screws.
4. Tighten the brake shoe by adjusting the screw adjuster to left in above picture;
5. Check the force of lateral brake and adjust the screw adjuster, until the lateral brake is effective
again.
6. Secure the screw adjuster with the set screws.
7. Reinstall the screws, cover and screw cap which were removed in step1.
8-11
C-Arm Controls Check:

Refer to section 3.6.2 for C-Arm Controls Check.
Perform the following C-Arm control checks:
WARNING
Some of the following procedures produce X-rays. Take appropriate precautions.
X-ray Key/X-ray Switch Functional Test:

Perform the following test to verify that the systems X-ray and key switches are operating satisfactorily.
WARNING
This procedure produces X-rays. Take appropriate precautions.
1. Place the X-ray Keyswitch in STANDBY position (

). Press Handswitch and verify that no X-rays are
generated. Press Vertical lift button and verify that vertical lift column is not operational.
2. Place X-ray Keyswitch in XRAYOFF position (
). Press Handswitch and verify that no X-rays are
generated. Press vertical lift button and verify the vertical lift column is operational.
3. Place X-ray Keyswitch in ON position (
). Press Handswitch/Footswitch and vertical lift button to
verify X-ray and vertical lift column are enable.
Emergency Switch:
Perform the following test to verify the emergency switch.
1. Press the emergency switch during raising Carm.
2. Verify that vertical column operation and
exposure are disabled.
3. Release the emergency switch. Verify that the
vertical column operation and exposure are
available.
8-12
Emergency Switch
8.6.3.
Workstation Checks
Refer to 3.6.1 for Workstation mechanical movement check.
NOTE
Adjust the monitor vertical movement annually, according to below procedure:

10N<Force of monitor vertically movement<50N
Monitor vertical movement PM:

1. For 865 need remove monitor back cover.
2. Screw the nut to adjust the tightness of the monitor movement in moderate strength.
Brivo OEC 715/785 Back View

NOTE
Brivo OEC 865 Back View
If friction of monitor horizontal movement is not effective, perform below procedure to

refresh the friction of monitor horizontal movement.
10N<Force of monitor horizontal movement<50N
Monitor horizontal movement PM:

1. Remove screws on two sides of monitor support
cover.
2. Remove 2 inside screws.
3. Rotate the secure nut clock wisely to increase
friction for horizontal rotation
8-13
Workstation Operation Function Check:

Refer to Refer to 3.6.1 for Workstation operation Function check.
System Status Backup:

Refer to 5.2.6 perform below procedure:
1.
Perform integrity check.
2.
Backup system Database.
3.
Export system setup and administration configuration, if needed.
8.7. X-ray Generator Accuracy Tests

Below tests are to measure the kVp/mA/mAs accuracy of the X-ray generator system.
8.7.1.
kVp Accuracy
Refer to section4.2.1 to perform kVp accuracy check and perform KVp calibration if needed.
8.7.2.
mA Accuracy
Refer to section4.3.1 to perform mA accuracy check and perform mA calibration if needed.
8.7.3.
mAs Accuracy
Refer to section4.4.1 to perform mAs accuracy check and perform mAs calibration if needed.
8-14
8.8. Image Quality check

8.8.1.
Field Size Check
1.
Select relative field size, open the collimator to the maximum, and take an exposure.
2.
Read the BAFT tick mark on the boundary of the image. The size of the image should be within the
range of the values below:
3.
Mag Mode
NORM
MAG1
MAG2
210 10
155 8
115 8
If the requirement is not met, you must perform I.I. Field Size Calibration in 4.6.5.
8.8.2.
1.
Select Auto Fluoro mode and the NORM field size via control panel.
2.
Open the collimator Iris and leaves completely.
3.
Place copper filters on the collimator and take exposure. Verify that the kVp tracks within the range
indicated in table below.
Model
Copper Filter Thickness
1mm
2mm
3mm
Brivo OEC 715

Brivo OEC 785
kVp range
644kVp
744kVp
824kVp
Brivo OEC865
kVp range
624kVp
724kVp
804kVp
4.
Remove all copper filters.
5.
If the kVp is not in the range, refer to 4.6.7 for calibration.
8.8.3.
Image Resolution
Use the converging line pairs/millimeter (Lp/mm) tool on the Image Intensifier. Verify the resolution in
Lp/mm is equal to, or greater than the following values:
Field Size
Resolution
(Lp/mm)
NORMAL
MAG2
MAG1
Brivo OEC
715/785
Brivo OEC
865
Brivo OEC
715/785
Brivo OEC
865
Brivo OEC
715/785
Brivo OEC
865
2.0
2.2
2.6
3.0
3.1
3.5
Record test results on PM checklist.

If the resolution check fails, refer to section 4.6.8 for Camera Focus calibration.
8.8.4.
Shading Correction Check
Refer to 4.6.9 to perform shading correction check. Perform calibration if needed.
8-15
8.9. Dose Check

8.9.1.
Dose Rate Check
Entrance exposure is the amount of radiation available at the entrance point of patient anatomy.
Entrance exposure is measured 9" above the surface of the Image Intensifier in the center of the X-ray
beam. This measurement is used to represent the average thickness of patient anatomy.
1.
Using a dosimeter for the measurements. Place the dosimeter probe on the I.I. grid center. Use 2mm
copper to cover the beam path on the X-ray tube. Take exposure in Auto fluoro mode. Dose rate
should be within 4.10.3 mR/min (for Brivo OEC 715/785)/3.10.3mR/min (for Brivo OEC 865).
2.
Indicate if adjustments were made on the Checklist.
8.9.2.
DAP Accuracy Check
Refer to 4.7 to perform DAP accuracy check. Perform the DAP calibration, if needed.
NOTE
The field size in the form should be measured by field size measure tool.
8.10. Reporting
8.10.1. Install Equipment Covers
Install all equipment covers you removed earlier. Make sure all air filters are clean and properly attached
to the covers.
8.10.2. Complete PM Comments

Write any comments important to the PM procedure in the Comments section of the PM Checklist.
8-16
Chapter9. Technical Reference
9.1. Overview
The policy of GE Healthcare is one of continual product development and improvement.
For this reason, GE Healthcare reserves the right to change the operating characteristics and
specifications of newer products at any time, without prior notice, and without incurring any obligation
relating to previously manufactured items.
The specifications listed are limited to general performance and physical data. Specifications of optional
equipment provided by other manufacturers are given in the applicable manuals provided with those
options.
9.2. System Specifications

9.2.1.
Safety Classification
Class I, Type B, IEC60601-1

Ordinary protection against ingress of water
Degree of Protection:
System: IPX0
Footswitch: IPX8
9.2.2.
Environmental Requirements
Operating Conditions:
Temperature:
+10C~+40C (+50F~+104F)
Humidity:
700hPa~1060hPa
Transportation and Storage:

Temperature:
-20C~+55C (-4F~+131F)
Humidity:
10~95% Relative, non-condensing
500hPa~1060hPa
9.2.3.
Power Requirements
Voltage:
AC 100V/110V/120V|200V|220V/230V/240V
Frequency:
50Hz/60Hz
Rated Momentary Line Current (shorter than 5s):
9-2
30A (100V/110V/120V)
Technical Reference
28A (200V)
25A (220V/230V/240V)
Rated Continuous Line Current:
20A (100V/110V/120V)
12A (200V)
10A (220V/230V/240V)
Maximum line impedance: 0.3 |0.6 |0.6
NOTE
9.2.4.
16A power supply is required in China. And 20 A is required in Japan.
Circuit Breaker
Breaker for 110V:
Rated Voltage
AC 250 V
Frequency
50 Hz /60 Hz
Rated Current
Breaker for 220V:
20A (AC)
Rated Voltage
AC 250 V
Frequency
50 Hz /60 Hz
Rated Current
12A (AC)
9.2.5.
Earth leakage current
Normal condition
0.5mA
Single fault condition
0.5mA
9-3
9.2.6.
Physical Specifications
C-Arm
9-4
SID
39.3 (100cm)
Horizontal travel
8 (20cm)
Vertical travel
17.5 (44.5cm)
Orbital rotation
120(90underscan /30over scan)
Lateral rotation
205
Wig-Wag
25(12.5)
Weight
26010kg
Technical Reference
Workstation
Weight: 17010kg
Option Weight
Laser Aimer (tube)
0.650.05kg
Laser Aimer (Image Intensifier)
2.150.2kg
Film Cassette holder
1.350.1kg
Video Distributor
2.30.2kg
Skin Spacer
0.350.1kg
Removable filter
0.300.1 kg
Removable grid
1.600.1 kg
19 Mono LCD Monitor
5.00.05kg
9-5
9.3. Specification of Key Components

9.3.1.
X-Ray Generator
Nominal electric power
2.0kw (100kV, 20mA, 0.1s)
Maximum electric power

Normal Fluoro
440W (110kV, 4mA)
High Level Fluoro (HLF)
660W (110kV, 6mA; 55kV, 12mA)
Low dose
220W (110kV, 2mA)
Digital Spot
1760W (110kV, 16mA)
Radiography
2.2 kW (110kV, 20mA) @ 200V, 220V, 230V,

240V;
1.1 kW (110kV, 10mA) @ 100V, 110V, 120V.
High frequency generator
40kHz
Voltage
40kV~110kV
Normal Fluoro
When the X-ray tube current reaches its

highest value of 4mA, the obtainable highest
X-ray tube voltage is 110kV.

Low dose
when the X-ray tube current reaches its

Digital Spot

Radiography:
20mA, stationary @ 200V, 220V, 230V, 240V;

the obtainable highest X-ray tube voltage is
110kV;
10mA, stationary @ 100V, 110V, 120V; the
obtainable highest X-ray tube voltage is 110kV.
Current
9-6
Normal Fluoro
0.1 mA~4 mA; when the X-ray tube voltage

reaches its highest value of 110kV, the
obtainable highest X-ray tube current is 4mA.
Technical Reference

Low dose

Digital Spot
0.2mA~16 mA; when the X-ray tube voltage

Radiography
1mAs~80mAs @ 200V, 220V, 230V, 240V;

current: 20mA, stationary; the obtainable
highest X-ray tube voltage is 110kV;
1mAs~40mAs @ 100V, 110V, 120V; current:
10mA, stationary; the obtainable highest X-ray
tube voltage is 110kV.
Radiography
Voltage
40~110kVp
Value of mAs
1.0, 1.3, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3, 8.0, 10, 13,
16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 mAs @ 200V, 220V,
230V, 240V;
1.0, 1.3, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3, 8.0, 10, 13,
16, 20, 25, 32, 40 mAs @ 100V, 110V, 120V;
Pulse Fluoro
1/2/4/8pps
The lowest Current Time Product or the

combination of Loading Factors
40kVp, 1mAs
9-7
9.3.2.
X-Ray tube
Nominal high voltage
110 kV
Nominal input power
2.2 kW
Maximum anode heat capacity
53 kJ
Target material
Tungsten
Target angle
10
The reference axis
From the center of the spot to the center

of the image intensifier
Small focal spot
0.61.4 mm
Large focal spot
1.4 mm
Anode
Stationary
Typical filament specification
4.2V, 3.5A
Maximum filament current
4.6A
Weight
0.65 kg
Manufacturer
LOHMANN, 110/3DF
Maximum voltage between anode and

ground
55kV
Maximum voltage between cathode and

ground
-55kV
Maximum filament voltage
24V AC
X-ray radiation angle
10 degree
Tolerance:
Tube voltage: 7%
The tube current: 10%
The current time product: 10%
9-8
Technical Reference
9.3.3.
X-ray tube assembly

Maximum continuous heat dissipation
177W
Tube assembly dimension (lengthWidthHeight)
327mm 132 mm238 mm
Tube assembly weight
17.5 kg
Maximum heat capacity
900,000HU
Maximum cooling rate
12,500HU/min
Cooling method
Nature cooling
Maximum symmetrical radiation field on the X-axis
100cm from the spot:

Fluoro: 235 mm (diagonal)
Radiography: 240mm (diameter)
9.3.4.
Collimator
Input power: DC 5V, 1W

Electrical connection mode: through 3mm, 12pins connector
Mechanical connection mode: cast aluminum bracket, screw fitting
Iris collimator:
Fluoroscopy
Nominal diameter: 23/15/11cm (9/6/4.5)
X-Ray beam continuously adjustable to an area of less than 55 cm at the image receptor
Radiography
Nominal diameter circle: 23cm (9)
Shutter collimator
Rotation: 360
Operation: Controlled on panel
9-9
9.3.5.
Others
Grid
Type
Circular
Material
Brivo OEC 715/785: Al

Brivo OEC 865: carbon fiber
Lines/cm
Brivo OEC 715/785: 40

Brivo OEC 865: 60
Ratio
Brivo OEC 715/785: 8:1

Brivo OEC 865: 10:1
Focus distance
100 cm
Image Intensifier
Type
3 Fields
2 Fields
1 Fields
Input field size
9(23 cm)
6(15cm)
4.5(11cm)
Central resolution Brivo OEC 715/785
44Lp/cm
50Lp/cm
54Lp/cm
Central resolution Brivo OEC 865
52Lp/cm
58Lp/cm
68Lp/cm
Monitor
Type
Monochrome LCD
Size
19
Image Storage
Capacity
100,000 images
Size
1K x 1K
Digital Processor
Function
9-10
Negate, Edge Enhancement, Auto

Brightness/Contrast, Manual Brightness/Contrast
Adjustment, Rotation/Reversal/Invert, Smart Metal,
Zoom/Roam, Swap, Recursive Noise Reduction and
Last Image Hold
Technical Reference
9.4. Tube Rating Chart

The following charts and data describe tube characteristics when operated with three-phase full-wave
rectification, a reasonable approximation to the high frequency generator with minimal ripple.
9.4.1. Filament Emission Characteristics

Small Focal Spot
Large Focal Spot
9-11
9.4.2.
Single Load Ratings
Small Focal Spot
Large Focal Spot
9-12
Technical Reference
9.4.3.
Thermal Characteristic
Anode Heating and cooling characteristics:
Tube Housing heating and cooling characteristic:

Joules
800 000
300W
200W
640 000
480 000
320 000
160 000
0
0
25
50
Time (minutes)
75
100
9-13
9.5. Radiation Safety Specification

Operators are strongly urged to be familiar with the current recommendations from the International
Commission on Radiological Protection. (ICPR)
Take radiation protection of the patient and operator into consideration seriously.
Scatter data in this manual is only for reference.
9.5.1. Scatter Data

Filter in the X-Ray tube assembly
3.35mm Al
Additional filter
0mmAl
Total filter (without removable filter)
3.35mmAl
Leakage radiation
Dose area product rate is less than

1.0mGy/h, averaged over any area of
100cm2 of which no principal linear
dimension exceeds 20cm at 1m from the
focal spot under conditions of loading.
(110kVp, 2mA)
SID (focal spot to image receptor distance)
100cm
WARNING
NOTE
9-14
Patients must be kept as far as possible from the focus, with minimum distance of 20cm.
Make sure not to operate when a plastic cover in x-ray assembly is disassembled, which
properly make the distance meet the above requirements.
The operating table matched this equipment should be made of small attenuation
equivalent material, otherwise, X-ray dose may be increased.
Technical Reference
9.5.2. Scatter radiation specification

Dose Contour Plot Test
This test method is according to clause 203.13.4 in IEC 60601-2-43:2010. This test is performed at
fluoroscopic mode in 110kV.The radiation field size is 100 cm2 at the entrance of the phantom.
The measurement is performed at 2 planes at typical height: 1m & 1.5m from the ground.
The scatter radiation is measured in 2 layouts as vertical and lateral configuration.
For the vertical configuration, the table is at height 1m. I.I. is above the tube.
For the lateral configuration, the table is at height 1m. The center of I.I. is at same altitude as the center
of phantom. The distance from the surface of I.I. to center of phantom is 40cm.
The layout is as below:
9-15
Lateral configuration, 1.5m:
Lateral configuration, 1m:
9-16
Technical Reference
Vertical configuration, 1.5m:
Vertical configuration, 1m:
9-17
Significant Zones of Occupancy Test

This test method is according to clause 13.4 in IEC 60601-1-3:2008.
9-18
Technical Reference
Horizontal Plane& Vertical Plane Test

This test is performed at in fluoroscopic mode in 70kV, 3mA, without shielding.
Horizontal Plane
The following illustration shows measurement points in a plane perpendicular to the beam axis at a
height indicated by reference point C1. C1 is the 30-inch SSD, and is illustrated in the Vertical Plane
illustration, below. The measurement points are 25 cm apart. The table following the illustration
shows expected scatter radiation at each point.
Measurement
Point
Dose Rate
H1
3.32 mGy/hr
H2
0.67 mGy/hr
H3
0.28 mGy/hr
H4
0.19 mGy/hr
S1
3.60 mGy/hr
S2
0.81 mGy/hr
S3
0.36 mGy/hr
S4
0.19 mGy/hr
9-19
Vertical Plane
The following illustration shows measurement points in a plane through the beam axis at a height
indicated by reference point C1, which represents the 30-inch SSD. The measurement points are 25
cm apart. The table following the illustration shows expected scatter radiation at these points.
Measurem
T1
T2
T3
C1
B1
B2
B3
9-20
Dose Rate
1.56 mGy/hr
0.60 mGy/hr
0.28 mGy/hr
0.01 Gy/min
Too close to phantom for
measurement
2.03 mGy/hr
0.76 mGy/hr
Technical Reference
9.6. Material Safety Data Sheets

Manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets are available from the manufacture upon request. Contact
the following manufacturers with regard to the materials listed:
Oil
Sinkiang Kelamayi Lubricating Oil Plant

Address: Jinlong Town Youlong Road No. 8, Kelamayi City , Sinkiang Uigur Munisipality
Post Code: 834003
Tel: 0990-6831426
9.7. Material Recycling

Parts or accessories at endoflife:
The disposing of parts and accessories must be in accordance with national regulations or local
regulations for waste processing. All materials and components that could have risks to the environment
must be removed from the endoflife parts and accessories (For examples: transformer oil, etc...).
Please consult your local GEMS representative before discarding these products.
Packing materials:
The materials used to pack our equipment are recycled. They must be collected and processed in
accordance with the local regulations.
9-21
11.
Appendix-System Schematics
Appendix
List
Appendix- 2
Name
SCH Revision
Total Pages
Bluestone OEC 715 System Interconnect Diagram

Rev1
Initial Release
ECO2134470
Yan Xinyu
2012-Jun-1
Rev2
1. Change 5331642 to 5085782

2. Update 5085708 and 5085709
pins # due to change to Harting
connector
ECO2134470
Yan Xinyu
2012-Aug-15
Update computer page
ECO2134470
Rev3
Yan Xinyu
2012-Aug-20
&
&
'
'
DESIGNER :
SCALE:
CHECKER:
RECHECKER:
TITLE:
STANDARD :
APPROVAL:
YY/MM/DD
//
FINISH:
NA
MATERIAL:
NA
FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION
NA

REV:
%OXHVWRQH2(&6\VWHP,QWHUFRQQHFW'LDJUDP
GE Hualun Medical System Co., Ltd
6&+
6+((72)

$
5085717
Bluestone Wiring Diagram
ASM5085484
J3
23
24
WKS SIDE
L
L
25
26
$
PWR
5085778
DVI-IN
Distributor
5085733
DVI-OUT
AC OUT
DVI-IN
DVI-IN
Monitor Left
Monitor Right
PWR
PWR
UPS
5075513
AC IN
5085734
DVI-OUT
5085777
Key Membrane
5085610
J2
CTRL
Printer
5085749
ASM5085484
&
L
Brn
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
N
Blu
In
Circuit
Breaker
N
Blu
AUX_PWR_IN_N1
BRAKER
PJ13
3x2_4R20_4R20
AUX_PWR_IN_N2
BT2
J2
220V
JUMPER
PJ8
HDB26F
AUX_PWR_OUT_L1
AUX_PWR_IN_N1
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

5085606
AUX_PWR_OUT_N1
AUX_PWR_IN_L2
AUX_PWR_OUT_L2
220V
48V
AUX_PWR_OUT_N2
AUX_PWR_IN_N2
AUX_PWR_OUT_L1
AUX_PWR_OUT_L2
AUX_PWR_OUT_N1
AUX_PWR_OUT_N2
GND_CMPTR
24V
220V
PJ12
2x2_4R20_4R20
DVD
PRI_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
PRI_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
SEC_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
SEC_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
12V_ERR
RDY_ERR
MF_PWR
RED
1
2
Xray_Lamp_A
Xray_Lamp_B
10
PDU_CONNECT_1
11
RSRV_FROM_PDU_1
12
RSRV_FROM_PDU_2
13
RSRV_FROM_PDU_3
14
MAINS_LOST_ERR
15
RSRV_FROM_SIB_1
16
RSRV_FROM_SIB_2
17
RSRV_FROM_SIB_3
18
RSRV_FROM_SIB_4
19
INTLC_CABLE
Expo Indicator
5331638
GND 5331608
PRI_TRANS_L1
1
2
PRI_TRANS_L2
21
ACK_PDU2SIB
PRI_TRANS_N2
22
SYS_PWR_OFF_CMD
23
SYS_PWR_OFF_DENY
24
MF_PWR_ON_CMD
5085781
J9
Xray_Lamp_A
'
Xray_Lamp_B
Xray_Lamp_A
UPS_CTRL1
J8 4x1_5R08
COM2
#6
UPS_CTRL2
PJ6
5X1_6R35
PJ3
3X1_2R50
Xray_Lamp_B
1
PJ5
4X1_2R50
PE
1
25
RDY
26
BEEP_INVALIT_KEY_CMD
SYS_PWR_REQ
PRI_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
PRI_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
SEC_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
SEC_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
12V_ERR
RDY_ERR
1
2
MF_AC220V_N
BUTTON_LED_GND
BUTTON_LED_+12V
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_2
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1
INTERLOCK_COM
INTERLOCK_BOARD
MF_AC220V_N
INTERLOCK_CABLE
MF_AC28V_N
15
RSRV_FROM_SIB_2
16
RSRV_FROM_SIB_3
17
RSRV_FROM_SIB_4
18
INTLC_CABLE
19
WK_B
11
WK_A
INTLC_BOARD
20
15
WK_Y
ACK_PDU2SIB
21
16
WK_Z
SYS_PWR_OFF_CMD
22
17
RS485_SHIELD
SYS_PWR_OFF_DENY
23
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
MF_PWR_ON_CMD
24
14
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
RDY
25
26
UPS Power Button

5085833
RESERVED_2
UPS_CTRL1
RESERVED_3
UPS_CTRL2
NO
J15
2x1_2R54
+
-
System Power Button

5085810
BUTTON_LED_+12V
X1
BUTTON_LED_GND
X2
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1
N
O
BI_D4-
BI_D3-
RSRV_FROM_SIB_1
Jtag
Ether
PWR
&
CLC5085900
5085740
Ether
J1
RJ45
J7
DB9M
J3
DB9F
WIFI ADAPTOR
5085518
J5
2x1_3R96
AS
+5V_ROUTER
GND_CMPTR
J6
HDB26F
'
SYSTEM INTERFACE BOARD

5085605
PE
J8
3x1_5R08
1
HDB15F
5085765
RJ45
BI_D4+
BI_D3+
RX_D2-
TX_D1-
TX_D1+
14
10
J16
4x1_2R54
RX_D2+
13
MAINS_LOST_ERR
INTERLOCK_BOARD
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_2
2
12
RSRV_FROM_PDU_3
A
1
RSRV_FROM_PDU_2
MF_AC28V_N
RESERVED_5
PE
RSRV_FROM_PDU_1
11
INTERLOCK_COM
RESERVED_4
10
INTERLOCK_CABLE
RESERVED_1
PDU_CONNECT_1
NC
MF_AC220V_L
5085724
,QWHUFRQQHFW:.6

12
5085727
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC220V_L
MF_AC28V_L
J17
MF_PWR
PDU_CONNECT_2
USB
#12
Ether
#13
5085722
INTLC_BOARD
20
PJ15
2X1_5R08
ETHERNET ADAPTOR
5085517
Ether #26
+5V&+12V
#24
PDU_CONNECT_2
PRI_TRANS_N1
PJ7
4X1_6R35
Ether
#10
SYS_PWR_REQ
5085730
5085714
COM3
#21
Computer
5075515
SATA
#25
Power Cord
BLACK
USB
#11
PS2
#4
On/Off
+12V_CMPTR
J3
110V
JUMPER
5085804
AUX_PWR_IN_L1
12
5085711
BRAKER
5408320
L
Brn
In
5331605
Out
Out
5085710
AUX_PWR_IN_L2
DVI-D
#18
5085782
Filter
Filter
5331600
5331600
CMPTR_ONOFF_CTRL_2
USB
#15
5085723
PWR_LED_N
AUX_PWR_IN_L1
Power
Indicator
5085836
ASM5085484
110V
PJ4
2X1_3R96
PJ9
Jtag
CMPTR_ONOFF_CTRL_1
SIB_TxD
PJ1
6x1_6R35
SIB_RxD
Blu
PJ10
2X1_2R50
PJ14
4X1_5R08
PWR_LED_L
Brn
GND_CMPTR
GND_CMPTR
N1
5085713
+12V_CMPTR
+5V_CMPTR
PJ2
2X3_6R35_6R35
GND_CMPTR
PWR
HDMI
#19
ATX/PWR
#1
+5V_CMPTR
L
L1
GND_CMPTR
Blk
USB
#14
5085770
13
220V To MF
10V
5085729
Org
10V
ON_BATT
Gry
Blu
Grn
USB
#22
SATA
5085712
12
15
14
GND
16
Blu
100V
N
WKS_AC220V_N
SEC_TRANS_28V_L
SEC_TRANS_28V_N
SEC_TRANS_220V_L
SEC_TRANS_220V_N
18
REMOTE
10V
17
UPS_OUTPUT
Brn
Yel
SEC_TRANS_28V_N
18
10V
28V To Lift Column

L
L1
N
N1
20
19
220V To WKS
SEC_TRANS_220V_N
Yel
Gry
100V
Blk
Wht
Red
SEC_TRANS_28V_L
PRI_TRANS_N2
21
Brn
5085721
5085715
WKS_AC220V_L
L
SEC_TRANS_220V_L
PRI_TRANS_N1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
5085766
5085779
22
PE
5085717
J2
BT1
5085803
J1
PRI_TRANS_L1
PRI_TRANS_L2
J1
5085780
ASM5085484
220V
J3
Key Control Board

5085608
Mouse
5085764
J4
Room Interface
Wireless SW
5085811
J2
Ether A User
USB
User Interface
5085748

7,7/(
*(+XDOXQ0HGLFDO6\VWHP&R/WG
6&+
6+((72)
REV:

J4
4x1_5R08
DOWN_SECURITY_N
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
FOOT_COM
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
INTERLOCK_BOARD
PE
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
BUTTON2
J5
2x1_2R50
10
BUTTON1
11
12
GPIO_OUT2
13
BI_D3-
BI_D4+
BI_D4-
BI_D3+
RX_D2-
TX_D1-
DOWN_SECURITY_N
GND_PS1
Mother Board
5085601
HDB15M
15
II_GND
F1
14
II_PWR
15
I. I
5075001
or
5075008
DB15M
GND_PS1
PE
COM
NO
Laser Aimer SW
5333002
Laser Aimer 5085812
N2
P
2
MX12
POWER
MX9
KVC BOARD
HDB26M
7x2_5R50
_4R20
KV_LOW_ALM_N
MX6
FILAMENT
5W5F
BI_D4-
RESERVED_2
+5V_PS1
RESERVED_3
+5V_PS1
RESERVED_4
GND_PS1
CN3 10
+5V_PS2
PS1
5085800
GND_PS1
+5V_PS2
GND_PS1
GND_PS2
11
GND_PS1
12
+24V_PS1
13
+24V_PS1
14
+15V_PS1
PS2
5085801
CN2
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
G
4
E
4
P
1
G
1
M
1
G
2
E
2
KJ4
SAFETY_EN
7
8
INTERLOCK_C
INTERLOCK_D
10
GND_PS1
11
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
12
MF_AC220V_L
Filter
5331600
5085752
+15V_PSW
GND_PS1
BROWN
GND_PS1
BLUE
FILLA1
FILLA2
FILCOM
GND_PS1
19
FILSM1
+15V_KVC
20
FILSM2
+15V_KVC
24
+12V_PS2
1
2
25
KJ7
26
+5V_PS2
REMOVE FILTER
PROXIMITY SWITCH_A
5085808
BLACK
J10
3x1_2R50
18
+24V_PS2
BLUE
+15V_PSW
17
&
BLACK
BROWN
PROTECT_B
16
REMOVE FILTER
PROXIMITY SWITCH_B
5085808
THERMAL_SWITCH_A
2
3
5075002
Monoblock
(With Seal BD
5330746)
KV_GND
OIL_TEMP_GND
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
MA_CAT
OIL_TEMP
+5V_SEALING
10
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
'
PE
GND_PS2
+5V_PS1
PS2 POWER
RESISTANCE
5085816
GND_PS1
PS1 POWER
RESISTANCE
5085802
RECT-
5085728
20V_AC1
20V
AC2
5329278
20V_AC2
20V_AC3
MF_AC28V_L
RECT
5329275
BT3
5085805
DC_BUS_P
+P -N
AC1
5329278
RECT+
5085738
5085773
PROTECT_A
KJ1
KV Control Board
5326487
Collimator
5417680
12
GND_PS1
23
DC_BUS_N
5085761
31
32
11
KV_SET_INPUT
22
28
30
10
IRIS_POSN
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT
21
+P -N
29
COL_POTS_REF-
15
-15V_KVC
MF_AC220V_N
COL_POTS_REF+
14
-15V_KVC
5329161
5329161
13
+15V_KVC
IRIS_MOT-
GND_PS1
GND_PS2
IRIS_MOT+
J11
3x1_2R50
EXPOSURE_EN
CN1
3
SHUT_ROT_POSN
5329280
KJ6
KJ5
GND_PS2
5085754
5085742
-15V_PS1
16
SHUT_ROT_MOT-
T2
E
1
KJ2
+24V_PS2
AR
5330823
MF_AC220V_L
15
PE
CN1
,QWHUFRQQHFW0)

KJ3
CN2 6
SHUT_ROT_MOT+
GND_PS1
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC28V_N
+5V_PS1
2396522
Fuse
5329279
RESERVED_1
J4
DC_ERROR_ALM_N
DC_BUS_P
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
27
M
2
T1
20V
20V_AC4
28V
20V_AC5
20V
20V_AC6
20V_AC7
20V
20V_AC8
J6
2x1_2R50
MF SIDE
MF_AC28V_N
SHUT_WIDTH_POSN
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
DC_BUS_N
IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N
5085762
CN4
1
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT-
5329282
5085745
5085743
RESERVED_5
KV_HIGH_ALM_N
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N
10
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM_N
5085743
MF_AC220V_N
E
3
5329281
BUTTON2
FOOTSW
BASE
5085819
GND 5331608
G
3
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
IGBT Fan
IGBT
5326477
MX4
COLLIMATOR
HDB15F
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
P2
2x1_4R14
WK_Z
RS485_SHIELD
MX10
LASER AIMER
COM
17
TX_D1+
14
F2
+5V_LASER
MX7
WKS COM/XRAY ON
DB9M
MBP1
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
5085755
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
FOOT_HLF
BUTTON2
FOOT_FLU
FOOT_COM
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
BUTTON1
GND_PS1
MX8
I.I
5W1F
5085739
WK_Y
5085747
WK_B
WK_A
15
+5V_LASER
2396522
FOOT_FLU
5
6
10
GPIO_OUT3
5085700
2396522
5085753
J18
4x1_3R00
5331682
PE
20V_AC8
INTERLOCK_COM
11
14
MX2
CAMERA
DB15M
MX5
SEAL BOARD
DB15F
BI_D4+
20V_AC7
INTERLOCK_CABLE
10
16
5085741
FOOT_HLF
BUTTON1
6
9
FOOT_COM
1
3
RX_D2-
MF_AC220V_N
FOOTSW
OPTION
5085115
Camera
5075006
or
5085003
5085732
20V_AC6
FOOT_FLU
+5V_PS1
MF_AC220V_L
15
5085731
HLF
14
20V_AC5
FOOT_HLF
MF_AC220V_N
'
13
MF_AC220V_L
12
MF_AC220V_N
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC28V_N
11
20V_AC4
KEYSW_COM
12
5
BI_D3-
10
20V_AC1
KEYSW__OFF
BI_D3+
20V_AC3
RX_D2+
20V_AC2
KEYSW_ON
PE
5085772
MX1
DISPLAY
BOARD
HDB26F
MX3
HAND/FOOT
SW
HDB15M
5085758
J14
FOOT_CONN
5x2_2R50
MF_AC220V_L
5085771
PE
FOOT_HLF
FOOT_FLU
FOOT_COM
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
PE
HAND_HLF
5085763
GND_PS1
TX_D1-
HAND_COM
TX_D1+
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
KEY_N
J12
3x1_2R50
5
8
RXD485+
GND_PS2
J1
MX11
EMERENCY/KEY
/INTERLOCK
DB9F
HAND_FLU
2
5
Laser Aimer 5085812
5
1
MX14
UPDOWN
BOARD
11W1M
5085737
Xray
off
5085746
J7
2x1_3R00
J13
2x1_2R54
Off
GigE
5085744
KeySW
5085817
TXD485-
5085726
5085759
FLU
HANDSW
BASE
4x1_2R50
On
GND_PS2
GND_PS2
EMERGENCY_SWT1
EMERGENCY_SWT2
HLF
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
&
GPIO_IN2
5085760
HandSW
Connector
4x1_2R50
FOOTSW
STANDARD
5085096
RXD485-
DX4
5085735
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC28V_N
FLU
5085757
GND_PS1
+24V_UDB
UDB_ENABLE
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
UP_TO_MCB_N
UDB_OVERCUR_N
KEY_N
GND_PS1
5085720
TXD485+
GND_PS2
DX5 DB15M
SPI_CS1
INTERLOCK_A
LED_YELLOW_N
+5V_DB
GND_PS1
DX3
SPI_MISO
DX2
Display Board 5085602

PE
5085736
+12V_CAMERA
DX4
DOWN_N
DB_INT
DX1
+15V_DB
LIH
FRAME_SYNC
J5 DB9F
EMERGENCYSW
5330849
HANDSW
5085113
GPIO_IN3
GND_PS1
HAND_HLF
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
HAND_FLU
HAND_COM
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
GND_PS1
6x1_5R08
J3
2x1_5R08
DX1
INTERLOCK_B
X1
Membrane
5085611
DX2
DX3
UP_N
SPI_CS2
MF_AC28V_N
J6
5x1_5R08
SPI_MOSI
5085756
UP/DOWN Board
J1
5085607
3x1_5R08
J2
UP_N
MF_AC28V_L
DOWN_N
BLUE
X1
+5V_DB
PE
SPI_CLK
GND_PS1
5085719
UP_N
BLUE
BROWN
BLACK
BROWN
UP DOWN PANEL RIGHT

5085633
UP DOWN PANEL LEFT

5085632
GND_PS1
ASM5085392
DOWN_N
Motor
5085385
DOWN_SECURITY_N
RX_D2+
5085725
PROXIMITY SWITCH_DOWN
5332771
5085751
7,7/(

REV:
)
6&+
6+((72)
UDB_OVERCUR_N
UP_TO_MCB_N
MX1
DISPLAY
BOARD
HDB26F
MX2
DB15M
13
14
15
CAMERA
MX3
HDB15M
10
11
12
13
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
12
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
11
FOOT_HLF
10
BUTTON2
HAND_HLF
BUTTON1
HAND_COM
FOOT_COM
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
FOOT_FLU
HAND_FLU
26
GND_PS2
25
GND_PS2
24
GPIO_OUT2
23
GPIO_IN2
22
+12V_CAMERA
21
TXD485+
20
RXD485+
19
LIH
18
FRAME_SYNC
17
GND_PS2
16
GND_PS2
15
GPIO_OUT3
14
GPIO_IN3
13
TXD485-
12
RXD485-
11
LED_YELLOW_N
10
INTERLOCK_BOARD
SPI_CS1
SPI_MISO
+5V_DB
GND_PS1
+15V_DB
INTERLOCK_D
GND_PS1
DB_INT
SPI_CS2
SPI_CLK
SPI_MOSI
+5V_DB
GND_PS1
14
15
HAND/FOOT SW
1
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT-
SHUT_WIDTH_POSN
SHUT_ROT_MOT+
SHUT_ROT_MOT-
SHUT_ROT_POSN
IRIS_MOT+
MX14
11W1M
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
UDB_ENABLE
+24V_UDB
UPDOWN
BOARD
MX4
GND_PS1
HDB15F
COLLIMATOR
IRIS_MOT-
COL_POTS_REF+
10
COL_POTS_REF-
11
IRIS_POSN
12
13
14
+24V_PS2
GND_PS2
+5V_PS1
15
THERMAL_SWITCH_A
&
GND_PS1
-15V_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
+12V_PS2
MX12
CCB
5085603
7x2_5R50_
4R20
FDB
5085604
MCB
5085600
KV_GND
OIL_TEMP_GND
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
POWER
GND_PS2
&
MX5
7
MA_CAT
OIL_TEMP
DB15F
+5V_PS1
10
GND_PS1
11
+15V_PS1
12
GND_PS1
13
+24V_PS1
14
SEAL BOARD
+5V_SEALING
10
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
11
+15V_PSW
12
'
EMERGENCY_SWT1
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1
EMERGENCY_SWT2
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2
KEYSW_ON
KEYSW_OFF
Mother Board
5085601
13
GND_PS1
14
PROTECT_A
15
PROTECT_B
MX11
DB9F
MX10
LASR AIMER
KVC BOARD
MX7
FILSM1
22
23
24
25
26
C1
WK_A
21
F2
20
FILSM2
FILCOM
DB9M
5W1F
F1
19
II_GND
18
II_PWR
17
-15V_KVC
16
+15V_KVC
15
+15V_KVC
14
-15V_KVC
13
+15V_KVC
12
GND_PS1
11
GND_PS1
10
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT
GND_PS1
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM_N
KV_SET_INPUT
DC_ERROR_ALM_N
GND_PS1
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
GND_PS1
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
MX8
HDB26M
INTERLOCK_D
IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N
KV_LOW_ALM_N
KV_HIGH_ALM_N
MX9
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N
2x1_4R14
INTERLOCK_C
SAFETY_EN
GND_PS1
EXPOSURE_EN
+5V_LASER
FILLA2
FILAMENT
WKS COM/
XRAY ON
I.I
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
WK_Z
INTERLOCK_BOARD
5W5F
WK_B
KEYSW_COM
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
FILLA1
MX6
EMERENCY/KEY/
INTERLOCK
WK_Y
INTERLOCK_COM
'
MBP1

E-BOX

7,7/(
6&+
6+((72)
REV:

COMPUTER
&
&
'
'
7,7/(

6&+
6+((72)
REV:

Interlock_Cable
%
Interlock_Com
Interlock_Board
Interconnect
Cable
PDU
Interlock_Board
MX11
Interlock_Com
Mother Board

Interlock_Com
INTERLOCK
&
&
CCB
Interlock_A
Interlock_Board
Display Board
MX1
Interlock_A
MCB
Interlock_D
'
'
Interlock_B
Interlock_D
Interlock_B
WKS Side
MF Side
KVB
FDB
MX9
Interlock_C
Interlock_C

7,7/(
REV:

6&+
6+((72)

GROUNDING
BEAD
BEAD
BEAD
BEAD
DB
CCB
FDB
UDB
LASER
SEALING
HD/FT
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR
PWR/SIGNAL
SIGNAL
BEAD
MB
GND_PS1
0 ohm
PS1
%
PWR/SIGNAL
EM/KEY
SIGNAL
MCB
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
GND_PS1
PWR/SIGNAL
FLIAMENT
COLLIMATOR
KVCB
0 ohm
GND_PS2
IGBT
BEAD
PWR/SIGNAL
BEAD
&
&
PS2
GND_PS2
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
GND_PS2
Connector on MF
PINS
GND_PS2
CAMERA
I.I
MF SIDE
'
COMPUTER
GND_CMPTR
485
INTERCONNECT
BEAD
'
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR
SIGNAL
WKS SIDE
SIB
SIGNAL
BEAD
PDU
KCB
BEAD
BEAD

7,7/(
6&+
6+((72)
REV:

220VAC
Main
Transformer
6.3A
Fuse
28VAC
FUSE DISTRIBUTION
28VAC
SIB
WKS
PC/Monitor/Printer/...
Breaker
110V Only
220VAC
+5Vin_CMPTR
3.15A Fuse
+12Vin_CMPTR
1A Fuse
Computer
+12V_CMPTR
PDU
&
110VAC/220VAC
25A/12A
Breaker
110VAC/220VAC
220VAC
JUMPER
&
0.5A Fuse
MF
Motor/IGBT Driver
MF
PS1/PS2/DCBUS
28VAC
Drive Transformer
For IGBT
28VAC
220VAC
UDB
RECT
220VAC
'
AC/DC
MOTOR
'
Mother Board
+5V_PS1
+15V_PS1
220VAC
MF
PS1
+5V_PS1
2.5A
Fuse
+15V_PS1
+5V_DB
1.25A
Fuse
+15V_DB
-15V_PS1
1.25A
Fuse
-15V_MCB
CAPACITY
-15V_PS1
+24V_PS1
+5V_CCB
+15V_CCB
+5V_LASER
+15V_MCB
-15V_FDB
+5V_SEALING
+15V_FDB
-15V_KVCB
GND_PS1
-15V_CCB
IGBT
63A FUSE
+12V_PS2
2.5A
Fuse
+15V_KVCB
+5V_MCB
1.25A
Fuse
+24V_PS2
220VAC
MF
PS2
+24V_PS1
GND_PS2
2.5A
Fuse
+24V_FDB
+12V_PS2
1.25A
Fuse
+15V_KVC
+12V_CAMERA
+24V_PS2
1.25A
Fuse
+24V_MCB_PS2
+24V_UDB
+24V_MCB_PS1
+12V_MCB_PS2

7,7/(
REV:
)
6&+
6+((72)

Rev1
Initial Release
ECO2134470
Yan Xinyu
2012-Jun-1
Rev2
1. Change 5331642 to 5085782

2. Update 5085708 and 5085709
connector
ECO2134470
Yan Xinyu
2012-Aug-15
ECO2134470
Rev3
Yan Xinyu
2012-Aug-20
&
&
'
'
DESIGNER :
SCALE:
CHECKER:
RECHECKER:
TITLE:
STANDARD :
APPROVAL:
YY/MM/DD
//
FINISH:
NA
MATERIAL:
NA
NA

REV:
6&+
6+((72)

$
5085717
ASM5085484
J3
23
24
WKS SIDE
L
L
25
26
PWR
5085778
DVI-IN
Distributor
5085733
DVI-OUT
AC OUT
DVI-IN
DVI-IN
Monitor Left
Monitor Right
PWR
PWR
UPS
5075513
AC IN
5085734
DVI-OUT
5085777
Key Membrane
5085610
J2
CTRL
Printer
5085749
ASM5085484
Filter
Filter
5331600
5331600
&
L
Brn
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
N
Blu
In
Circuit
Breaker
N
Blu
AUX_PWR_IN_N1
BRAKER
PJ13
3x2_4R20_4R20
AUX_PWR_IN_N2
BT2
PJ8
HDB26F

5085606
24V
AUX_PWR_IN_N1
AUX_PWR_OUT_N1
AUX_PWR_IN_L2
AUX_PWR_OUT_L2
220V
48V
AUX_PWR_OUT_N2
AUX_PWR_IN_N2
AUX_PWR_OUT_L1
AUX_PWR_OUT_L2
AUX_PWR_OUT_N1
AUX_PWR_OUT_N2
GND_CMPTR
J2
220V
JUMPER
PJ12
2x2_4R20_4R20
On/Off
DVD
PRI_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
PRI_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
SEC_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
SEC_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
12V_ERR
RDY_ERR
MF_PWR
J8 4x1_5R08
COM2
#6
10
PDU_CONNECT_1
11
RSRV_FROM_PDU_1
12
RSRV_FROM_PDU_2
13
RSRV_FROM_PDU_3
14
MAINS_LOST_ERR
15
RSRV_FROM_SIB_1
16
RSRV_FROM_SIB_2
17
RSRV_FROM_SIB_3
18
RSRV_FROM_SIB_4
1
2
Xray_Lamp_A
Xray_Lamp_B
Expo Indicator
5331638
GND 5331608
1
2
PRI_TRANS_L2
21
ACK_PDU2SIB
PRI_TRANS_N2
22
SYS_PWR_OFF_CMD
23
SYS_PWR_OFF_DENY
24
MF_PWR_ON_CMD
5085781
J9
PRI_TRANS_L1
Xray_Lamp_A
'
Xray_Lamp_B
Xray_Lamp_A
UPS_CTRL1
UPS_CTRL2
PJ15
2X1_5R08
PJ6
5X1_6R35
PJ3
3X1_2R50
Xray_Lamp_B
1
PJ5
4X1_2R50
PE
1
19
INTLC_CABLE
20
INTLC_BOARD
25
RDY
26
SYS_PWR_REQ
PRI_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
PRI_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
SEC_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
SEC_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
12V_ERR
RDY_ERR
1
2
MF_AC220V_N
BUTTON_LED_GND
BUTTON_LED_+12V
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_2
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1
INTERLOCK_COM
INTERLOCK_CABLE
INTERLOCK_BOARD
MF_AC220V_L
MF_AC220V_N
13
MAINS_LOST_ERR
14
RSRV_FROM_SIB_1
15
RSRV_FROM_SIB_2
16
RSRV_FROM_SIB_3
17
RSRV_FROM_SIB_4
18
INTLC_CABLE
19
INTERLOCK_BOARD
10
WK_B
11
WK_A
INTLC_BOARD
20
15
WK_Y
ACK_PDU2SIB
21
16
WK_Z
SYS_PWR_OFF_CMD
22
17
RS485_SHIELD
SYS_PWR_OFF_DENY
23
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
MF_PWR_ON_CMD
24
14
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
RDY
25
26
UPS Power Button

5085833
RESERVED_2
UPS_CTRL1
RESERVED_3
UPS_CTRL2
NO
J15
2x1_2R54
+
-
System Power Button

5085810
BUTTON_LED_+12V
X1
BUTTON_LED_GND
X2
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1
N
O
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_2
3
12
RSRV_FROM_PDU_3
A
2
11
RSRV_FROM_PDU_2
MF_AC28V_N
RESERVED_5
RSRV_FROM_PDU_1
INTERLOCK_COM
RESERVED_4
PE
10
INTERLOCK_CABLE
RESERVED_1
PDU_CONNECT_1
NC
MF_AC220V_L
5085724
,QWHUFRQQHFW:.6

12
5085727
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC28V_N
MF_AC28V_L
J17
MF_PWR
PDU_CONNECT_2
BI_D4-
BI_D3-
Jtag
Ether
&
PWR
CLC5085900
Ether
J1
RJ45
J5
2x1_3R96
AS
+5V_ROUTER
GND_CMPTR
J6
HDB26F
'

5085605
PE
J8
3x1_5R08
1
HDB15F
5085765
RJ45
BI_D4+
BI_D3+
RX_D2-
TX_D1-
TX_D1+
WIFI ADAPTOR
5085518
5085740
J7
DB9M
J3
DB9F
J16
4x1_2R54
RX_D2+
USB
#12
Ether
#13
5085722
5085730
RED
BLACK
ETHERNET ADAPTOR
5085517
Ether #26
+5V&+12V
#24
PDU_CONNECT_2
PRI_TRANS_N1
PJ7
4X1_6R35
Ether
#10
SYS_PWR_REQ
Power Cord
5085714
COM3
#21
Computer
5075515
SATA
#25
+12V_CMPTR
AUX_PWR_OUT_L1
220V
CMPTR_ONOFF_CTRL_2
J3
110V
JUMPER
5085804
AUX_PWR_IN_L1
12
5085711
BRAKER
5408320
L
Brn
In
5331605
Out
Out
5085710
AUX_PWR_IN_L2
CMPTR_ONOFF_CTRL_1
USB
#11
PS2
#4
5085782
Power
Indicator
5085836
ASM5085484
110V
PWR_LED_N
AUX_PWR_IN_L1
DVI-D
#18
5085723
PJ4
2X1_3R96
PJ9
Jtag
SIB_TxD
Blu
PJ10
2X1_2R50
SIB_RxD
Brn
PJ1
6x1_6R35
USB
#15
ATX/PWR
#1
PJ14
4X1_5R08
PJ2
2X3_6R35_6R35
HDMI
#19
GND_CMPTR
PWR_LED_L
GND_CMPTR
N1
5085713
+12V_CMPTR
+5V_CMPTR
GND_CMPTR
+5V_CMPTR
PWR
L
L1
GND_CMPTR
Blk
USB
#14
5085770
13
220V To MF
10V
5085729
Org
10V
ON_BATT
Gry
Blu
Grn
14
USB
#22
SATA
5085712
12
15
Blu
GND
17
16
28V To Lift Column
REMOTE
Brn
Yel
10V
100V
N
WKS_AC220V_N
SEC_TRANS_28V_L
SEC_TRANS_28V_N
SEC_TRANS_220V_L
SEC_TRANS_220V_N
18
UPS_OUTPUT
18
SEC_TRANS_220V_N
Yel
L
L1
N
N1
20
19
220V To WKS
10V
5085721
SEC_TRANS_28V_N
PRI_TRANS_N2
Blk
Wht
Red
WKS_AC220V_L
L
21
Gry
100V
5085779
22
Brn
5085766
5085715
SEC_TRANS_28V_L
PRI_TRANS_N1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
PE
5085717
J2
BT1
5085803
J1
PRI_TRANS_L1
PRI_TRANS_L2
J1
5085780
ASM5085484
220V
SEC_TRANS_220V_L
J3
Key Control Board

5085608
Mouse
5085764
J4
Room Interface
Wireless SW
5085811
J2
Ether A User
USB
User Interface
5085748

7,7/(
6&+
6+((72)
REV:

J4
4x1_5R08
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
HAND_HLF
GND_PS1
10
11
GPIO_OUT3
12
GPIO_OUT2
13
FRAME_SYNC
14
INTERLOCK_BOARD
6
8
F1
14
II_PWR
15
BI_D3-
BI_D4+
BI_D4-
BI_D3+
RX_D2-
DOWN_SECURITY_N
GND_PS1
TX_D1-
I. I
5075001
or
5075008
DB15M
PE
GND_PS1
COM
NO
Laser Aimer SW
5333002
Laser Aimer 5085812
10
10
PE
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
BUTTON2
J5
2x1_2R50
MX10
LASER AIMER
Mother Board
5085601
N2
P
2
BUTTON1
MX7
WKS COM/XRAY ON
DB9M
MBP1
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
MX12
POWER
MX9
KVC BOARD
HDB26M
7x2_5R50
_4R20
2
3
IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N
DC_ERROR_ALM_N
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM_N
MX6
FILAMENT
5W5F
5085743
5085743
+5V_PS2
+5V_PS1
BI_D4-
RESERVED_2
+5V_PS1
RESERVED_3
+5V_PS1
RESERVED_4
GND_PS1
RESERVED_5
CN3 10
PS1
5085800
GND_PS1
+5V_PS2
GND_PS1
GND_PS2
11
GND_PS1
12
+24V_PS1
13
+24V_PS1
14
+15V_PS1
PS2
5085801
CN2
6
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
PE
8
9
INTERLOCK_D
10
GND_PS1
11
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
12
MF_AC220V_L
Filter
5331600
G
1
M
1
G
2
E
2
5085752
5085773
10
IRIS_POSN
11
KJ4
KJ6
KJ5
PROTECT_A
+15V_PSW
GND_PS1
BROWN
GND_PS1
BLUE
FILLA1
FILLA2
18
FILCOM
GND_PS1
19
FILSM1
+15V_KVC
20
FILSM2
1
2
25
KJ7
26
+5V_PS2
R
REMOVE FILTER
PROXIMITY SWITCH_A
5085808
BLACK
J10
3x1_2R50
17
+12V_PS2
BLUE
+15V_PSW
16
24
&
BLACK
BROWN
PROTECT_B
KJ1
KV Control Board
5326487
Collimator
5417680
12
GND_PS1
+15V_KVC
REMOVE FILTER
PROXIMITY SWITCH_B
5085808
THERMAL_SWITCH_A
2
3
5075002
Monoblock
(With Seal BD
5330746)
KV_GND
OIL_TEMP_GND
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
MA_CAT
'
OIL_TEMP
+5V_SEALING
10
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
PE
GND_PS2
+5V_PS1
PS2 POWER
RESISTANCE
5085816
GND_PS1
PS1 POWER
RESISTANCE
5085802
AC_IN_N
5085728
20V_AC1
20V
AC2
5329278
20V_AC2
20V_AC3
MF_AC28V_L
RECT
5329275
BT3
5085805
DC_BUS_P
+P -N
AC1
5329278
AC_IN_P
5085738
31
32
COL_POTS_REF-
5329280
KV_SET_INPUT
+24V_PS2
DC_BUS_N
5085761
30
COL_POTS_REF+
T2
E
1
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT
28
29
15
23
+P -N
IRIS_MOT-
14
22
IRIS_MOT+
13
21
SHUT_ROT_POSN
GND_PS1
CN1
3
SHUT_ROT_MOT-
GND_PS1
-15V_PS1
16
CN1
1
SHUT_ROT_MOT+
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
-15V_KVC
MF_AC220V_N
5085742
INTERLOCK_C
-15V_KVC
5329161
5329161
SAFETY_EN
EXPOSURE_EN
+15V_KVC
SHUT_WIDTH_POSN
J11
3x1_2R50
GND_PS2
AR
5330823
MF_AC220V_L
P
1
GND_PS2
5085754
J4
E
4
KJ2
+24V_PS2
15
27
G
4
T1
MF_AC220V_L
GND_PS1
,QWHUFRQQHFW0)

MF_AC220V_N
M
2
KJ3
CN2 6
Fuse
5329279
RESERVED_1
DC_BUS_P
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
5085731
2396522
1
1
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT-
5329282
5085745
CN4
BUTTON2
FOOTSW
BASE
5085819
GND 5331608
KV_LOW_ALM_N
KV_HIGH_ALM_N
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
E
3
5329281
WK_Z
RS485_SHIELD
G
3
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
IGBT Fan
IGBT
5326477
MX4
COLLIMATOR
HDB15F
COM
17
P2
2x1_4R14
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC28V_N
WK_Y
20V
20V_AC4
28V
20V_AC5
20V
20V_AC6
20V_AC7
20V
20V_AC8
J6
2x1_2R50
MF SIDE
MF_AC28V_N
WK_B
WK_A
15
TX_D1+
HDB15M
15
F2
II_GND
+5V_LASER
MX8
I.I
5W1F
MF_AC220V_N
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
FOOT_HLF
BUTTON2
FOOT_FLU
FOOT_COM
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
BUTTON1
+5V_LASER
2396522
5085700
5
6
2396522
BUTTON1
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
20V_AC8
FOOT_COM
RXD485+
GND_PS2
J18
4x1_3R00
20V_AC7
FOOT_FLU
5085753
20V_AC6
INTERLOCK_COM
11
14
MX2
CAMERA
DB15M
FOOT_HLF
6
9
BI_D4+
PE
20V_AC5
INTERLOCK_CABLE
10
16
5085741
MX5
SEAL BOARD
DB15F
RX_D2-
MF_AC220V_N
FOOTSW
OPTION
5085115
Camera
5075006
or
5085003
5085732
20V_AC4
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC28V_N
FOOT_COM
1
3
+5V_PS1
MF_AC220V_L
15
20V_AC1
FOOT_FLU
MF_AC220V_N
HLF
14
5331682
5085755
FLU
13
20V_AC3
FOOT_HLF
KEYSW_COM
12
12
DC_BUS_N
KEYSW__OFF
11
5085762
PE
BI_D3-
10
5085739
BI_D3+
MX1
DISPLAY
BOARD
HDB26F
MX3
HAND/FOOT
SW
HDB15M
5085758
J14
FOOT_CONN
5x2_2R50
RX_D2+
20V_AC2
KEYSW_ON
5085772
5085747
MF_AC220V_L
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1
EMERGENCY_SWT1
EMERGENCY_SWT2
5085771
PE
FOOT_HLF
FOOT_FLU
FOOT_COM
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
PE
5085763
GND_PS1
TX_D1-
HAND_COM
TX_D1+
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
KEY_N
J12
3x1_2R50
5
8
5085726
MX11
EMERENCY/KEY
/INTERLOCK
DB9F
HAND_FLU
2
5
Laser Aimer 5085812
5
1
MX14
UPDOWN
BOARD
11W1M
5085737
Xray
off
5085746
TXD485-
J7
2x1_3R00
J13
2x1_2R54
Off
GigE
5085744
KeySW
5085817
GND_PS2
J1
5085759
'
HANDSW
BASE
4x1_2R50
On
GND_PS2
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2
HLF
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
&
RXD485-
5085760
HandSW
Connector
4x1_2R50
FOOTSW
STANDARD
5085096
TXD485+
GND_PS2
GPIO_IN2
DX4
5085735
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC28V_N
FLU
5085757
GND_PS1
+24V_UDB
UDB_ENABLE
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
UP_TO_MCB_N
UDB_OVERCUR_N
KEY_N
GND_PS1
5085720
DX5 DB15M
SPI_CS1
INTERLOCK_A
LED_YELLOW_N
+5V_DB
GND_PS1
SPI_MISO
DB_INT
DX3

PE
5085736
LIH
+12V_CAMERA
DX4
DOWN_SECURITY_N
+15V_DB
DX2
GND_PS1
HAND_HLF
DOWN_N
J5 DB9F
EMERGENCYSW
5330849
HANDSW
5085113
DX1
INTERLOCK_B
J3
2x1_5R08
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
HAND_FLU
HAND_COM
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
6x1_5R08
GPIO_IN3
SPI_CS2
DX1
GND_PS1
X1
Membrane
5085611
DX2
DX3
UP_N
SPI_MOSI
MF_AC28V_N
J6
5x1_5R08
J1
3x1_5R08
5085756
UP/DOWN Board
5085607
J2
UP_N
MF_AC28V_L
DOWN_N
UP_N
BLUE
X1
+5V_DB
PE
SPI_CLK
GND_PS1
5085719
GND_PS1
BLUE
BROWN
BLACK
BROWN
UP DOWN PANEL RIGHT

5085633
UP DOWN PANEL LEFT

5085632
DOWN_N
ASM5085392
DOWN_SECURITY_N
Motor
5085385
RX_D2+
5085725
5332771
5085751
7,7/(

REV:
)
6&+
6+((72)
UDB_OVERCUR_N
UP_TO_MCB_N
MX1
DISPLAY
BOARD
HDB26F
MX2
DB15M
13
14
15
CAMERA
MX3
HDB15M
10
11
12
13
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
12
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
11
FOOT_HLF
10
BUTTON2
HAND_HLF
BUTTON1
HAND_COM
FOOT_COM
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
FOOT_FLU
HAND_FLU
26
GND_PS2
25
GND_PS2
24
GPIO_OUT2
23
GPIO_IN2
22
+12V_CAMERA
21
TXD485+
20
RXD485+
19
LIH
18
FRAME_SYNC
17
GND_PS2
16
GND_PS2
15
GPIO_OUT3
14
GPIO_IN3
13
TXD485-
12
RXD485-
11
LED_YELLOW_N
10
INTERLOCK_BOARD
SPI_CS1
SPI_MISO
+5V_DB
GND_PS1
+15V_DB
INTERLOCK_D
GND_PS1
DB_INT
SPI_CLK
SPI_CS2
SPI_MOSI
+5V_DB
GND_PS1
14
15
HAND/FOOT SW
1
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT-
SHUT_WIDTH_POSN
SHUT_ROT_MOT+
SHUT_ROT_MOT-
SHUT_ROT_POSN
IRIS_MOT+
IRIS_MOT-
MX14
11W1M
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
UDB_ENABLE
+24V_UDB
GND_PS1
UPDOWN
BOARD
MX4
HDB15F
COLLIMATOR
COL_POTS_REF+
10
COL_POTS_REF-
11
IRIS_POSN
12
13
14
+24V_PS2
GND_PS2
+5V_PS1
15
THERMAL_SWITCH_A
&
GND_PS1
-15V_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
+12V_PS2
GND_PS2
&
MX12
CCB
5085603
7x2_5R50_
4R20
FDB
5085604
MCB
5085600
KV_GND
OIL_TEMP_GND
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
POWER
MX5
7
MA_CAT
OIL_TEMP
DB15F
+5V_PS1
10
GND_PS1
11
SEAL BOARD
+15V_PS1
12
GND_PS1
13
+24V_PS1
14
+5V_SEALING
10
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
11
+15V_PSW
12
'
EMERGENCY_SWT1
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1
EMERGENCY_SWT2
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2
KEYSW_ON
KEYSW_OFF
Mother Board
5085601
13
GND_PS1
14
PROTECT_A
15
PROTECT_B
MX11
DB9F
INTERLOCK_COM
KEYSW_COM
INTERLOCK_BOARD
GND_PS1
MX10
FILLA1
MX6
EMERENCY/KEY/
INTERLOCK
FILLA2
FILSM1
5W5F
LASR AIMER
KVC BOARD
MX7
2x1_4R14
MX9
MX8
HDB26M
FILSM2
FILCOM
FILAMENT
WKS COM/
XRAY ON
I.I
+5V_LASER
'
DB9M
5W1F
(
4
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
WK_Z
C1
WK_B
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
WK_Y
26
WK_A
25
F2
24
F1
23
II_GND
22
II_PWR
21
-15V_KVC
20
+15V_KVC
19
+15V_KVC
18
-15V_KVC
17
+15V_KVC
16
GND_PS1
15
GND_PS1
14
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT
13
GND_PS1
12
KV_SET_INPUT
11
GND_PS1
10
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM_N
GND_PS1
DC_ERROR_ALM_N
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N
INTERLOCK_D
INTERLOCK_C
SAFETY_EN
EXPOSURE_EN
KV_HIGH_ALM_N
KV_LOW_ALM_N
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N
(
1
MBP1

E-BOX

7,7/(
6&+
6+((72)
REV:

COMPUTER
%
&
&
'
'
7,7/(

6&+
6+((72)
REV:

Interlock_Cable
Interlock_Com
Interlock_Board
Interconnect
Cable
PDU
Interlock_Board
MX11
Interlock_Com
Mother Board

Interlock_Com
INTERLOCK
&
&
CCB
Interlock_A
Interlock_Board
Display Board
MX1
Interlock_A
MCB
Interlock_D
'
'
Interlock_B
Interlock_D
Interlock_B
WKS Side
MF Side
KVB
FDB
MX9
Interlock_C
Interlock_C

7,7/(
REV:

6&+
6+((72)

$
BEAD
BEAD
BEAD
BEAD
DB
CCB
FDB
UDB
LASER
SEALING
HD/FT
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR
PWR/SIGNAL
SIGNAL
GROUNDING
BEAD
MB
GND_PS1
0 ohm
PS1
PWR/SIGNAL
EM/KEY
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
MCB
SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
GND_PS1
FLIAMENT
COLLIMATOR
KVCB
0 ohm
GND_PS2
IGBT
BEAD
PWR/SIGNAL
BEAD
&
&
PS2
GND_PS2
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
GND_PS2
Connector on MF
PINS
GND_PS2
CAMERA
I.I
MF SIDE
COMPUTER
GND_CMPTR
485
'
INTERCONNECT
BEAD
'
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR
SIGNAL
WKS SIDE
SIB
SIGNAL
BEAD
PDU
KCB
BEAD
BEAD

7,7/(
6&+
6+((72)
REV:

220VAC
Main
Transformer
6.3A
Fuse
28VAC
FUSE DISTRIBUTION
28VAC
SIB
WKS
Breaker
110V Only
220VAC
+5Vin_CMPTR
3.15A Fuse
+12Vin_CMPTR
1A Fuse
Computer
+12V_CMPTR
PDU
&
110VAC/220VAC
25A/12A
Breaker
110VAC/220VAC
220VAC
JUMPER
0.5A Fuse
&
MF
Motor/IGBT Driver
28VAC
Drive Transformer
For IGBT
28VAC
MF
PS1/PS2/DCBUS
220VAC
UDB
RECT
220VAC
AC/DC
MOTOR
Mother Board
'
'
+5V_PS1
+15V_PS1
220VAC
MF
PS1
+5V_PS1
2.5A
Fuse
-15V_PS1
+24V_PS1
GND_PS1
+15V_PS1
+5V_DB
1.25A
Fuse
+15V_DB
-15V_PS1
1.25A
Fuse
-15V_MCB
+5V_CCB
+15V_CCB
+5V_LASER
+15V_MCB
-15V_FDB
+5V_SEALING
+15V_FDB
-15V_KVCB
CAPACITY
-15V_CCB
IGBT
63A FUSE
+12V_PS2
2.5A
Fuse
+15V_KVCB
+5V_MCB
1.25A
Fuse
+24V_PS2
220VAC
MF
PS2
+24V_PS1
GND_PS2
2.5A
Fuse
+24V_FDB
+12V_PS2
1.25A
Fuse
+15V_KVC
+12V_CAMERA
+24V_PS2
1.25A
Fuse
+24V_MCB_PS2
+24V_UDB
+24V_MCB_PS1
+12V_MCB_PS2

7,7/(
REV:
)
6&+
6+((72)

Rev1
Initial Release
ECO2134470
Yan Xinyu
2012-Jun-1
Rev2
1. Change 5331642 to 5085782

2. Update 5085708 and 5085709
connector
ECO2134470
Yan Xinyu
2012-Aug-15
ECO2134470
Rev3
Yan Xinyu
2012-Aug-20
&
&
'
'
DESIGNER :
SCALE:
CHECKER:
RECHECKER:
TITLE:
STANDARD :
APPROVAL:
YY/MM/DD
//
FINISH:
NA
MATERIAL:
NA
NA

REV:
6&+
6+((72)

$
5085717
ASM5085484
J3
23
24
WKS SIDE
L
N
26
L
L
25
5085778
PWR
DVI-IN
Distributor
5085733
AC OUT
5085774
DVI-IN
DVI-IN
Monitor Left
Monitor Right
PWR
PWR
UPS
5075513
AC IN
USB
5085734
DVI-OUT
5085777
DVI-OUT
Key Membrane
5085610
J2
CTRL
Printer
%
5085749
ASM5085484
N
Blu
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
In
Circuit
Breaker
N
Blu
J2
220V
JUMPER
AUX_PWR_IN_N2
BT2
PJ8
5085804
HDB26F
AUX_PWR_IN_L1
AUX_PWR_OUT_L1

5085606
24V
220V
AUX_PWR_IN_N1
AUX_PWR_OUT_N1
AUX_PWR_IN_L2
12
5085711
BRAKER
AUX_PWR_OUT_L2
220V
5408320
L
Brn
In
5331605
Out
Out
5085710
AUX_PWR_IN_N1
BRAKER
PJ13
3x2_4R20_4R20
48V
AUX_PWR_OUT_N2
AUX_PWR_IN_N2
AUX_PWR_OUT_L1
AUX_PWR_OUT_L2
AUX_PWR_OUT_N1
AUX_PWR_OUT_N2
PJ12
2x2_4R20_4R20
On/Off
+12V_CMPTR
GND_CMPTR
DVD
PRI_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
PRI_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
SEC_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
SEC_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
12V_ERR
RDY_ERR
MF_PWR
PDU_CONNECT_2
10
PDU_CONNECT_1
11
RSRV_FROM_PDU_1
12
RSRV_FROM_PDU_2
13
RSRV_FROM_PDU_3
14
MAINS_LOST_ERR
15
RSRV_FROM_SIB_1
16
RSRV_FROM_SIB_2
17
RSRV_FROM_SIB_3
18
RSRV_FROM_SIB_4
J8 4x1_5R08
Xray_Lamp_A
Xray_Lamp_B
Expo Indicator
5331638
GND 5331608
PRI_TRANS_N1
PRI_TRANS_L2
PRI_TRANS_N2
5085781
J9
Xray_Lamp_A
'
Xray_Lamp_B
Xray_Lamp_A
UPS_CTRL1
UPS_CTRL2
PJ7
4X1_6R35
PJ15
2X1_5R08
PJ6
5X1_6R35
PJ3
3X1_2R50
Xray_Lamp_B
1
PJ5
4X1_2R50
PE
1
19
INTLC_CABLE
20
INTLC_BOARD
21
ACK_PDU2SIB
22
SYS_PWR_OFF_CMD
23
SYS_PWR_OFF_DENY
24
MF_PWR_ON_CMD
25
RDY
26
SYS_PWR_REQ
PRI_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
PRI_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
SEC_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
SEC_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
12V_ERR
RDY_ERR
1
2
MF_AC220V_N
BUTTON_LED_GND
BUTTON_LED_+12V
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_2
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1
INTERLOCK_COM
INTERLOCK_CABLE
INTERLOCK_BOARD
MF_AC220V_N
MF_AC28V_N
MF_AC220V_L
MF_AC28V_L
15
RSRV_FROM_SIB_2
16
RSRV_FROM_SIB_3
17
RSRV_FROM_SIB_4
18
INTLC_CABLE
19
10
WK_B
11
WK_A
INTLC_BOARD
20
15
WK_Y
ACK_PDU2SIB
21
16
WK_Z
SYS_PWR_OFF_CMD
22
17
RS485_SHIELD
SYS_PWR_OFF_DENY
23
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
MF_PWR_ON_CMD
24
14
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
RDY
25
26
UPS Power Button

5085833
RESERVED_2
UPS_CTRL1
RESERVED_3
UPS_CTRL2
NO
J15
2x1_2R54
+
-
System Power Button

5085810
BUTTON_LED_+12V
X1
BUTTON_LED_GND
X2
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1
N
O
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_2
BI_D4-
BI_D3-
RSRV_FROM_SIB_1
Jtag
Ether
&
PWR
CLC5085900
5085740
Ether
J1
RJ45
J7
DB9M
J3
DB9F
WIFI ADAPTOR
5085518
J5
2x1_3R96
AS
+5V_ROUTER
GND_CMPTR
J6
HDB26F
'

5085605
PE
J8
3x1_5R08
1
HDB15F
5085765
RJ45
BI_D4+
BI_D3+
RX_D2-
TX_D1-
TX_D1+
14
INTERLOCK_BOARD
J16
4x1_2R54
RX_D2+
13
MAINS_LOST_ERR
A
1
12
RSRV_FROM_PDU_3
MF_AC28V_N
RESERVED_5
PE
11
RSRV_FROM_PDU_2
INTERLOCK_COM
RESERVED_4
RSRV_FROM_PDU_1
INTERLOCK_CABLE
RESERVED_1
10
NC
MF_AC220V_L
5085724
,QWHUFRQQHFW:.6

12
5085727
MF_AC28V_L
MF_PWR
PDU_CONNECT_2
PDU_CONNECT_1
USB
#12
Ether
#13
5085722
J17
ETHERNET ADAPTOR
5085517
Ether #26
+5V&+12V
#24
COM2
#6
5085730
RED
BLACK
PRI_TRANS_L1
Ether
#10
SYS_PWR_REQ
Power Cord
5085714
COM3
#21
Computer
5075515
SATA
#25
5085782
L
Brn
USB
#11
PS2
#4
5085764
&
AUX_PWR_IN_L2
CMPTR_ONOFF_CTRL_2
J3
110V
JUMPER
Filter
Filter
5331600
5331600
CMPTR_ONOFF_CTRL_1
DVI-D
#18
5085723
PWR_LED_N
AUX_PWR_IN_L1
Power
Indicator
5085836
ASM5085484
110V
PJ4
2X1_3R96
PJ9
Jtag
SIB_TxD
PJ10
2X1_2R50
SIB_RxD
Blu
PJ1
6x1_6R35
USB
#15
ATX/PWR
#1
PJ14
4X1_5R08
PJ2
2X3_6R35_6R35
HDMI
#19
GND_CMPTR
Brn
GND_CMPTR
PWR_LED_L
+12V_CMPTR
N1
5085713
+5V_CMPTR
GND_CMPTR
+5V_CMPTR
PWR
L
L1
GND_CMPTR
Blk
USB
#14
5085770
13
220V To MF
10V
5085729
Org
10V
ON_BATT
15
14
USB
#22
SATA
5085712
12
Gry
Blu
Grn
GND
17
16
Blu
REMOTE
Brn
Yel
10V
100V
N
WKS_AC220V_N
SEC_TRANS_28V_L
SEC_TRANS_28V_N
SEC_TRANS_220V_L
SEC_TRANS_220V_N
18
UPS_OUTPUT
18
28V To Lift Column

L
L1
N
N1
20
19
220V To WKS
10V
SEC_TRANS_28V_N
Yel
Gry
100V
Blk
Wht
Red
5085721
SEC_TRANS_220V_N
Brn
SEC_TRANS_28V_L
PRI_TRANS_N2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
5085766
5085715
WKS_AC220V_L
L
21
SEC_TRANS_220V_L
PRI_TRANS_L1
PRI_TRANS_L2
5085779
22
PE
5085717
J2
BT1
5085803
J1
PRI_TRANS_N1
J1
5085780
ASM5085484
220V
J3
Key Control Board

5085608
Mouse
J4
Room Interface
Wireless SW
5085811
J2
Ether A User
USB
User Interface
5085748

7,7/(
6&+
6+((72)
REV:

5085725
J4
4x1_5R08
DOWN_SECURITY_N
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
FOOT_COM
BUTTON1
INTERLOCK_CABLE
INTERLOCK_COM
1
2
WK_B
11
WK_A
15
WK_Y
J5
2x1_2R50
INTERLOCK_BOARD
10
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
BUTTON2
10
10
PE
MX7
WKS COM/XRAY ON
DB9M
MBP1
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
MX12
POWER
BI_D3-
BI_D4+
BI_D4-
BI_D3+
TX_D1-
RX_D2-
TX_D1+
RX_D2+
DOWN_SECURITY_N
GND_PS1
MX9
KVC BOARD
HDB26M
7x2_5R50
_4R20
1
2
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N
IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N
DC_ERROR_ALM_N
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM_N
MX6
FILAMENT
5W5F
BUTTON2
FOOTSW
BASE
5085819
13
14
HDB15M
15
F2
II_GND
F1
14
II_PWR
15
I. I
5075001
or
5075008
DB15M
GND_PS1
PE
COM
NO
Laser Aimer SW
5333002
Laser Aimer 5085812
WK_Z
RS485_SHIELD
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
14
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
+5V_PS1
RESERVED_1
+5V_PS1
CN4
+5V_PS2
+5V_PS1
RESERVED_3
+5V_PS1
RESERVED_4
GND_PS1
RESERVED_2
RESERVED_5
CN3 10
PS1
5085800
GND_PS1
+5V_PS2
GND_PS1
GND_PS2
11
GND_PS1
12
+24V_PS1
13
+24V_PS1
PS2
5085801
CN2
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
7
8
MF_AC220V_N
MF_AC220V_L
Filter
5331600
11
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
12
GND_PS1
13
14
GND_PS1
15
KV_SET_INPUT
16
+12V_PS2
5085752
SHUT_ROT_POSN
IRIS_MOT+
IRIS_MOT-
P
1
G
1
COL_POTS_REF+
COL_POTS_REF-
10
IRIS_POSN
11
T2
E
1
M
1
G
2
E
2
5329280
KJ4
PROTECT_A
+15V_PSW
GND_PS1
PROTECT_B
+15V_PSW
GND_PS1
KJ1
KV Control Board
5326487
FILLA1
FILLA2
2
3
GND_PS1
19
FILSM1
+15V_KVC
20
FILSM2
1
2
24
25
KJ7
1
&
BLACK
BROWN
BLUE
REMOVE FILTER
PROXIMITY SWITCH_A
5085808
BLACK
BROWN
BLUE
J10
3x1_2R50
FILCOM
+15V_KVC
Collimator
5417680
12
KJ6
KJ5
+5V_PS2
REMOVE FILTER
PROXIMITY SWITCH_B
5085808
THERMAL_SWITCH_A
2
3
5075002
Monoblock
(With Seal BD
5330746)
OIL_TEMP_GND
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
'
KV_GND
MA_CAT
OIL_TEMP
+5V_SEALING
10
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
PE
GND_PS2
+5V_PS1
PS2 POWER
RESISTANCE
5085816
GND_PS1
PS1 POWER
RESISTANCE
5085802
BT3
5085805
5085728
20V_AC1
20V
DC_BUS_P
+P -N
AC2
5329278
AC1
5329278
AC_IN_N
AC_IN_P
SHUT_ROT_MOT-
18
26
3
SHUT_ROT_MOT+
17
23
SHUT_WIDTH_POSN
GND_PS1
22
+24V_PS2
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT-
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT
21
DC_BUS_N
5085738
5085773
GND_PS1
CN1
3
5085761
30
31
32
10
-15V_KVC
28
29
-15V_PS1
16
CN1
1
INTERLOCK_C
INTERLOCK_D
-15V_KVC
5329161
5329161
5085742
SAFETY_EN
EXPOSURE_EN
+15V_KVC
J11
3x1_2R50
GND_PS2
+P -N
RECT
5329275
20V_AC2
20V_AC3
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC220V_L
E
4
GND_PS2
5085754
27
G
4
+24V_PS2
15
PE
MF_AC220V_N
M
2
KJ2
AR
5330823
E
3
KJ3
CN2 6
+15V_PS1
14
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
5085743
J4
G
3
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
5329282
5085745
COM
GND 5331608
KV_LOW_ALM_N
KV_HIGH_ALM_N
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
MF_AC220V_N
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
FOOT_HLF
BUTTON2
FOOT_FLU
FOOT_COM
12
5329281
MX5
SEAL BOARD
DB15F
17
P
2
5085743
11
GPIO_OUT2
+5V_LASER
2396522
FOOT_FLU
5
6
10
GPIO_OUT3
5085700
GND_PS1
2396522
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
N2
MX4
COLLIMATOR
HDB15F
T1
20V_AC8
BUTTON1
6
9
2x1_4R14
FOOT_HLF
FOOT_COM
1
3
IGBT
5326477
P2
20V_AC7
FOOT_FLU
5085753
+5V_LASER
IGBT Fan
20V_AC6
KEYSW_COM
Mother Board
5085601
20V_AC5
FOOT_HLF
MX10
LASER AIMER
5331682
,QWHUFRQQHFW0)

PE
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
BUTTON1
FOOTSW
OPTION
5085115
20V_AC4
KEYSW__OFF
20V_AC1
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC220V_N
J18
4x1_3R00
20V_AC3
20V_AC2
MX2
CAMERA
DB15M
Fuse
5329279
BI_D4-
MF_AC220V_L
DC_BUS_P
Camera
5075006
or
5085003
5085732
MX3
HAND/FOOT
SW
HDB15M
5085758
J14
FOOT_CONN
5x2_2R50
5085741
5085731
15
MF_AC220V_L
14
MF_AC220V_N
BI_D3BI_D4+
13
2396522
HAND_HLF
KEYSW_ON
MF_AC28V_N
16
RX_D2-
12
MF_AC220V_L
HLF
11
MX8
I.I
5W1F
HAND_COM
5085755
FLU
10
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC28V_N
12
BI_D3+
PE
FOOT_HLF
FOOT_FLU
FOOT_COM
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
PE
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
RX_D2+
20V
20V_AC4
28V
20V_AC5
20V
20V_AC6
20V_AC7
20V
20V_AC8
J6
2x1_2R50
MF SIDE
MF_AC28V_N
GND_PS1
5085772
MX1
DISPLAY
BOARD
HDB26F
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
PE
'
DC_BUS_N
5085762
TX_D1-
5085739
KEY_N
5085747
TX_D1+
5085763
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1
EMERGENCY_SWT1
EMERGENCY_SWT2
5085771
5
8
RXD485+
GND_PS2
5085726
MX11
EMERENCY/KEY
/INTERLOCK
DB9F
HAND_FLU
J12
3x1_2R50
2
5
Laser Aimer 5085812
5
1
MX14
UPDOWN
BOARD
11W1M
5085737
Xray
off
5085746
J7
2x1_3R00
J13
2x1_2R54
Off
TXD485-
J1
5085759
HANDSW
BASE
4x1_2R50
KeySW
5085817
GigE
5085744
HLF
On
GND_PS2
GND_PS2
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2
FOOTSW
STANDARD
5085096
5085760
HandSW
Connector
4x1_2R50
&
RXD485GND_PS2
GPIO_IN2
DX4
5085735
MF_AC28V_L
MF_AC28V_N
FLU
5085757
GND_PS1
+24V_UDB
UDB_ENABLE
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
UP_TO_MCB_N
UDB_OVERCUR_N
KEY_N
GND_PS1
5085720
TXD485+
DX5 DB15M
SPI_CS1
INTERLOCK_A
LED_YELLOW_N
+5V_DB
GND_PS1
DX3
SPI_MISO
DX2

PE
5085736
+12V_CAMERA
DX4
DB_INT
DOWN_N
+15V_DB
DX1
J5 DB9F
EMERGENCYSW
5330849
HANDSW
5085113
LIH
GND_PS1
HAND_HLF
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
HAND_FLU
HAND_COM
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
J3
2x1_5R08
1
GPIO_IN3
FRAME_SYNC
6x1_5R08
DX1
GND_PS1
INTERLOCK_B
X1
Membrane
5085611
DX2
DX3
UP_N
SPI_CS2
MF_AC28V_N
J6
5x1_5R08
+5V_DB
5085756
UP/DOWN Board
J1
5085607
3x1_5R08
J2
UP_N
MF_AC28V_L
DOWN_N
UP_N
BLUE
UP DOWN PANEL RIGHT

5085633
X1
SPI_CLK
PE
SPI_MOSI
GND_PS1
5085719
GND_PS1
BLUE
BROWN
BLACK
BROWN
UP DOWN PANEL LEFT

5085632
DOWN_N
ASM5085392
DOWN_SECURITY_N
Motor
5085385
5332771
5085751
7,7/(

REV:
)
6&+
6+((72)
UDB_OVERCUR_N
UP_TO_MCB_N
MX1
DISPLAY
BOARD
HDB26F
MX2
DB15M
13
14
15
CAMERA
MX3
HDB15M
10
11
12
13
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
12
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
11
FOOT_HLF
10
BUTTON2
HAND_HLF
BUTTON1
HAND_COM
FOOT_COM
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
FOOT_FLU
HAND_FLU
26
GND_PS2
25
GND_PS2
24
GPIO_OUT2
23
GPIO_IN2
22
+12V_CAMERA
21
TXD485+
20
RXD485+
19
LIH
18
FRAME_SYNC
17
GND_PS2
16
GND_PS2
15
GPIO_OUT3
14
GPIO_IN3
13
TXD485-
12
RXD485-
11
LED_YELLOW_N
10
INTERLOCK_BOARD
SPI_CS1
SPI_MISO
+5V_DB
GND_PS1
+15V_DB
INTERLOCK_D
GND_PS1
DB_INT
SPI_CS2
SPI_CLK
SPI_MOSI
+5V_DB
GND_PS1
14
15
HAND/FOOT SW
1
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT-
SHUT_WIDTH_POSN
SHUT_ROT_MOT+
SHUT_ROT_MOT-
SHUT_ROT_POSN
IRIS_MOT+
MX14
11W1M
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
UDB_ENABLE
+24V_UDB
GND_PS1
UPDOWN
BOARD
MX4
HDB15F
COLLIMATOR
IRIS_MOT-
COL_POTS_REF+
10
COL_POTS_REF-
11
IRIS_POSN
12
13
14
+24V_PS2
GND_PS2
+5V_PS1
15
THERMAL_SWITCH_A
&
GND_PS1
-15V_PS1
GND_PS1
CCB
5085603
7x2_5R50_
4R20
FDB
5085604
MCB
5085600
KV_GND
OIL_TEMP_GND
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
&
GND_PS1
+12V_PS2
GND_PS2
MX12
POWER
MX5
7
MA_CAT
OIL_TEMP
DB15F
+5V_PS1
10
GND_PS1
11
SEAL BOARD
+15V_PS1
12
GND_PS1
13
+24V_PS1
14
+5V_SEALING
10
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
11
+15V_PSW
12
'
EMERGENCY_SWT1
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1
EMERGENCY_SWT2
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2
KEYSW_ON
KEYSW_OFF
Mother Board
5085601
13
GND_PS1
14
PROTECT_A
15
PROTECT_B
MX11
DB9F
MX10
LASR AIMER
KVC BOARD
MX7
FILSM1
23
24
25
26
C1
WK_A
22
F2
21
FILSM2
FILCOM
DB9M
5W1F
F1
20
II_GND
19
II_PWR
18
-15V_KVC
17
+15V_KVC
16
+15V_KVC
15
-15V_KVC
14
+15V_KVC
13
GND_PS1
12
GND_PS1
11
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT
10
GND_PS1
KV_SET_INPUT
GND_PS1
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM_N
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
GND_PS1
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
MX8
HDB26M
INTERLOCK_D
DC_ERROR_ALM_N
KV_LOW_ALM_N
IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N
KV_HIGH_ALM_N
MX9
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N
2x1_4R14
INTERLOCK_C
SAFETY_EN
GND_PS1
EXPOSURE_EN
+5V_LASER
FILLA2
FILAMENT
WKS COM/
XRAY ON
I.I
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
WK_Z
INTERLOCK_BOARD
5W5F
WK_B
KEYSW_COM
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
FILLA1
MX6
EMERENCY/KEY/
INTERLOCK
WK_Y
INTERLOCK_COM
'
MBP1

E-BOX

7,7/(
6&+
6+((72)
REV:

COMPUTER
%
&
&
'
'
7,7/(

6&+
6+((72)
REV:

Interlock_Cable
Interlock_Com
Interlock_Board
Interconnect
Cable
PDU
Interlock_Board
MX11
Interlock_Com
Mother Board
&
&
Interlock_Com
INTERLOCK
CCB
Interlock_A
Interlock_Board
Display Board
MX1
Interlock_A
'
'
MCB
Interlock_D
Interlock_B
Interlock_D
Interlock_B
WKS Side
MF Side
KVB
FDB
MX9
Interlock_C
Interlock_C

7,7/(
REV:

6&+
6+((72)

$
BEAD
BEAD
BEAD
BEAD
DB
CCB
FDB
UDB
LASER
SEALING
HD/FT
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR
PWR/SIGNAL
SIGNAL
GROUNDING
BEAD
MB
GND_PS1
0 ohm
PS1
PWR/SIGNAL
EM/KEY
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
MCB
SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
GND_PS1
FLIAMENT
COLLIMATOR
KVCB
0 ohm
GND_PS2
IGBT
BEAD
PWR/SIGNAL
BEAD
&
&
PS2
GND_PS2
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
GND_PS2
Connector on MF
PINS
GND_PS2
CAMERA
I.I
MF SIDE
COMPUTER
GND_CMPTR
485
'
INTERCONNECT
BEAD
'
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR
SIGNAL
WKS SIDE
SIB
SIGNAL
BEAD
PDU
KCB
BEAD
BEAD

7,7/(
6&+
6+((72)
REV:

220VAC
Main
Transformer
6.3A
Fuse
28VAC
FUSE DISTRIBUTION
28VAC
SIB
WKS
Breaker
110V Only
220VAC
+5Vin_CMPTR
3.15A Fuse
+12Vin_CMPTR
1A Fuse
Computer
+12V_CMPTR
PDU
&
110VAC/220VAC
25A/12A
Breaker
110VAC/220VAC
220VAC
JUMPER
0.5A Fuse
&
MF
Motor/IGBT Driver
28VAC
MF
PS1/PS2/DCBUS
220VAC
220VAC
MF
PS1
AC/DC
MOTOR
Mother Board
+5V_PS1
+15V_PS1
UDB
RECT
220VAC
'
Drive Transformer
For IGBT
28VAC
+5V_PS1
2.5A
Fuse
-15V_PS1
+15V_PS1
+5V_DB
1.25A
Fuse
'
+15V_DB
-15V_PS1
1.25A
Fuse
-15V_MCB
CAPACITY
+5V_CCB
+15V_CCB
+5V_LASER
+15V_MCB
-15V_FDB
+5V_SEALING
+15V_FDB
-15V_KVCB
-15V_CCB
+24V_PS1
GND_PS1
IGBT
63A FUSE
+12V_PS2
2.5A
Fuse
+15V_KVCB
+5V_MCB
1.25A
Fuse
+24V_PS2
220VAC
MF
PS2
+24V_PS1
GND_PS2
2.5A
Fuse
+24V_FDB
+12V_PS2
1.25A
Fuse
+15V_KVC
+12V_CAMERA
+24V_PS2
1.25A
Fuse
+24V_MCB_PS2
+24V_UDB
+24V_MCB_PS1
+12V_MCB_PS2

7,7/(
REV:
)
6&+
6+((72)

5358651-1en Rev.8

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

5358651-1en Rev.8

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual

Date (Month & Year)

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual

Ovaj servisni prirunik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

V ppad, e extern sluba zkaznkm potebuje nvod v jinm jazyce, je

V ppad nedodrovn tto vstrahy me dojt k porann pracovnka

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual

This service manual is available in English only.

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual

essi jnustuhandbk er aeins fanleg ensku.

is eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik angl kalba.

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual

Denne servicehndboken finnes bare p engelsk.

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual

Tento nvod na obsluhu je k dispozcii len v anglitine.

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual

Introduction and Safety .......................................................................................................................................1-1

Introduction .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Objective ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-2

Scope ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-2

Service Philosophy ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2

Qualifications ................................................................................................................................................ 1-2

Unauthorized Modifications .................................................................................................................. 1-2

Manual Organization and Use ............................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4

Safety Hazard Alerts ................................................................................................................................. 1-4

Ingress of Fluids .......................................................................................................................................... 1-4

Electrical Shock............................................................................................................................................ 1-5

Explosion ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-5

Thermal hazards ......................................................................................................................................... 1-6

Equipment Stability .................................................................................................................................... 1-6

X-Radiation .................................................................................................................................................... 1-6

Motorized Mechanical Movement ...................................................................................................... 1-7

Work on Parts with Lead Materail ...................................................................................................... 1-7

Safety Interlock ............................................................................................................................................ 1-7

Labels ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-8

Locations of the Labels .......................................................................................................................... 1-21

Symbols ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-24

Electromagnetic Compatibility Statement ................................................................................... 1-25

Lock-Out, Tag-Out .................................................................................................................................... 1-30

System Overview ....................................................................................................................................................2-1

System Descriptions ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2

System overview ......................................................................................................................................... 2-2

Component Locator .................................................................................................................................. 2-4

System block ................................................................................................................................................. 2-6

Subsystem ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-7

Power Distribution and Control ........................................................................................................... 2-7

Mother Board.............................................................................................................................................. 2-16

Mainframe Control Board ..................................................................................................................... 2-17

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual

Display Board ............................................................................................................................................. 2-32

Keyboard Control Board ....................................................................................................................... 2-35

Updown Board........................................................................................................................................... 2-37

System Interface Board ........................................................................................................................ 2-42

Collimator Control Board ...................................................................................................................... 2-47

kV control and IGBT assembly ........................................................................................................... 2-50

Filament Driver Board ............................................................................................................................ 2-55

Monoblock ................................................................................................................................................... 2-58

X-Ray/key Switche and Emergency Switch ................................................................................. 2-60

Image Chain................................................................................................................................................ 2-62